Appendix 9 - Eni Safety Standard

eni spa Letter SEQ/e&p 55/RG of 01/12/2010
exploration & production division Doc. N° 1.3.3.21

“Minimum Safety Standard on Confined Space Entry”
Revision Sheet
Rev Date Pages Revision Description
00 August 2010 25 First Issue
01 December 25 HSE-IMS Management Representative

2010
SGIAQ
Page 2 of 25
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION ........................................................................................................................ 4
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES ...................................................................................................................... 4
4. DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 4
5. FUNCTION INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS ............................................................................................ 6
6. HAZARDS AND PROPERTIES OF A CONFINED SPACE .................................................................... 9
7. CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PRECAUTIONS ....................................................................................... 12
8. USE OF LIGHTING AND TOOLS .......................................................................................................... 15
9. EMERGENCY PLANNING..................................................................................................................... 16
10. RESPIRATORY PROTECTION ............................................................................................................. 18
11. CONFINED SPACE TRAINING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 19
12. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES........................................................................................................... 20
13. RECORDING RESPONSIBILITIES ....................................................................................................... 20
14. DISTRIBUTION ...................................................................................................................................... 20
15. LIST OF ANNEXES................................................................................................................................ 20
Page 3 of 25
1. SCOPE
Safety besides to play a fundamental role in the HSE IMS offers the common way to pursue the
Safety of the Company Workers as well as Contractors and Local Communities.
This document establishes the requirements and minimum safety standard for confined space
entry and provides guidance for the Company in order to define a comprehensive confined space
programs that protects employees from a wide variety of potential hazards while working in
confined spaces.
In addition to the minimum requirements outlined in this document, it is eni e&p division policy that
confined space entry follows internationally recognized guidelines and standards.
The contents of this document and the requirements outlined herein are the minimum eni e&p
division safety standards; any required specific work procedures or guidance should be elaborated
by the Company for their own particular operations and activities, including elaborating their own
written specific confined space entry programs.
Any specific requirements which are not discussed in this document shall be addressed with site
specific rules and ensure compliance with the applicable regulations and legal requirements of the
host Country.
This document applies to all confined spaces which includes but are not limited to: tanks, ducts,
pipelines, sumps, vessels, sewers, trenches, ventilation or exhaust ducts and similar spaces not
intended for continuous human occupancy.
It applies also to all personnel who are involved in confined space entry and may authorize entry
into confined spaces, personnel with supervision roles, or with duties to monitor entrants and
associated conditions, or enter, perform work inside confined spaces.
This document intends to provide guidance on the minimum requirements related to emergency
rescue plan preparation which is part of the written confined space programs to be prepared by
the Company that ensures protection of employees from various confined spaces hazards in the
event they would experience health problems that would prevent unassisted egress and self
rescue from the confined space.
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION
This document is applied to all “confined space activities”, carried out by Company or Contractors’
workers in all eni e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies and in DIME and DICS units.
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES
- Code of Ethics, available on website Myeni.
4. DEFINITIONS
• Accetable Confined Space Entry Condition: Means conditions that shall be provided and
exist in a confined space to authorize entry and to make sure that personnel involved with
a permit-required confined space entry are able to enter into and work safely within the
permitted confined space.
• Authorized Entrant: Is a competent worker who is authorized by the Company to enter a
confined space and he complies with confined space entry permit requirements.
• Blanking or Blinding: Means the absolute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by the fastening
of a solid plate ( such as a spectacle blind or a skillet blind) that completely covers the bore
and that is capable of withstanding the maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with no
leakage beyond the plate.
Page 4 of 25
• Confined Space Attendant: Is a trained person stationed outside the confined space with
specific duties to monitors the authorized entrants; he is also assigned to perform all
attendants’ duties as indicated in the local confined space program.
• Confined Space: A space that:
a. by virtue of its enclosed nature, there arises a reasonable foreseeable specified hazard
b. is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform
assigned work, and
c. has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (e.g., tanks, vessels, silos, storage bins,
hoppers, vaults, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry), and
d. Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy.
e. have been sealed.
f. consists in trenches and excavations greater that 1,2 m .
‘’Entry ” begins as soon as any part of the body crosses the plane of the permit space’s opening
and the entrant is either breathing the atmosphere of that permit space or wearing self
contained breathing apparatus
• Double Block and Bleed: The closure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing and locking or
tagging two in-line valves and by opening and locking or tagging a drain or vent valve in the
line between the two closed valves.
• Electrical Isolation: It is a secure, proven disconnection and separation of a circuit, or item
of equipment, from every source of electrical energy. Testing effectiveness is included
• Emergency: Means any occurrence (including any failure of hazard control or monitoring
equipment) or event internal or external to the permit space that could endanger entrants.
• Engulfment: The surrounding and effective capture of a person by a liquid or finely divided
(flowable) solid substance that can be aspirated to cause death by filling or plugging the
respiratory system or that can exert enough force on the body to cause death by
strangulation, constriction, or crushing.
• Entry Permit: The written or printed document (refer to as “PERMIT”) that is provided by
the Company to allow and control entry into a permit space and that contains the
information in the Permit System portion of this document (See Section 11.2).
• Entry Supervisor: The person (such as the foreman , supervisor, or crew chief)
responsible for determining if acceptable entry conditions are present at a permit space
where entry is planned, for authorizing entry and overseeing entry operations, and for
terminating entry.
NOTES: An entry supervisor also may serve as an attendant or as an authorized entrant, as
long as that person is trained and equipped as required by the Company and as defined on the
local written confined space program for each role he or she fills.
• Hazardous Atmosphere: An atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of death,
incapacitation, and impairment of ability to self-rescue (i.e., escape unaided from a permit
space), injury, or acute illness that means:
1. Flammable gas, vapor, mist or airborne combustible dust in excess of 10% of its lower
flammable limit (LFL).
2. An atmospheric concentration of any substance for which exposure limit could result in
employee exposure in excess of its permissible limits.
3. Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5% or above 23.5%.
• Inerting: The displacement of the atmosphere in a permit space by a non combustible gas
(such as nitrogen) to such an extent that the resulting atmosphere is non combustible.
[Note: This procedure produces an IDLH oxygen-deficient atmosphere].
Page 5 of 25
• Isolation: The process by which a permit space is removed from service and completely
protected against the release of energy and material into the space by such means as:
blanking or blinding; misaligning or removing sections of lines, pipes, or ducts; a double
block and bleed system; lockout or tagout of all sources of energy; or blocking or
disconnecting all mechanical linkages.
• Line Breaking: Means the intentional opening of a pipe, line, or duct that is or has been
carrying flammable, corrosive, or toxic material, an inert gas, or any fluid at a volume,
pressure, or temperature capable of causing injury.
• Non Permit Confined Space: The term "non permit confined space" means that, provided
all other hazards have been identified and kept under control, the space has been freed of
the potential for atmospheric hazards. "Acceptable environmental conditions" means
confined space workplace conditions in which uncontrolled hazardous atmospheres are not
present.
• Oxygen deficient atmosphere: This is an atmosphere containing less than 19.5 percent
oxygen by volume.
• Oxigen enriched atmosphere: This is an atmosphere containing more than 23.5 percent
oxygen by volume.
• Permit to Work System: The employer's written procedure for preparing and issuing
permits for entry and for returning the permit space to service following termination of entry.
• Process/Mechanical Isolation: This is performed by closing and locking of valves and
may include depressurizing, flushing and purging/ inerting and testing effectiveness. The
disconnection of plant, equipment, and systems from sources of motive power, liquids,
gases and gravity. It includes the installation of Spectacle blinds or spades, etc and testing
effectiveness.
• Permit Required Confined Space (PRCS): A confined space that has one or more of the
following characteristics:
• Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere.
• Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant and making the air
inside unbreathable.
• Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by
inwardly converging walls or by a floor, which slopes downward and tapers to a smaller
cross section.
• Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.
• Written Confined space Program: This is the Company overall program for controlling, for
protecting employees from, permit space hazards and for regulating employee entry into
permit spaces
5. FUNCTION INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS
All the functions mentioned in this document are not referred to specific organizational roles, but
indicate operational involvements in the activity management.
Roles and responsibilities shall be defined by each organization adopting this standard and
customized for each project, in compliance with the Company regulations
5.1. Company
Company shall ensure that roles and responsibilities are described in its PTW procedures and in
the confined space programs written specifically for the local need. Examples of Responsibilities
with respect to confined space entry are as follows:
• Ensure a comprehensive written confined space program and procedures are prepared
and implemented in each particular Company site in accordance with the local needs.
Page 6 of 25
• Ensure contractors confined space programs, procedures are in accordance with

Company requirements.
• Appointment and approval of a designated Person(s) to issue authorization for confined

spare programs prepared by the Company.
• Ensure adequate resources are provided for a safe execution of confined space
activities.
• Ensure compliance of contractors and their subcontractors with all safety requirements
for confined space entry including implementation of the Company written confined
space programs and any other local site specific safety requirements not discussed in
this document.
• Detailing the preparations required to protect the health and safety of all personnel who
must work in confined spaces.
For all confined space work, the responsibility for safety, during the entire duration of the work
activities, rests with the Issuing and Performing authorities (the person in charge of the task),
Rescue Team personnel and Authorized Entrants. These personnel must ensure that adequate
steps have been taken to eliminate or control the hazards present. These personnel need to be in a
position to have an overview of all operations planned and/or underway in order to avoid hazards
caused by simultaneous activities.
5.2. Individual
The individual shall ensure the work site is safe and he must obtain advice in case of doubt or
changed conditions, also he must:
• Have a general understanding of the PTW system and particularly confined space permit to
work.
• Be competent and have a working knowledge of their own job.
• Do not start any job requiring a permit until one is issued and he is briefed on safety
requirement so he understands conditions and precautions set out in the permit
• All safety measures are strictly followed.
• The individual is also responsible for wearing the proper PPE.
5.3. Issuing Authority
Ensure that:
• All steps in the work activities have been identified.
• All hazards have been identified and evaluated.
• Work site has been visited and inspected with the performing authority and acceptable
conditions are provided before the entry.
• Person in charge of work is aware of precautions taken, any particular safety measures
required, equipment used, and procedures to follow.
• The permit specifies the action to be taken if the work has to be suspended.
Page 7 of 25
• Copies of all issued permits are displayed
• The work site is examined when work is suspended or completed
• Once the work site has been examined the Issuing Authority shall make sure that all
precautions specified and taken before work started and remain effective and
unchanged while the confined spaces permit is in force.
• He shall be familiar with the required PPE and their use.
• Permits should be displayed at the designated control centre, work sites, and other
control centres as required. This is done to prevent any additional work from being
done that could compromise the safety of the permitted work.
• The work site is examined when the work is suspended, before it is restarted, and
finally when the work is completed to ensure that it is kept in a safe condition.
5.4. Performing Authority
Ensure that:
• Workers involved in the confined space are familiar and understand the task to be
performed. Personnel performing the work must also understand the consequences of
non-compliance with the PTW system[Ref. B1]
• Ensure proper training is provided for workers performing confined space activities
under his/her supervision.
• No entry is possible until proper PTW authorization is obtained and strict precautions
are implemented.
• Issuing Authority is always informed when work is suspended or completed.
• The training should ensure that the personnel understand the PTW system and
procedures in general, and the specific precautions required for their work.
• The appropriate PPE is issued and used properly.
• The conditions and precautions in the permit(s) are continuously monitored and they
are fully understood and followed at all times.
o When the works is suspended or completed the permit must be formally

handed back and signed off by the proper Issuing Authority.
5.5. Confined Space Attendant
The Confined Space Attendant shall:
• identify hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the signs or
symptoms, and consequences of the exposure
• be aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized entrants.
• continuously maintain an accurate count of authorized entrants in the permit space and
ensure that means exist to identify authorized entrants.
• remain outside the permit space during entry operations until relieved by another
attendant.
Page 8 of 25
• communicate with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor entrant status and to

alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space.
• monitor activities inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe for entrants to
remain in the space and order the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit space
immediately if he cannot effectively and safely perform all the duties or detect the
hazards stated above.
• alert rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant determines that
authorized entrants may need assistance to escape from permit space hazards;
• take all actions to prevent unauthorized persons approach or enter a permit space while
entry is underway.
5.6. Gas Tester
5.6.1. Gas Testing
Is the process by which the atmospheric hazards that may confront entrants of a permit space are
identified and evaluated .Testing includes specifying the tests that are to be performed in the permit
space .
Note: [Testing enables Company both to devise and implement adequate control measures for the
protection of authorized entrants and to determine if acceptable entry conditions are present
immediately prior to, and during, entry].
Gas Tester shall
• be competent and formally authorized by the Company

• take and record measurements before the work starts.
• monitor and record measurements during the work carried out under a permit
• prevent entrance in case of failed test.
6. HAZARDS AND PROPERTIES OF A CONFINED SPACE
Confined spaces often present, or have the potential to present, hazards related to
atmospheric conditions such as but not limited to the following:
• Toxicity, Flammability, Asphyxiation , or

• Engulfment or Entrapment;
• Physical Hazards;
• Biological Hazards;
• Radiation Hazards
Confined spaces shall be visually inspected and tested by an Authorized Gas Tester to determine
the atmosphere before to initial entry into the space by an employee.
6.1. Confined Space Hazard Assessment and Control Program guidelines
A Confined Space Hazard Identification and Control Program should include but not limited
to, the following:
1. Guidance on how to identify confined spaces.
2. Identifying means to prevent entry to confined spaces
Page 9 of 25
3. Guidance on the identification and evaluation of all potential hazards that may exist at the
beginning of the work as well as those that may develop because of nature of the work
activities performed.
4. Identification of the persons who may be entrants, attendants, and entry supervisors,
performing & issuing supervisor, authorized gas Tester, identify the duties of each such
employee, and provide each such employee with the training required.
5. A suitable plan to eliminate or control all hazards identified.
6. Employees training program & requirements for all the workers that will enter into the
confined spaces and assessment of competence and suitability of personnel to carry out
allocated tasks
7. Establishments of an entry permit system (CSP) for each entry into a confined space.
8. Development of an appropriate emergency plan including the training on the use of rescue
equipment in case an unexpected situation occurs.
9. Program review whenever there is a change in circumstances or at least annually, to identify

program weaknesses and make any necessary changes or improvement to the program.
10. Isolation plan
11. Cleaning Plan
Note: To effectively control the hazards associated with working in a confined space, a written
Confined Space Program should be implemented for the workplace. Before putting together
this program, make sure to review the specific regulations that apply to the workplace in the
local Country.
6.2. Hazard Identification and Assessment
A Hazard Identification and Assessment shall be completed before any entry into a confined space.
The Hazard Identification and Assessment should identify:
• detailed and critical steps of the activities to be performed in the confined space.
• specific hazards known or anticipated.
• safety control measures.
• emergency response requirements including rescue equipments and methods of rescue.
Some conditions may be hazardous; they include:
• the entrance/exit of the confined space might not allow the worker to get out in time should
there be a flood or collapse of free-flowing solid ;
• self-rescue by the worker is more difficult;
• rescue of the victim is more difficult. The interior configuration of the confined space often
does not allow easy movement of people or equipment within it;
• natural ventilation alone will often not be sufficient to maintain breathable quality air. The
interior configuration of the confined space does not allow easy movement of air within it;
• conditions in the confined space can change suddenly ;
• the conditions outside the confined space can have impacts on the conditions inside the
confined space and vice versa;
Page 10 of 25
• work activities performed inside confined spaces may introduce hazards not present or not
been identified initially;
• heat/cold;
• time spent in the confined space;
• obstructions within the confined space;
• communications;
• residues;
• contaminants.
For each specific job these need to be brainstormed to reach a list of hazards to be assessed
6.3. Hazards Related to Confined Space
All hazards encountered in a regular workspace can also exist in a confined space. However, they
can be even more hazardous in a confined space than in a regular worksite. Examples of Potential
Hazards in Confined Spaces: It is emphasized that this is not an exhaustive list, each specific job
requires a process of hazard identification to be carried out.
Location Condition Symptoms Sources

Hazard
Headaches, ringing in
Electrical pits, Normal air = 20.9% Oxygen the ears, confusion,
Corrosion of metal, replaced by
Oxygen silos, sewers, difficulty breathing,
gases generated by organic
Deficiency valve pits, tanks, loss of muscle
OSHA safe entry limit > 19.5% digestion
sumps control,
unconsciousness
Oxygen Any enclosed OSHA maximum safe entry limit None, extreme fire or Oxygen from an oxy-acetylene
Enrichment space < 23.5% Oxygen explosion hazard torch
Usually accompanies
Building sewer
by strong odors or Volatile solvents, welding
Toxic systems,
eye and throat fumes, paint vapors,
Chemical infiltration into OSHA PEL=s or ACGIH TLV=s
irritation with combustion gases, or organic
Exposure the space form a
headache and decay
leaking source
nausea
Exposed live
Electrocution or
Electrical & wiring, tanks or Non-zero energy state (Use High voltage pits, mixing tanks,
physical trauma to
Mechanical vats containing lockout/Tag-out Procedures) process vessels
the body
rotating shafts
Steam tunnels,
High ambient temperatures or Heat cramps, heat
Heat crawl spaces Steam tunnels, power plant
physical contact with hot exhaustion, heat
Stress/Burns with steam or hot surfaces or hot water or steam stroke, burns
boilers, hot process tanks
water
Flammable or explosive range

Sanitary sewers, Same as an oxygen
Explosive in air. OSHA safe entry limit Decaying organic wastes,
fuel storage deficient atmosphere
Atmosphere tanks <10% of the LEL and 0% LEL if solvents
or chemical exposure
hot work is required.
Severe physical
All vertical
Fall No permanently fixed ladder, injury
locations > Pits, sumps, vats, tanks
Protection wet or uneven internal surfaces
1meter in depth
Important Notes:
1-Entry into confined spaces shall not be permitted until the Hazard Assessment has been
reviewed and discussed by all persons engaged in the confined space activity.
Page 11 of 25
2-Workers required to enter a confined space must be informed of all the identified and existing or
potential hazards associated with the confined space to be entered.
7. CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PRECAUTIONS
7.1. PTW Process
Confined Entry and Preforming operations or activities in a confined space shall be controlled in
accordance with the Company Permit to Work Procedure and Confined Space Entry program
and/or procedure.
Every entry into a confined space for performing an inspection or activities requires the Entry
Supervisor to submit a Confined Space Entry permit in addition, he must attach any required Permit
to Work (i.e. Hot Work) or associated supporting certificates as required and defined in the PTW
Standard [Ref.1] activities to be performed inside the permit space may requires a separate PTW
(e.g. hot work permit or energy isolation certificate if confined space isolation is required before
entry.
All work permits and certificates associated with the same work must be cross-referenced.
The process involved in obtaining approval of a Confined Space Entry permits is as follows:
1. Area and Performing Authorities, Authorized Entrants shall be trained and competent on
PTW System and confined space entry requirements.
2. Entry or Performing Authority completes the relevant sections of Confined Space Entry
permit.
3. T
 he Area Authority will perform an evaluation of confined space before authorizing the
Confined Space Entry permit.
4. Other involved discipline, i.e. Mechanical or Process Team will perform coordination work to
ensure that all possible services leading to the confined space are made safe for entry.
Such coordination may include the isolation of services, lock out/tag out and the installation
of blind flanges.
5. Entry Supervisor will ensure with HSE assistance that all personnel involved in confined
space are competent and qualified , ensure that entrants assigned to work in the confined
spaces are properly trained, and they are briefed on the potential hazards identified and
required prevention, control and mitigation measures .
6. Prior to entry into a confined space, the Confined Space Attendant will reconfirm conditions
of the confined space and perform physical checks to ensure all necessary safety and
health measures have been implemented.
7. A copy of the permit should be kept on site, displayed near the confined space, for the
duration of the job, if unacceptable / unsafe conditions arise, or there is a change in the
rescue arrangements for which the Confined Space Entry permit was approved, a new
permit must be completed.
8. The confined space entry is only allowed for the period indicated in the approved confined
PTW and other associated Permits.
7.2. Mandatory Information on the "Entry Permit" Form
As indicated in the Minimum Standard on PTW System (MSS-6 Doc. n° 1.3.3.28), Company should
introduce and implement, use confined space PTW format that should contain the minimum
information as described in Attachment 1 – Confined Space PTW Format for guidance).
Page 12 of 25
The authorized entrants within the permit space shall be identified by name or by such other
means (i.e., through the use of confined space Entry Log –See Appendix 3) which will enable the
attendant to determine quickly and accurately, for the duration of the permit, which authorized
entrants are inside the permit space.
NOTE: This requirement may be met by inserting a reference on the entry permit as to the means
used, such as an Entry Log (time In/Time Out) or tracking system, to keep track of the authorized
entrants within the permit space.
7.3. Pre-entry Briefings and Checks
Before the entry is permitted, the performing authority must brief entrants, attendants and
supervisors on their responsibilities and the hazards and controls for safe entry.
Pre-entry briefings may be conducted outside a confined space in the form of a Toolbox
Talk/Meeting.
7.4. Isolation of Confined Spaces
Confined spaces, for which a PTW and Confined Space Entry Certificate has been requested ,
shall be positively isolated from all possible sources of all hazardous energy in accordance with
Company specific Isolation philosophy and energy isolation procedures .
7.5. Cleaning of Confined Spaces
Before entering the interior of any vessel or tank, depending on the nature of its contents, it shall
be emptied of residual material or potentially hazardous substances. A waste management plan
will be required
Note: Company shall ensure specific methods are prepared and used as required.
7.6. Ventilation of Confined Space
The ventilation of confined spaces may be achieved by:
1. Natural ventilation, however natural ventilation alone will often not be sufficient to maintain
breathable quality air.
2. Mechanical ventilation – Forced or Suction.
3. High Pressure Purging.
4. Compressed Air.
All confined spaces where there is a presence of authorized entrants shall be continuously
ventilated and atmosphere inside permanently monitored until the work is completed.
7.7. Use of Ventilation Equipment
1. Ventilation shall preferably be accomplished using a positive method of mechanical

ventilation that is arranged to Introduce sufficient fresh air and remove contaminants from all
pockets or corners of the confined space; and avoid re-circulating contaminated air.
2. Even after the confined space has been cleaned and ventilated, the mechanical ventilation
equipment must be kept working to provide secondary protection:
3 Continuous gas monitoring of the atmosphere shall be done and monitored for hazardous
atmospheres while workers are still working inside the permit space.
Page 13 of 25
7.8. Ventilation Air Source
The ventilation air used should be from either an electrical blower approved for a Zone 1
hazardous area, or an air driven blower. The air intakes for these devices shall be located
where no contaminants may enter the stream.
7.9. Atmospheric Testing within confined space
Atmospheres inside a confined space must be tested by qualified personnel (i.e. an Authorized
Gas Tester) prior to each entry. Gas Tests shall be carried for:
• Oxygen deficiency or enrichment.

• Flammable gases and vapours.
• Toxic vapours and gases.
7.10. Gas Testing Requirements
The results of the atmospheric testing inside the confined space will have a direct impact on the:
• Method of and sequence of entry.

• Definition of the required PPE (BA requirements, personal gas monitors etc).
• Worker exposure duration.
• Rescue / back up team, or
• Whether an entry shall not be allowed.
Gas Testing shall be carried out in accordance with the following requirements:
• Ventilation equipment shall be shut off before the tests commence.

• The atmosphere shall be tested at all level, the bottom, top, and the middle of all confined
spaces to detect the bad air.
• Continuous gas monitoring of the atmosphere shall be done and monitored for hazardous
atmospheres while workers are still working inside the permit space.
• If the confined space is left for any reason, the atmosphere shall be re-tested before re-
entry may be permitted.
7.11. Testing Within a Confined Space
Where practicable, the gas test shall be carried out from outside the confined space, e.g. using
extension probes. If it is not possible to perform sufficient testing from the outside of the confined
space then, upon initial entry to a confined space to conduct any testing, self-contained or air-
supplied breathing apparatus must be worn. Further a safety attendant must be present.
If breathing apparatus has to be worn, the Authorized Gas Tester shall, if practicable, also wear a
harness and a lifeline.
7.12. Testing Procedure
A sampling device which has a zero set shall be zeroed in a clean atmosphere before each
sampling, and perform operational check as stated in the operating instructions.
Calibration of a sampling device shall be conducted as often as recommended by the

manufacturer, but at least once every 6 months.
If possible, draw an air sample through a hole leading to the space before opening the entry port,
if not physically able, open the entry port and start sampling every meter (1m) in the direction of
travel and from side to side. It is recommended that the sampling time be twice (2 x) the
response time of the equipment.
Page 14 of 25
Compare sampling results to the acceptable entry conditions:
• Oxygen (O2) greater than 19.5% and less than 23.5%
• Flammability less than 10% of Lower Flammable / Explosive Limit (LFL/LEL)
• 0%LEL if HOT WORK inside permit space (Always).
• Carbon Monoxide (CO) less than 25 ppm. ACGIH TLV (ACGIH) has assigned carbon
monoxide a threshold limit value (TLV) of 25 ppm (29 mg/m(3)) as a TWA for a normal 8-
hour workday and a 40-hour workweek [ACGIH 1994, p. 15].
• H2S less than 10 ppm- LTEL (Long Term Exposure Limit), Defined as the maximum air
concentration you can be exposed to in an 8 hour period, 40 Hours/ week, without
respiratory protection; for safety reasons, a more restrictive limit of 5 ppm should be
adopted.
• Other substances less than 10% of the Permissible Exposure Limit.
• Dose and contamination levels of NORM (Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials)
Presence of substances like mercury and pyrophoric scale should be considered.
Important Notes:
1- If correctly calibrated, the gas monitors will sound an alarm if these levels are exceeded.
2- The threshold limits values indicated above may vary according to the local country
regulations and laws or change in the standards. But shall not be higher than those indicated
in this document.
7.12.1. Test Records
The types of measurements to be taken and when they shall be taken should be spelled out in
the on site permit.
Results of any gas testing should be recorded and timed, and entered on the Gas Test Certificate
(See Appendix 2) and will be attached in the PTW, If levels change during the work, the permit
should be suspended.
8. USE OF LIGHTING AND TOOLS
8.1. Lighting inside confined space
The following precautions shall be observed when using temporary lighting:
• Where the confined space has not been declared as gas free, air driven flameproof lights or
certified battery powered torches must be used. Lights must be certified for a Zone 1
(Division 1) hazardous area.
• Confined spaces, which have been certified as gas free but where flammable residues
could remain, may be illuminated as above or by extra low voltage (25V AC) portable
lighting equipment approved for use in a Zone 1 (Division 1) hazardous area.
• Where the confined space has been cleaned of all flammable residues and certified as gas
free, or is a confined space by virtue of restricted access alone and there has never been
Page 15 of 25
the possibility of it containing a flammable atmosphere, standard low voltage industrial

lighting may be used.
• The supply cables to the transformers (approved for use in a Zone 1 (Division 1) hazardous
area) for extra low voltage portable lights, must always be supported above ground and the
transformers never taken inside the confined space.
• Confined spaces including conducting material or electrical equipments should not contain
water. The equipments and extension cables should be in good shape, certified, adequate
for the location where they are used.
• The bulbs should be water resistant when used in humid or wet locations.
• All equipments should be ground unless being in double isolation. If the grounding is
impossible, we should use a circuit breaker of a mass defect outside the confined space.
• Gloves, materials and rubber envelopes can be used when necessary to reduce the risks of
electrical shock.
8.2. Equipment & Tools
If the atmosphere inside a confined space is classified as flammable / combustible, no electrical

tools must be used by the entrants. Air-driven tools only may be used, and no tools with the
potential to produce sparks .
8.3. Radiation
• Any confined space that might normally contain naturally occurring radioactive materials
(NORMs) shall be checked by a certified Radiological Protection Supervisor.
• Where vessels are fitted with nucleonic gauges for measuring levels or product density, the
radioactive source must be made safe by pulling it back into its housing to limit the dose rate.
9. EMERGENCY PLANNING
9.1. Emergency Rescue Plan
This should be part of the written Company confined space program and procedure and it should
be prepared to include as a minimum:
• Personnel required in performing the rescue and organization of the emergency

response plans, including training requirements.
• An assessment of the hazards associated with the confined space.
• Required gas testing / monitoring equipment.
• All the required precautions to be implemented while in the confined space.
• Personnel protective equipment requirements.
• Required rescue equipment and method of use.
• Required tools and any other special equipment.
• First Aid Kits
• Rescue and Resuscitation equipment
• Systems to raise the alarm
• Safeguarding the rescuers
• Training
• Local emergency services
Page 16 of 25
The Emergency Rescue Plan should include a method of communication and a common signals
system understood by all employees concerned. These communication arrangements shall be
always maintained throughout the duration of the entry.
In general, a trained attendant shall be stationed outside the entry/exit in order to handle
emergencies. Particular situations may require more than one attendant stationed at all permits
space access/entry points. The attendant(s) must be familiar with their duties and must have the
training as rescue team members.
The following situation will be strictly adhered to when performing a confined space rescue
operation:
• When a person is found to have collapsed in a confined space during entry or while
working, even though the confined space has been certified safe for entry, no entry should
be attempted to extricate the collapsed person until either of the following measures has
been taken.
• The conditions inside the confined space have been tested as safe for entry by an
Authorized Entrant or the Confined Space Attendant.
• The wearing of suitable breathing apparatus and body harnesses when attempting to
extricate or rescue a person from a confined space.
• The presence of rescue team outside the confined space equipped with all necessary
rescue equipment for the extrication of the collapsed person.
9.2. Basic Confined Space Entry Equipment
It is required that adequate personal protective equipment (PPE) must be worn when entering a
confined space. Required PPE in a confined space includes, but not limited, to the following:
• Safety footwear.
• Safety helmet with fitting chin strap.
• Safety glasses (clear type).
• A lifeline attached to a full body harness must be used by all entrants during confined space
entry depending on specific Hazards and conditions. (If working in vertical confined spaces
(e.g. moving down into a tank or structure more than 2 meters) - why 2 meters.
• Portable tripod type retrieval system with fall arrestor and retrieval winch that permits a
single attendant to retrieve an entrant easily.
• Suitable safety gloves depending on the task assigned.
• Ear protection.
• Personal gases monitor (e.g. H2S, O2 and hydrocarbons).
• Respiratory protection or Breathing apparatus ( as d required ) ..etc
• Manhole barricade.
• Traffic cones (where necessary).
• Ventilating fans & power source.
• Ladders / Scaffolding.
Page 17 of 25
• Lighting (if potentially hazardous atmosphere these should be I.S. or Ex[d]).
• Fire extinguisher in case of hot work (0% LEL if hot work is required in permit space) .
• Communication equipment
9.3. For Rescue Personnel
• 30 minute SCBA set for each rescue team member.

• Stretcher system allowing removal of incapacitated entrant safely.
• Communications equipment to maintain contact with attendant to allow them to be
summoned without the attendant leaving the entrance of the confined space.
10. RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
Dependent upon the type and concentration of contaminants potentially present in the confined
space, respiratory protection may range from a simple cartridge respirator to air-supplied respiratory
equipment.
When the level of airborne contaminants is beyond the filtration capability of a respirator, or where
there is an oxygen deficiency, or toxic gas, then breathing apparatus must be used.
10.1. Breathing Air Standards
The need to ensure a continued provision of good quality breathing air relies on regular
changing of air filters and maintenance of dryers, supported by periodical analysis of the
breathing air supply.
Breathing air shall conform to European standards or to similar internationally recognized

standards.
10.2. Air Line Mask
Air-line breathing apparatus shall be approved and conform European standards or to a similar
internationally recognized standard. A full face mask enables the wearer to work for long
periods in harmful atmospheres, whilst breathing air is supplied by either portable air
compressors fitted with reservoir air tanks, or a battery of compressed air bottles.
10.3. Using Portable Air Compressors
Where no compressed air bottle supply is available, portable air compressors having a reservoir
air tank may be used. In such cases:
• The air intake(s) of the compressor shall be upwind of any known source of contamination
to ensure clear air is being fed to the user (a wind sock indicating wind direction should be
flown in the vicinity of the intake to the compressor).
• The system of air supply employed should incorporate a receiver of sufficient capacity to
enable persons to escape from an irrespirable atmosphere in the event of a failure of the
compressor supplying the air.
The air shall be passed through suitable filters to remove excess moisture and oil mist.
To ensure that an adequate supply of air is available and being received by the wearers, a
suitably competent person must be appointed who is responsible for checking the pressure in
the air receiver, and for ensuring the filters are functioning properly.
Page 18 of 25
10.4. Self Contained Compressed Air Breathing Apparatus (SCCABA)
SCCABA shall conform to European standards or to a similar internationally recognized

standard. These sets are provided where a portable supply of air is required for a short period
of time.
The air for this apparatus is supplied under pressure either from compressed air cylinders
carried by the wearer or from trolley sets.
10.5. Escape Breathing Apparatus
Any person entering a confined space using an airline Breathing Apparatus or a SCCABA set
shall be provided with an Escape Breathing Apparatus set for 10 minutes escape time in case
of external exposure to toxic atmosphere ( e.g. H2S ) .All persons required to use breathing
apparatus shall receive initial training and refresher training at due intervals .
11. CONFINED SPACE TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Company and its contractors including subcontractors & vendors shall provide training to all
employees who are likely to be involved in confined space entry to ensure that they have the
understanding, knowledge and skills required to perform their duties in a safe manner.
1. The employee orientation training provided to each employee upon initial assignment to a
project or to an operating plant shall include sufficient instruction to prevent unauthorized
entry into a confined space.
2. A formal classroom training session shall be successfully completed by employees prior to

initial assignment as an Entrant, and/or Performing and Issuing Authority for confined space
operations.
3. Training content shall include site-specific, written Confined Space Program, and general
duties of Entrants, Attendants, and/or Performing & Issuing Authority, Authorized gas tester,
rescue protocol.
4. They shall be trained on the Permit to Work procedures, isolation procedures, purging
and/or ventilation procedures.
5. Refresher training should be completed on an annual basis.
6 The training shall establish employee proficiency in their required duties and shall introduce
new or revised procedures, as necessary.
7 Each training session shall be properly documented.
Page 19 of 25
12. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES

Any need of updating the present document is notified to SICI department, responsible for
possible updating of the document.
13. RECORDING RESPONSIBILITIES

The functions involved in the process described herein arrange for the preservation of the
documentation for the purposes of the traceability of its individual steps.
14. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
• TO DIME and DICS UNITS
• TO SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATED COMPANIES AND THEIR BRANCHES
For Information:
15. LIST OF ANNEXES
- Annex A: Sample Confined Space Entry Permit From.
- Annex B: Sample Gas Test Certificate.
- Annex C: Sample Confined space Entry Log
Page 20 of 25
ANNEX A
Sample Confined Space Entry Permit From
Page 21 of 25
Page 22 of 25
ANNEX B
SAMPLE GAS TEST CERTIFICATE
Page 23 of 25
Page 24 of 25
ATMOSPHERE GAS TESTS RESULTS

ANNEX C
SAMPLE CONFINED SPACE ENTRY LOG
SAMPLE CONFINED SPACE PERSONNEL ENTRY LOG
Location:…………………………………………………………………………..
Description of the Confined Space: ……………………………………….
Entry Supervisor: ………………………………………………………………
Confined Space PTW:………………………………………………………….
Date: _____ / _____ / _____
ENTRANT’S NAME TIME IN TIME TIME IN TIME OUT TIME IN TIME OUT
OUT
Confined Space Attendants(s):
1. …………………………………
2. …………………………………
3. ………………………………….
Note:
This form is a generic CS personnel entry log it is provided to the users of this document as a basic
reference. It should be better defined and adapted according to the specific sites requirements of the
local Company.
Page 25 of 25
eni spa Letter SEQ/e&p 55/RG del 01/12/2010
“Minimum Safety Standard on the Control of Hazardous Energy (lockout/tagout)”
Revision Sheet
Rev. Date Pages Revision Description


2010
SGIAQ
Paragraph 7.4.9 Page 15 replaced paragraph 12.7 with 8.7
Paragraph 8.6 replaced paragraph 12.7 with 8.7
Paragraph 8.6 replaced “Locking out equipment with Paragraph 7
Page 2 of 23
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION .........................................................................................................4
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES .......................................................................................................4
4. DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................4
5. FUNCTIONS INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS (LOCKOUT /TAGOUT) .....................................6
6. GENERAL GUIDELINES ON CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY ...................................8
7. GENERAL GUIDELINES ON LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURE .......................................11
8. RESTORING EQUIPMENT TO SERVICE (REINSTATEMENT).............................................17
9. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................18
10. AUDITING THE LOCKOUT TAG/OUT PROGRAM...............................................................19
11. DOCUMENTING SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT.............................................................................20
12. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES...........................................................................................20
13. RECORDING RESPONSABILITIES ......................................................................................20
14. DISTRIBUTION ......................................................................................................................21
15. LIST OF ANNEXES................................................................................................................21
Page 3 of 23
1. SCOPE
Safety besides to play a fundamental role in the HSE IMS offers the common way to pursue the Safety of
the Company Workers as well as Contractors and Local Communities.
This document establishes minimum standard on the control of hazardous energy (Lock Out/Tag Out ) for
the safety of personnel working on equipment requiring isolation and use of LOTO (Lock Out and Tag Out)
to prevent an unexpected release of electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic, mechanical, chemical, thermal or
stored energy.etc.
This document establishes minimum standard on LOTO, energy isolation monitoring, and safe
reinstatement of plant or equipment. Provide eni e&p division Companies with guidance so they are able to
elaborate and implement their specific LOTO Procedures.
• This document applies to all Company sites and employees including Contractors and vendors,
Company facilities and equipment.
• The contents and the requirements discussed in this document are the Eni (e&p) division minimum
standard and the policies; procedures, responsibilities, and other information included in this document
were compiled as general guidelines from which Company, in conjunction with this minimum standard
shall develop a site-specific written Lock out Tag out program for their own particular operations and
activities.
• Any specific requirements not discussed in this document shall be addressed with site specific rules
and ensure compliance with the applicable regulations and legal requirements in the host country.
Important Notes:
1- For safe and adequate Energy Isolation methods, Company to ensure required specific energy
isolation procedures are prepared for electrical energy isolation and isolation of other sources of
energy such as, but, not limited to: fluids, hydraulic, pneumatic, thermal, chemical and mechanical
systems, gas pressure.
2- Procedure for breaking containment, confined space entry, flushing, and purging/venting shall be
detailed in other Company operating procedures and Energy Isolation philosophy to be prepared by
the Company for its own particular needs.
This document is applied to all “Lock Out/Tag Out activities”, carried out by carried out by Company or
Contractors’ workers in all eni e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies and in DIME and DICS
units.
E
4. DEFINITIONS
The following definitions and acronyms are used in this document:
Page 4 of 23
Company: an organization part of or connected to Eni e&p division such as: Geographic Unit, Affiliate,
Subsidiary or Joint Venture under Eni e&p division’s/ Companies operational control (more than 30%
share or relevant business direction).
Company Sites: Refers to any offices, premises, onshore location, offshore platform and any other
offshore supports to production or drilling activities.
Earthing: Connecting apparatus to the general mass of earth in such a manner as will ensure at all times
an immediate discharge of electrical energy without danger.
Electrical isolation: It is a secure, proven disconnection and separation of a circuit, or item of
equipment, from every source of electrical energy. Testing effectiveness is included.
Energy Isolating Device: A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or release of
energy (e.g., a manually operated electrical circuit breaker, a disconnect switch, a line valve, a block or
any similar device used to block or isolate energy).
Energy Isolation: Process/mechanical isolation or electrical isolation.
Energy Source (Hazardous Energy ): Any electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, process, pneumatic,
gravitational, chemical, radioactive, thermal, other stored energy (springs, capacitors, etc) or other
energy source that could cause injury.
Flag: Piece of bright orange or red ribbon attached in addition to a tag when the tag is not readily visible.
Never use an orange or red flag without a tag.
Lockout: The placement of a lockout device on an energy isolating device ensuring that the energy
isolating device and the equipment being controlled cannot be operated until the lockout device is
removed.
Lockout Device: A device that utilizes a positive means, such as a lock, padlock, to hold an energy
isolating device in the safe position and prevents the energizing of a machine or equipment.
Lockout/Tagout: The placement of a lock/tag on an energy isolating device, in accordance with an
established procedure, to ensure that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled
cannot be operated until the lock and tag is removed.
LOTO: This abbreviation means Lockout /Tag Out.
Mechanical Isolation: The disconnection or physical isolation of plant, equipment, and systems from
sources of motive power, liquids, hydraulic fluids, gravity and gases. It includes the installation of
spectacle blinds or spades, etc and testing effectiveness of such.
Positive Isolation: Isolation by means of a fixed barrier, such as a blank flange with appropriate gaskets
(following spool removal), skillet, blind plate or spectacle blind, bolted or clamped in place and conforming
to the pipe work specification, which provides an equivalent standard of containment to the pipe work on
which it is installed.
Process Fluid: Well fluids, Gas, LPG, Condensate, Produced Water or any other produced fluid
containing hydrocarbon gas or liquid. H2S, mercury, NORM (Naturally Occurring Radio-active Material) or
hydrates may be present in process fluids.
Process Isolation: The isolation of a process stream from all other streams it is connected with, in order
to allow depressurising, flushing and purging/ inerting and testing effectiveness of such.
Sanction to Test: Some activities need the testing or running, positioning of equipment prior to
completion and return to normal operations. Where this is required a sanction to test is requested and its
requirements specified on the permit and/ or in the risk assessment, all de-isolation and re-isolation are
documented on the applicable Energy Isolation certificates and permit to work.
Tag out: The placement of a tagout device on an energy isolating component to indicate that the energy
isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is
removed.
Page 5 of 23
5. FUNCTIONS INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS (LOCKOUT /TAGOUT)
All the functions mentioned in this document are not referred to specific organizational roles, but indicate
operational involvements in the activity management.
Roles and responsibilities shall be defined by each organization adopting this standard and customized
for each project, in compliance with the Company regulations.
Company Site Management
Company shall ensure that PTW (Permit to Work) roles and responsibilities are described in its Lockout/
Tag out procedures, and in the Energy Isolation Procedure written specifically by the Company for the
local need. Examples of Company responsibilities with respect to Lockout Tag out procedures are as
follows, but not limited to:
• Develop, Implement and maintain a Lockout Tag out program and communicating it to all
employees and all contractors.
• Develop and implement and use a required Isolation Certificates for specific types of energy
containing equipment (See 10.2 Energy Isolation Certificate).
• Developing, implementing and documenting proper safe work procedures.
• Provide Guidance to the required employees and supervisor on how to implement the Lockout
/Tag Out program.
• Develop and implement a site-specific written checklist identifying the steps for energy isolation
(See Appendix A. LOTO PTW Permit).
• Provide adequate Lockout and Tag out device meeting the standards for this document, and as
defined in the local Company program, authorities.
• Conducting and documenting site-specific training that covers types of hazardous energy,
methods for controlling energy and requirements of the LOTO program.
• Conducting the required periodic inspections of control procedures and documenting required
inspections as well as any changes resulting from them.
Dealing with Contractors
• When an external Contractor or vendor is performing work on Company sites, Company shall
ensure that the energy isolation procedure is used and strictly followed, and generally speaking
when in the judgment of those responsible for monitoring the safe completion of an activity that
the risks or hazardous energy involved require using and following Company Isolation Procedure.
• Lockout Tag Out procedures, Energy Isolation Procedures for EPC contract during (construction,
commissioning, SIMOPS) shall be prepared by EPC Contractor and submitted to Company for
review and approval before the Contract work commencement or as defined by the Company in
the relevant Contract document .
Area Authority (AA)
• Ensure PTW System is used in his area and maintain an overview of all permitted work
performed in his area. He shall ensure the worksite is kept safe and returned in a clean and safe
condition.
Page 6 of 23
• Ensure,Review and approve specification, location, number and implementation of process ,

mechanical , electrcial Isolations are in place and the required energy isolation certificate is
used together with PTW.
• Ensure that proper reinstatement procedures and methods are included in job planning and risk
assessment documents.
• Ensure that custody control of energy isolation devices is properly conducted at shift or crew
change.
• Conduct or designate a qualified person to conduct a weekly review of long-term and design
isolation , or as speciifed in the Company local procedures .
Performing Authority (PA)
• Verify that identified equipment to be worked on has been de-energized and brought to a zero
energy state before work starts.
• Ensure that the energy isolation methods and safety precautions are followed during performance
of the activity .
• Prepare and fully understand PTWs, Energy Isolation Certificates, JSA , reinstatement and other
associated documents and procedures.
Authorized Electrical Person (AEP)
• Company Site Management shall ensure that authorized Electrical Persons are appointed by the
Electrical Technical Authority, in writing.
• Specify and implement electrical isolations, prove dead through testing, and apply earthing
(where applicable).
• Remove electrical isolations upon approval from Area Authority (AA).
• Record on Electrical Isolation Certificate all electrical tests to be carried out, and details of earths
that shall be removed .
• He is authorized to carry out electrical work according to the level of authorization (Level of
voltage or equipment type); this includes the responsibility for defining and carrying out electrical
isolations in coordination with the Area Authority or as required by local Company.
Isolation Authority (IA)
• Company Site Management shall ensure that authorized Isolation Authority Persons are
appointed by the Company Senior Manager in writing.
• Specify and implement process , mechanical isolations and prove effective isolation through
testing.
• Remove energy isolations upon approval from Area Authority (AA) and upon job completion and
on instruction from the person issuing the permit.
Employee
Page 7 of 23
• Employees who have been trained in the Lock-Out/Tag-Out procedure and whose jobs require
working with machinery and equipment that could release hazardous energy are authorized and
expected to:
• Notify the supervisor and any other affected person before locking or tagging out
equipment for repair and follow the appropriate lockout/tag out procedures;
• Reporting any deviations of LOTO procedure to his/her immediate Job supervisor;
• Complying with all requirements of this LOTO program and any Company specific energy
Isolation procedure, Lock out and Tad Out procedures and PTW System[Ref,3].
Important Notes:
• Responsibilities shall be further defined and explained in the Company Lockout Tag out
procedure, Energy Isolation procedure and PTW procedures to be prepared by the Company for
the special needs in its sites. (e.g, Roles and responsibilities with regards to PTW issuing and
Energy Isolation Certificates, dialling with contractors).
• Zero tolerance policy and STOP work policy should be used and disciplinary action shall be taken
against those who violate Company policies (e.g. PTW System, Lockout Tag Out, Energy
Isolation Procedure .etc).
6. GENERAL GUIDELINES ON CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY
6.1. Energy Isolation Procedure
The need for energy isolation shall be considered prior to conducting maintenance or servicing on
any systems or components.
• It is required that an Electrical Energy Isolation procedure shall be used prior to starting any
activities requiring employees to perform work on or near de-energized circuit parts or equipment
in any situation where there is danger of injury due to unexpected energization or start-up of
equipment.
• It is also essential that the energy isolation procedure is used for safely isolating other energy
sources such as process fluids, hydraulic, pneumatic, thermal, chemical and mechanical
systems.
6.2. Energy Isolation Certificate
• An Isolation Certificate defines the requirements for all activities requiring isolation and lock-out /
tag-out of equipment.
• Isolation Certificates are not stand-alone documents, they shall be used in conjunction with PTW,
the Area Authority after he or she is satisfied that the energy isolation is effective, will provide final
clearance by signing the applicable Energy Isolation Certificate (Electrical or process and
mechanical isolation certificates) allowing the issue of a PTW and the work to start on the isolated
equipment.
• Electrical Energy Isolation Certificates shall be completed, in conjunction with the Permit to work
system, for the control of hazardous energy. Electrical isolations shall be carried out by the
Authorized Electrical Person (AEP) under the supervision of the Electrical Technical Authority.
• Process and Mechanical Isolation Certificate shall be completed in conjunction with the PTW
System for the control of hazardous energy.
Page 8 of 23
The Energy Isolation Certificate, shall be cross-referenced to all relevant Permits to Work, shall be the
principal means of control, once isolations are in place. The Energy Isolation Certificate allows the
following:
• Identifying the plant or equipment, machines concerned and the reasons for energy
isolation;
• Authorization and control of the isolation by disciplines, crafts, departments;
• Provide a means of recording the isolations which are required before the task indicated in
the associated PTW can be started;
• Provide an assurance and confirming that all necessary isolations have been made so that
the task can be performed (requiring an authorization of other PTW’s, e.g. Confined Space
Entry PTW [Ref1];
• Provide a formal authorization and recording approval to isolate, lock-out/tag-out and

double block-bleed, spading etc. of the requested equipment;
• Authorization of any temporary de-isolations and isolations necessary for testing;
• Provide a means of requesting authorization to remove isolation, lock-out/tag-out, double

block out, and spading etc. devices on completion of the task detailed in the associated
PTW.
6.3. General Requirements
Lock out and tag out energy containing equipment or machines before:
• Servicing equipment, Removing or bypassing a safety guard or safety device or entering a

confined space. ([Ref. 2 Ref 1].
• Before performing work on equipment, an evaluation of hazardous energy shall be conducted as

per the the Company risk Management process.
• When any work is being carried out, all sources of hazardous energy associated with the
equipment shall be locked and tagged in the position that isolates personnel from the hazardous
energy.
• Positive isolation is considred as the most safe process isolation method.
• Proper access and egress in areas where isolations are to be performed shall be kept clean and
free of obstruction.
• Any defective equipment or unsafe to operate shall be immediately removed from service,
isolated, locked, tagged and flagged in accordance to this standard and as defined in the local
Company procedures.
• Compliance audits shall be conducted to ensure regular checks are made on isolations to provide
assurance that the isolations procedures and requirements are being applied and that lessons
learned and improvments actions required are communicated effectively.
• An essential ingredient of any safe system of work is the method, the integrity and the
implementation of the isolation procedure.
Page 9 of 23
• The isolation principle to be adopted, prior to carrying out maintenance or repair, will be
determined by a number of factors, e.g. potential for pressure, dangerous substances, lack of
oxygen, moving machinery etc It is beyond the scope of this document to provide guidance on
the isolation required for each Potential hazard.
• Each Company should develop its own Energy Isolation procedures and philosophies, Lock out
Tag Out procedures to be adopted depending on work activity and risk involved.
The following additional guidelines should be considered and addressed in the isolation procedures:
• Complex isolations should be planned and recorded on a working drawing. This should be
discussed between ALL the affected persons (i.e. person issuing permit and Isolation Authority,
Area Authority, Authorized Electrical Person, Performing Authority of the work to ensure all
isolation requirements are clearly understood and agreed.
• The marked up drawing should be readily available to all concerned.
• Consideration should be given to attaching a copy to the permit and the relevant Energy Isolation
Certificate. Together with a record of the formal risk assessment or Isolation procedure, where
this is needed.
• It is essential that the Energy Isolation procedure is commensurate with the type of work being
carried out, plant operating conditions and other local requirements.
• Isolation procedures should include all energy sources, i.e. mechanical, electrical, hydraulic
pressure Etc.
• The tag or key number should be recorded on the permit form or on a separate form (Energy
Isolation Certificate) which should in turn be cross referenced and attached to the P.T.W. form.
• Isolation should only be applied and removed on instruction from the person issuing the permit and
Area Authority.
• If more than one task is to be carried out on part of a plant or piece of equipment, there is a risk
that on completion of one of the tasks the isolations are removed and the equipment is put back
into service. Controls should be in place to prevent premature de-isolation where dual tasks are
involved.
• If the work is not able to be completed within the shift the site should be checked by both the
person in charge of the work and the permit issuer to ensure it is left in a safe condition and
equipment cannot be reinstated until all work is properly completed .
• If the permit is suspended, the status of the work site should be left on display in a suitable location
e.g. Control Room and the isolation padlock keys kept in a secure place to ensure no unauthorized
access.
All persons authorized to carry out isolations should be assessed for their competence prior to
appointment i.e.:
• They shall be properly qualified (training certificate, fitness certificate etc.);
• They shall posses experience and knowledge on the plant/equipment;
• They shall have received specific instructions on the plant, methods of isolation etc;
Page 10 of 23
• They shall be able to demonstrate their knowledge through a competence appraisal program.
7. GENERAL GUIDELINES ON LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURE
7.1. Standards for Lockout Devices
• Any durable, secure and tamper-proof lock made specifically for lockout is acceptable.
• All Company “Lockout Locks” shall be colored or otherwise visually distinguishable from other
locks not used for lockout purposes.
• Locks shall have individual keys (no two locks may have identical keys).
• The key shall be kept by the authorized employee who “owns” the lock.
• Do not keep spare or duplicate keys on location.
• Lockout devices shall be attached in a manner that maintains energy-isolating devices in a “safe”
or “off” position such that the position cannot be altered without removal of the lockout device.
• The Isolating Authority and/or Authorized Electrical Person shall affix and remove, upon approval
from the Area Authority, lockout devices on each energy-isolating device.
• No person other than the Isolating Authority or Authorized Electrical Person shall affix or remove
lockout devices unless special permission is granted by the Senior Person (e.g Installation or
Operations Manager ).
7.2. Standards for Tagout Devices
Tag out devices shall be standardized in print and format; this is a prominent warning device, such as
a tag and a means of attachment, which can be securely fastened to an energy isolating device to
indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled shall not be operated
until the tag out device with lockout device are removed. Tag attachment devices shall be of a non-
reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking and non-releasable with a minimum unlocking
strength of 22 Kg.
All Company “Tagout Devices” shall be:
• At least 3" by 5" and constructed of durable plastic and have a means of attaching it to
equipment, and designed to withstand adverse weather conditions and corrosive environments.
• All lockout devices, including blinds/skillets, shall be accompanied with a tagout device stating
“DANGER, DO NOT OPERATE” or similar ( e.g Do Not Start. Do Not Open. Do Not Close. Do
Not Energize).
• Tagout devices are warning mechanisms affixed to lockout devices and do not provide the
physical restraint on those devices that are provided by a lock.
• Tagout devices shall be used in addition to lockout devices, but shall not be used alone unless it
is infeasible to apply a lockout device. When tags are used alone, they will have the same
meaning and force as a lock.
• When a tag is used without a lock, it shall be supplemented by at least one additional safety
measure that provides a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by using a lock.
Page 11 of 23
• Additional safety measures include the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a
controlling switch, opening of an extra disconnecting device, or the removal of a valve handle to
reduce the likelihood of inadvertent energization.
• Red or orange flags shall be affixed to tagout devices which are not readily visible or which are
placed on equipment rendered defective. Never use a flag without a tag.
• The tagout device shall state: identified equipment; isolation point; date; isolation certificate
number; reason for lockout/tagout; and the name of the person installing the lock.
7.3. Protective Materials And Hardware
Other appropriate materials or hardware may be required to accomplish the lockout. Some examples include:
• Chains ;
• Cables;
• Wedges;
• Blocks;
• Adapter pins;
• Valve and valve handle covers;
• Lock-out “scissors” to accommodate multiple locks and valves handle covers.
7.4. Lockout / Tag Out Application
• All Affected Employees shall be informed of the isolation lockout/tagout procedure , and the
prohibition regarding attempts to restart or reenergize equipment locked and tagged out.
• All energy isolation procedures shall follow the “Lock, Tag, Clear, and Try” sequence below.
7.4.1.Preparation of Lockout and Tag Out
7.4.2.Complete survey of the equipment and Identify:
• All sources of potential hazardous and/or stored energy;
• The devices that control that energy and their point of isolation;
• Methods of Energy Isolation that shall be used to release the stored energy and isolate
the equipment.
a) If any question arises about a source or method to be used, then consult the
Performing Authority before processing.
b) If The Performing Authority cannot answer the question, Consult the Area and
Isolation Authority /or designee.
7.4.3. Prepare and use proper Energy Isolation Certificates, PTW, and Checklist as defined in the
LOTO procedures and Energy Isolation procedures as developed by the local Company.
(See Example of LOTO Template in Appendix A).
• Determine whether other operations that might not be readily apparent would be
impacted by the work to be done. [Ref.3].
• Ensure Proper Authorization process of the work to be performed.
Page 12 of 23
7.4.4. Affected employees and contractor and any other affected persons shall be notified by the
Performing Authority, Area Authority or the authorized person of lockout/tagout applications
or removal. The notification of the impending equipment/system shutdown and of lockout
status shall be given before the controls are applied and after they are removed from the
machine or equipment.
7.4.5. Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine, or a piece of equipment the
authorized person shall have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the
hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the energy.
7.4.6. All energy isolating devices that are needed to control the energy to the machine or
equipment shall be physically located and operated in such a manner as to isolate the
energy source(s).
7.4.7.Locking Out and Tagging out of Equipment or Machine
Prior to start of the job, the Isolation Authority (IA) shall specify and implement process and
mechanical, and /or electrical isolations .
• The machine or equipment shall be turned off or shut down using Energy Isolation
procedures established for that specific job and equipment. An orderly shut down shall be
utilized to avoid hazards to employees.
• IF the equipment is running or operational THEN shut the equipment down as usual. IF
you can't shut it down or the equipment has failed, THEN take the following steps to
isolate the power source and control other hazards posed by the machinery.
• In accordance with the method of Energy Isolation and following the application of the
isolation device(s), all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy shall be relieved,
disconnected, restrained, or other wise rendered safe.
• Lockout and or tagout devices shall be affixed to energy isolating devices by the Isolating
Authority and/or Authorized Electrical Person and when used, affixed in such a manner
that it will hold the device in a safe or off position.
• Relieve all stored energy from capacitor banks, springs, compressed air, hydraulics,
steam, etc.
• Clear the area of unauthorized personnel and unnecessary equipment. The area shall be
clear of personnel and tools prior to attempting to start the equipment.
• Try : After ensuring that all personnel and equipment are clear, test to verify that
equipment is properly isolated and safe to work on and that the equipment has no
residual energy or pressure.
• The Isolation Authority (IA) shall prove effective isolation through testing , together with
the performing Authority shall verify that the Energy Isolation has been accomplished.
• Every person working on the equipment shall confirm that the equipment is de-energized
and locked and tagged out.
Note : After testing, verify that the switch, start button, or valve is returned to its OFF or NEUTRAL position. If
re-accumulation is possible, verification of the safe isolation shall continue until the job is complete or the
possibility no longer exists.
Page 13 of 23
7.4.8.The Isolating Authority and/or Authorized Electrical Person shall affix and remove, upon
approval from the Area Authority and Permit Issuing Authority, lockout / Tag out devices on
each energy-isolating device.
7.4.9.No person other than the Isolating Authority or Authorized Electrical Person shall affix or
remove lockout devices unless special permission is granted by the Senior Person (e.g
Installation Manager , Operations Manager), Refer to Pragraph 7.6 Lockout/Tag out
Removal.
7.4.10. Custody control of lockout and tag out devices shall be transferred to a person of the same
role at shift or crew change. The person coming on shift and taking custody control shall
verify that lockout and tag out devices are adequately in place according to the Energy
Isolation Certificate and PTW in place.
Importante Note : Company shall further define in its Lockout Tagout procedure the requirments of shift or
personnel changes, also a specific procedure shall be used by Company during shift or personnel changes to
ensure the orderly transfer of lockout/tagout devices and the continuity of protection of the oncoming and off
going employees.
7.5. Group Lockout/Tagout
When Servicing and /or manitenance is performed by crew , different crafts , department or other
group and they are operating on the same piece of equipment or where energy isolation or de-
isolation from one job may affect the safety of another job , Group lockout/tagout devices shall be
used in accordance with the minimum safety standard set forth in this document, including, but not
limited to, the following specific requirements:
• A documented procedure shall be used to afford employees the level of protection equivalent to
that provided by personal lockout/tagout procedure.
• Lock boxes shall be used. The ONE key used for all locks on the job will be locked inside the
lockbox . This box is then also locked and tagged.
• Padlocks used for lockout devices, ALL padlocks shall be keyed alike for a particular job. The
Isolating Authority or Authorized Electrical Person shall retain custody of the ONE key used for all
locks in a lock box located in the Work Permit Control Room or as defined by the local Company .
• Extra copies of the key shall be retained by the Company senior person in the site or as diifened
in the local Company Lockout Tag out procedures .
Important Note: These requirements are the minimum safety standard, a specify lockout/Tagout procedure
shall be prepared by the local Company to Cleary define the following, but not limited to:
• Shall clearly and specifically outlines the scope, purpose, roles, authorizations, rules and
techniques to be utilized for lockout/tag out, and means to enforce compliance.
• Provisions for the authorized employee to ascertain the exposure status of individual group
members (i.e., Company Lockout/Tagout Permit, Energy Isolation Certificate).
• Cleary define procedure for managing Lockout keys and Lock out Box Operation , also how
Keys for the lockbox itself shall be distributed .
• Provision shall me made so padlocks shall be used for lockout devices as necessary such that
removal of one or more of the locks shall not allow equipment to be put back in operation. It shall
be necessary to remove all locks before the equipment can be put back in operation.
Page 14 of 23
7.6. Lockout/Tag out Removal
7.6.1.Before lockout and/or tagout devices are removed and the energy is restored, the authorized
employee performs the following:
¾ Inspect the work area to assure that tools and equipment have been removed;
¾ Ensure that the machine or equipment is operationally intact;
¾ Ensure that all employees are safely positioned or removed from the area;
¾ Notify affected employees that the isolation devices have been removed;
7.6.2.Only the authorized employee (AEP, Isolation Authority) who applied them shall remove lockout
and or tagout devices from each isolating device.
EXCEPTION
When the authorized employee who installed the device(s) (Isolating Authority or Authorized Electrical
Person ) is unavailable to remove it, the device may be removed under the supervision of the Company
Senior Management person and as defined in the local company Lockout/Tagout procedure provided:
Specific procedures and training for such removal and circumstances have been prepared, documented
and entered as an appendix to the lockout/tagout procedure. The specific procedures shall include:
(1) Verifying that the authorized employee is not on the job site.
(2) Making reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to inform him/her the isolating
device(s) will be removed.
(3) IF the authorized employee cannot be contacted, THEN he/she shall contact the Company
Senior person or as defined in the Company LOTO procedure.
(4) The Company Senior Management person shall verify that there is no way to reach the
authorized employee who installed the device.
(5) The Company Senior management Person shall inspect the machine or equipment and
assess its condition. IF permits are required to operate the machine, THEN a Permit shall be
obtained and review the entire associated document.
(6) Ensuring that the authorized employee is informed of the changes before he/she resumes
work.
(7) Ensuring that the HSE Department is informed.
7.7. Temporary Removal
In particular and justified situations where the lockout/tagout devices have to be temporarily removed
for the purpose of testing (e.g. Sanction to Test) or positioning the machine, equipment, and
components thereof, the following sequence shall be followed:
1. Clear the machine or equipment of tools and/or material;
2. Remove employees from the machine or equipment area;
Page 15 of 23
3. Energize and complete the testing or positioning;
4. De-energize all systems and repeat isolation procedures;
5. The same series of checks and precautions is required when considering the temporary
removal of Lockout/Tagout.
7.8. Long Term Isolation (LTI)
In case where the job is completed or suspended beyond the work permit's period of validity, and the
work area needs to maintain the continued protection of an electrical, mechanical, safety or
emergency system isolation, provision shall be made to ensure the following but not limited to:
• Performing and Area Authority shall sign off to close the original work permit.
• Permit Controller or other person as defined by the local company shall retains the original copy
of the permit and copies of energy isolation certificate shall be retained in the LTI Register, the
details of the LTI shall be recorded by the in the LTI Register.
• A display board of all Energy Isolation Certificate and PTW used shall be maintained under which
a Sanctioned Test is being performed and for long-term Isolation Confirmation Certificates.
• Long-term isolations shall be reviewed weekly or as required by the Area Authority and any other
affected person.
• Company Lockout /Tag out procedure and energy isolation procedures shall include procedures
to mange Long Term Isolation.
7.9. Implementing a Lockout/Tag Out
7.9.1.Training:
• Company to ensure that only trained and competent personnel are authorized to lockout
and Tag out equipment.
• IF you are not familiar with the equipment being locked out, THEN check the
manufacturer's manual before beginning the lockout/tag out procedures.
7.9.2. Special Cases:
Some power and mechanical equipment cannot be locked out or tagged out using the procedures in
this document. IF working with this equipment, THEN follow the procedures outlined below.
Equipment Type Required Actions
Power equipment without points to lock-out or tag-out Isolate and tag all power sources.
Lock and tag the electrical box.
Mechanical equipment that cannot be locked out Isolate its power source Tag out the
equipment.
Page 16 of 23
Important Note: For Special cases mentioned above, Company shall further define all the necessary Lockout
and Tag Out requirements and methods to ensure the highest level of protection is provided and achieved.
8. RESTORING EQUIPMENT TO SERVICE (REINSTATEMENT)
The following minimum requirements shall be used to restore equipment to service, either temporarily or
permanently, after a lockout.
8.1. Prior to reinstatement the integrity of any isolations associated with the removal of spades or other
isolations devices should be reassessed to confirm that it is safe to proceed with the reinstatement
work.
8.2. Once all of the work has been completed, the work area will be inspected by the Area Authority or his
delegate to ensure that non-essential items have been removed from the area and that machine or
equipment components are operationally intact.
8.3. The work area will be checked to ensure that all employees have been safely positioned or removed.
8.4. Ensure that all guards and safety devices are replaced and verify that the controls are in neutral.
8.5. Notify all personnel that systems are going to be restored.
When everyone is clear, proceed, as necessary, with:

Closing vents and bleeders;
Reconnecting piping;
Removing blinds and
Removing blocking.
Note: Before removing some forms of blocking, such as hydraulic cylinders or locks, you may have to re-
energize the machine.
8.6. If the machine or equipment requires additional work, repeat the procedure under paragraph 7
otherwise proceed to step 8.7.
8.7. The Isolation Authority and/or Authorized Electrical Person will remove the lockout and tagout device,
and then notify the Area Authority, affected employee that the servicing repairs are complete and ready
for service.
8.8. Always use and follow requirements of the PTW System and Energy Isolation Certificate.
Note : At the Area Authority’s discretion or as defined in the local company lock out tag out procedure or
Energy Isolation Procedures , specific reinstatement procedures may be developed and attached to the PTW.
Page 17 of 23
9. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
9.1. General Awareness Training
All employees and Contractor workers who participate, perform or may be affected by the Lockout
/Tagout procedure shall receive training prior to their participation in the program; this shall be
repeated annually.
The training will ensure :
• That the purpose and function of the Energy Isolation procedures and the lockout/tag out
procedure are understood and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application,
usage, and removal of energy controls are conveyed to the employees ;
• How to recognize source, types and magnitudes of hazardous energy that they may encounter on
location;
• The location and operation of isolation and control devices, including facility-specific equipment
used in the lockout program;
• The location and operation of isolation and control devices, including facility-specific equipment
used in the lockout program and the program rules and the disciplinary consequences of non
compliance.
9.2. Training Requirements of Authorized Employees:
• All employees who participate in the Energy isolation lockout/tag out program or who may be
affected by the procedure shall be trained prior to their participation in the program and then
annually.
• Each Isolation Authority and Area Authority, Performing Authority, AEP shall receive training in
the recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of the energy
available in the workplace, and the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and
control.
Examples:
• When the lockout /Tag out procedure is required.
• The methods and equipment for isolating and controlling hazardous energy.
• The procedures for returning equipment to operation or service and the action to take whenever
there are questions regarding to the application of a lockout /Tag Out procedure.
• The training shall also include rules and techniques to be used for authorization and the means
that will be used for enforcement of the procedure.
• Authorized employees shall demonstrate the ability to implement the lockout/tag out procedure on
relevant equipment and machines.
• According to Company HSE training protocols, all training shall be documented,
• A list of trained and competent Isolating Authorities will be maintained at Company Site as
applicable and required, copy will be kept with the HSE Department.
9.3. Training after Changes:
• Retraining will be provided whenever there is a significant change Energy Isolation and
lockout/tag out program, whenever job changes, equipment changes or processes changes,
present a new hazard, or when periodic inspections reveal inadequacies in an employee’s
knowledge or use of lockout/tag out procedure.
Page 18 of 23
All employees shall receive additional training promptly after:
• Introduction of new equipment that represents a new hazard to the workplace,
• A change in the equipment used in the lockout program, including types of locks , method of
employee/lock identification and isolation devices,
• The job assignments of the affected and authorized employees change or the periodic audit of
program compliance detects inadequacies in an employee’s knowledge or use of lockout/tag out
procedures.
Note:
All other employees and Contractor whose work operations are or may be in the area where energy
controls procedures may be used shall be provided with adequate safety information’s during the first
in house HSE Orientation, as a minimum:
• Lockout/tagout guidelines;
• Prohibiting the attempts of re-energization of isolated equipment;
• Limitations of tagout devices;
• Prohibiting removal of tagout devices.
10. AUDITING THE LOCKOUT TAG/OUT PROGRAM
10.1. Inspecting Operations
The Company shall periodically, but at least annually, inspect operations to determine employee
understanding of and compliance with the lockout program. He or she shall:
• Document the results of these inspections and maintain the records in a local file until the
next audit has been completed. The file shall serve as a tool of inter group learning at any
further pre-job meeting.
10.2. Inspecting Lockouts
• The Company shall also periodically inspect maintenance activities where the lockout
program has been implemented and shall review with each employee his or her
understanding of procedures and personal responsibilities.
Documentation of these inspections shall include:
• Identification of the equipment or process involved,
• Date of the inspection,
• The names of the employee(s) interviewed and a summary of their comprehension of the
procedures,
• The name of the inspector,
• Whether each authorized and/or affected employee has been trained and updated,
• Whether any new equipment added has specific lockout procedures developed and
documented for it and Current procedures are adequate for performing lock-outs of
equipment.
Page 19 of 23
The Company may choose a representative to perform the audit; however, the audit shall be performed by an
authorized employee other than the employee conducting the lockout procedure.
10.3. Following Up on an Audit
Whenever audits of the program reveal inadequacies, the Company shall revise the facility's program and
implement all changes.
11. DOCUMENTING SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT
11.1. Content of Documentation
The Company Senior Management person and/or designee shall develop specific step-by-step shutdown
and startup procedures for every machine or piece of equipment in his or her area that will require the
application of the LOTO system.
The documentation should include at least the following information:
• Who controls the equipment?
• Any required training.
• Equipment number.
• Equipment location.
• Energy source (e.g., electrical, hydraulic, gas pressure, etc.).
• A list of any residual energy that shall be dissipated before work begins.
• Post lockout inspection procedures to ensure no unexpected startup or release of energy might
occur and description of isolation requirements, including:
• Location of isolating controls (e.g., breaker switches, valves, etc.),
• Quantity of isolating controls.
• Quantity of locks required to isolate the equipment and mother hardware required to isolate the
equipment (e.g., chains, valve covers, blocks, etc.).

Any need of updating the present document is notified to SICI department, responsible for possible
updating of the document.
13. RECORDING RESPONSABILITIES

The functions involved in the process described herein arrange for the preservation of the documentation
for the purposes of the traceability of its individual steps.1
Page 20 of 23
14. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
For Information:
15. LIST OF ANNEXES
- Annex A Lock out - Tag out Form
Page 21 of 23
ANNEX A
LOCK OUT - TAG OUT FORM
Page 22 of 23
Page 23 of 23
“Minimum Safety Standard on Workplace Housekeeping”
Revision Sheet


2010
SGIAQ
Paragraph 5.2 page 7:
Revised the following phrase:
When stacking material or boxes; sprinkler heads, fire exits, fire extinguishers,
electrical control panels, stairs or doorways shall not be blocked
Page 2 of 14
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE.............................................................................................................................................. 4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION ................................................................................................................ 4
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES .............................................................................................................. 4
4. DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................... 5
5. HOUSEKEEPING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 5
6. ESTABLISHING HOUSEKEEPING PROGRAM ............................................................................. 8
7. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES................................................................................................... 10
8. RECORDING RESPONSABILITIES.............................................................................................. 10
9. DISTRIBUTION .............................................................................................................................. 10
10. LIST OF ANNEXES........................................................................................................................ 11
Page 3 of 14
1. SCOPE
This document establishes the eni e&p division minimum safety standard on workplace
Housekeeping, it has been developed to minimize any safety and health hazards associated with
poor housekeeping.
This document has been developed with the objective to fulfilling the following requirements:
• Ensuring good housekeeping at the Company sites and all associated worksite areas, to
minimize the potential for workplace accidents and incidents (e.g. trips, slips, falls, fires and
spills) and blockage of important emergency access;
• Effective waste management to minimize the attraction of insects and vermin (e.g. rats) and
the potential associated health impacts;
Effective housekeeping can eliminate some workplace hazards and contribute to allow work to be
carried out safely and in proper manner. Inadequate housekeeping is considered as a contributing
factor to accidents by hiding hazards that cause injuries and increase hazards in the workplace.
Housekeeping is not just cleanliness. It includes keeping worksite areas neat and in good order and
shape; maintaining sites, halls and floors free of slip and trip hazards; and removing of waste
materials (e.g., paper, cardboard, unwanted materials) and other fire hazards from work areas.
Maintaining good housekeeping should be part of Company safety program. It is the responsibility
of all employees, subcontractors, supervisors, and craftsmen to apply good housekeeping
standards.
The safety requirements outlined in this document are the minimum safety standard; any required
specific procedures or guidance should be elaborated by the Company for its own particular
operations and sites, including elaborating their own written fall prevention and protection programs
and any required specific procedures.
specific rules and ensure compliance with the applicable regulations and legal requirements
applicable in the host Country.
This document is applied to all site activities, carried out by Company or Contractors’ workers in all
eni e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies and in DIME and DICS units
Page 4 of 14
4. DEFINITIONS
• QCP: Quality Control Plan

• HSE Integrated Management System: Management System applied in order to lead and keep
under control the activities performed in Eni e&p division concerning Health, Safety,
Environment, Public Safety, Quality and Radiation Protection.
• Hazard: the potential for human injury, damage to the environment, damage to property, or a
combination of these
• Risk: a term which combines the likelihood that a specified undesired event will occur and the
severity of the consequences of the event
• Standard: Rule, guideline, specification (including best practices, external information etc.), or
characteristics set out for activities or for results of such activities.
• Company Site: Refer to any offices, premises, onshore location, offshore platform and any
other offshore supports to production or drilling activities
5. HOUSEKEEPING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.1. Site Layout
A planned, clean, orderly site is mandatory. Company sites, shop areas and lay down areas shall be
kept clear of scrap and unwanted materials.
Materials required for work shall be properly stacked and kept out of roadways and passageways’ to
allow proper and free access for fire fighting equipment and people.
Lay down areas shall be planned and laid out in sections with access roadways adequate for fire
fighting and materials handling equipment.
5.2. Basic Requirements
A high standard of housekeeping shall be kept at all times. Carelessness and disorder can easily lead
to serious incidents and injuries. High standard of housekeeping will contribute to safe working
conditions, while poor housekeeping is one of the major causes of accidents and incidents, such as:
• Tripping over loose objects on floors, stairs and platforms ;
• Being hit by falling objects ;
• Slipping on greasy, wet or dirty surfaces ;
• Striking against projecting, poorly stacked items or misplaced material ;
• Cutting, puncturing, or tearing the skin of hands or other parts of the body on projecting nails,
wire or steel strapping.
Page 5 of 14
To avoid these hazards, a workplace shall "maintain" order throughout a workday, although this effort
requires a great deal of management and planning.
By following these simple rules, serious incidents shall be greatly reduced:
• All tools, material and equipment not in immediate use shall be securely stored in the proper
storage area.
• All spills shall be cleaned up immediately in accordance with the Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) .and reported according spill control procedure.
• Oily rags and other substances that are potential fire hazards shall be disposed of in special
bins.
• All permanent and temporary openings or holes shall have guarding around them at all times
when they are in use. All such openings shall be properly covered and closed when not in use.
• Proper access ways and passageway shall be provided while required and always kept free
from obstruction; removed or missing guardrails shall be immediately replaced after an
operation.
• The worksite area should be tidy before beginning a task, at the end of shifts and on completion
of the task. This should be specified on the permit to work.
• Special care should be taken when storing Hazardous Materials; these should only be stored in
an approved and designated area. Hazardous Substances that can react with each other
should never be stored in the same place.
• Solvents, paints, flammable liquids, chemicals and explosives shall be stored in suitable
storage areas and suitable containers.
• Labels, identifications signs and warnings on containers, on notice boards, in stores etc should
be followed. Direct supervisor should be consulted in any doubt
• Good organization of stored materials is essential for overcoming material storage problems
whether on a temporary or permanent basis. There will also be fewer strain injuries if the
amount of handling is reduced, especially if less manual materials handling is required.
• All tools, spare parts, chemicals and other equipment should have a designated storage place
when not in actual use. All storage and work areas should be maintained neat the tidy.
Adequate trash containers (if necessary segregated by type of trash) shall be maintained in the
workplace, and emptied daily.
• Emergency exit routes and access ways to Manual Call Alarm Point, extinguishers, Fire
hydrants and other fire fighting equipment, first aid kits etc shall be kept clear of obstruction.
Sign boards, Manual Call Alarm Point, lights, horns, First Aid kits and Fire Fighting equipment
shall always be kept clearly visible. Never hang clothing or other material on them.
• Roadways shall be kept clear from obstruction or any other objects that may cause a tyre
puncture.
• Excavated Soil and mud shall be removed on a regular basis from plant, equipment, roads,
paths etc.
Page 6 of 14
• Workshop and machinery space floors shall be kept free from oil, grease and other slippery
substances and kept clean at all times.
• Staircases, passages and doorways shall be kept free from obstructions.
• Toe boards shall be fitted to all overhead platforms, gangways, scaffolding and working
platforms etc to prevent tools from falling or rolling off.
• Suitable containers should be provided for the collection of solid and liquid waste materials and
marked as such, e.g. waste oil. These should be emptied at Regular intervals as defined in the
company waste management plan.
• Ensure adequate cable management, Hoses, wires, ropes and electric cables should never be
left where workers could trip over them. Electric/welding cables should be kept out of water.
• Fire doors should never be obstructed by cables or fixed open by any means.
• Guardrails and gratings should never be removed before first erecting barriers and warning
notices and obtaining proper authorizations such as PTW.
• Ensure dust is not accumulated and build up on structures, in stores or other buildings.
• All stacking of material shall be adequately planned; stacked material shall be main stable and
secured when not used.
• When stacking material or boxes; sprinkler heads, fire exits, fire extinguishers, electrical control
panels, stairs or doorways shall not be blocked. Always stack heavier materials at or below
chest level on shelving units.
• Do not leave file and desk drawers open, do not overload top drawers so that files tip over.
Keep heavy files in lower drawers. Start loading file cabinets from the bottom up. It is
recommended that tall filing cabinets are attached to the wall behind them to keep them from
tipping over if the upper drawers are opened.
• Worksite areas (including maintenance workshops,) shall be cleaned daily at the end of each
shift. Clean and maintain machines properly and follow all routine and maintenance procedures
and report any concerns immediately.
• Always avoid accumulation and over stacking of materials in the worksite areas that could
increase a fire hazard (e.g. accumulation of paper files, dirty oily rags in maintenance
workshops, etc.)
• All waste materials shall be disposed of in an approved manner (as per Company Site Waste
Management Procedure). All special waste material shall be disposed of in separate
containers, correctly labelled and documented.
• The regular collection, grading and sorting of scrap contribute to good housekeeping practices.
It also makes it possible to separate materials that can be recycled from those going to waste
disposal facilities.
• Allowing material to build up on the floor wastes time and energy since additional time is
required for cleaning it up. Placing scrap containers near where the waste is produced
encourages orderly waste disposal and makes collection easier. All waste receptacles should
be clearly labeled (e.g., recyclable glass, plastic, scrap metal, etc.).
Page 7 of 14
• Do not let soiled clothes, food scraps and soft drink bottles/cans accumulate. If drinking cups
are used, deposit them in the containers provided. Place sandwich wrappers, paper bags, and
food waste in covered containers. Empty trash containers regularly and dispose of all refuse in
designated dump areas.
• Nontoxic waste such as office trash, construction materials, concrete rubble and scrap metal
generated from activities should be properly disposed of on a daily basis and as defined in the
Company Housekeeping program.
• All toxic waste, paint cans, oily rags, motor oil, solvents, engine coolants, spent catalyst, etc.
will be disposed of per Company local specific requirements.
• In worksite areas, scrap wood, form work materials, etc. shall be removed, de-nailed, and
stored or put in dedicated waste bins. Areas where personnel are expected to pass or work
shall be kept free of tripping hazards such as small pipe scrap materials, tools, etc.
• In case any pests / vermin (e.g. rats ) are found at the Company site or in the camp, offices,
warehouses or other buildings, a specialist pest control subcontractor should be used to
carefully exterminate these pests (i.e. ensuring no impact on native species of fauna) .
• Control of dust generation, and associated health impacts on workforce and the local
community, through good housekeeping and dust suppression methods.
• Any unwanted materials or liquids shall not be permitted to accumulate in work areas.
• Unwanted material and equipment should be removed from all work areas and returned to the
stores.
6. ESTABLISHING HOUSEKEEPING PROGRAM
6.1. Purpose
Effective housekeeping results in:
• Increase in work efficiency ,
• Reduced handling to ease the flow of materials ,
• Minimizing tripping and slipping accidents in clutter-free and spill-free work areas.
• Better control and decreased fire hazards ,
• Lower worker exposures to hazardous substances ,
• Better control of tools and materials movement and storage ,
• More efficient equipment cleanup and maintenance ,
• Better hygienic conditions leading to improved health ,
• More effective use of space ,
Page 8 of 14
• Reduced property damage by improving preventive maintenance ,
• Less janitorial work,
• Improved morale,
Good housekeeping is the first and the most important (fundamental) level of preventing falls
due to slips and trips. It includes:
• Cleaning all spills immediately,
• Marking spills and wet areas,
• Mopping or sweeping debris from floors,
• Removing obstacles from walkways and always keeping them free of clutter,
• Securing (tacking, taping, etc.) mats, rugs and carpets that do not lay flat,
• Always closing file cabinet or storage drawers,
• Covering cables that cross walkways,
• Keeping working areas and walkways well lit,
• Replacing used light bulbs and faulty switches.
Without good housekeeping practices, any other preventive measures such as installation of
sophisticated flooring, specialty footwear or training on techniques of walking and safe falling will never
be fully effective.
6.2. Housekeeping Program
• Company shall elaborate a Housekeeping Program to address housekeeping requirements

related to their specific operations and for its special needs; the aim of this program will be to
maintain all the company sites in good housekeeping and working condition, it should allow a
common approach and understanding of how to maintain good housekeeping in company site.
It includes also definition of the roles and responsibilities of the Company site management and
contractors, subcontractors.
• A material movement and storage plan should be defined on order to manage the proper
storage and movement of materials from point of entry to exit.
• The plan will allow ensuring that worksite areas are not used as storage areas, so materials
and equipments are only shifted to the worksite area based on the activities and as needed.
Part of the plan could include investing in extra bins and more frequent disposal in order to
facilitate maintaining a high standard of housekeeping and easy removal of accumulated waste,
unwanted materials from a centralized location in the work site. The costs of this investment
could be offset by the elimination of repeated handling of the same material and more effective
use of the workers' time.
• As a consequence of ineffective or insufficient storage planning results in materials and

equipments being handled and stored in hazardous and disorganized ways. Knowing the plant
Page 9 of 14
layout and the movement of materials throughout the workplace can help to plan work
procedures.
• Workforce training is an important part of any good housekeeping program. Company to ensure
that the workforce understand how work safely with the products and material they are using.
They also need to understand the benefits of maintaining good housekeeping in their worksites
areas, also how to protect other workers such as by posting signs (e.g., "Wet - Slippery Floor")
and reporting any unsafe conditions.
An adequate housekeeping program identifies and assigns responsibilities definition for the
following:
• Roles of supervisors and workers in work area clean up during the shift.
• Maintaining Day-to-day cleanup of the worksite areas.
• Methods and frequency of Waste disposal.
• Methods of removal of unused material and its removal requirements.
• Roles and responsibilities (Inspection to ensure cleanup is complete) .
• An important element of an adequate housekeeping program is allowing proper arrangement of

operations, tools, equipment and supplies is an important part of.
• As part of the housekeeping program, it is recommended that each site establish a regular
housekeeping inspection program to identify areas needing improvement.
• It is the only way to check for deficiencies in the program so that changes can be made.
Note: Appendix A contains a template for general housekeeping/safety inspections that Company
can modify as deemed necessary to meet its local needs and site specification.
9. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
For Information:
Page 10 of 14
10. LIST OF ANNEXES
ANNEX A – GENERAL HOUSEKEEPING/SAFETY INSPECTION
Page 11 of 14
ANNEX A
GENERAL HOUSEKEEPING/SAFETY INSPECTION
Work Site: Date of Inspection:

Work Area Inspected: Person Making Inspection:
For each item inspected, note Okay or, N/A as appropriate. If corrective action is needed mark the
Corrective Action Required (CAR) box, and note corrective action needs below using the reference number
for that item.
Plant/ Warehouse /Installation (suggested Weekly)
Ref Yes N/A CAR

1. General Housekeeping & Cleanliness
1.1 Are floors, aisles, storage spaces clean and neat?
1.2 Supervisor/plant offices neat and clean.
1.3 Corners and other areas not being used for work neat and clean.
1.4 Machines, process equipment in good condition and clean.
1.5 Work benches, work places neat and clean.
1.6 Tool & supply cupboards/containers well organized and neat.
1.7 Parts/supplies storage neat, well organized and clean.
1.8 Mechanic’s work areas neat, organized and clean.
1.9 Washrooms, toilets, drinking fountains clean, adequate and in excellent
condition.
1.10 Personal change rooms and lockers clean, neat & adequate.
2. Scrap and Garbage
2.1 Scrap & garbage is cleaned up continuously.
2.2 Garbage containers are readily available, adequate number and proper type.
2.3 Garbage containers in good condition.
2.4 Garbage/scrap segregated per site policy.
3. Tools
3.1 Adequate for purpose.
3.2 Hand tools in good condition, with no local modification.
3.3 Adequate/proper place for tool storage when not in use.
3.4 Adequate extension cords and in good condition.
3.5 Power tools in good condition and used properly.
3.6 Any ladders in good condition and used properly.
4. Materials
4.1 Materials stored respecting materials compatibility.
4.2 Stacking of materials correct and neat.
4.3 All materials properly labeled.
4.4 Materials containers in good condition, no leaking.
4.5 Material storage area neat, well organized and fee of spills.
4.6 Fire extinguishers, NO SMOKING signs adequate.
4.7 Safety eye wash/shower as needed and functional.
5. Lights and ventilation
5.1 Fans, blowers, hoods, light fixtures in good condition.
5.2 Lighting adequate for work areas.
5.3 Ventilation adequate for work areas.
5.4 Special extraction ventilation in place for designated areas and functioning
properly.
Page 12 of 14
5.5 Work areas free of nuisance dirt and dust.

6. General Safety
6.1 All machine guards in place properly.
6.2 Work area safety barriers, markings in place & adequate.
6.3 General safe work practices being followed.
6.4 Correct PPE being used.
6.5 Adequate number of fire extinguishers and easily accessible.
6.6 Adequate first aid supplies nearby.
Note any CAR below with item reference number:
Outside Storage Yard, Pipe Areas, Tanks, Lay Down Yards, etc. (suggested weekly)
Ref Yes N/A CAR

1.1 Roadways/driveways in good condition well marked.
1.2 Aisles/spaces between storage racks/tanks adequate and clean.
1.3 Trucks/trailers in good appearance, neatly parked.
1.4 Forklifts, cranes, etc. good appearance, parked in designated place if not in use.
1.5 Yard/outside office/dispatcher room neat and clean.

1.6 Change/lunch rooms adequate, and clean.
1.7 Washrooms, toilets adequate and clean.
1.8 Tool storage areas well organized and neat. Tools stored in designated areas when
not in use.
1.9 Parts storage areas well organized, neat and clean.

1.10 Equipment parking areas well marked, well organized.
1.11 Outdoor wiring and lighting adequate and in good condition.
2.1 Ground free of oil spills and contamination.
2.2 Scrap and garbage placed in designated containers.
2.3 Outside area generally neat and clean with not trash around.
2.4 Garbage containers adequate quantity and location.
2.6 Garbage segregated according to hazardous, non-hazardous and recyclable
materials.
2.7 Hazardous waste/used oil stored properly.
3. General Yard Safety
3.1 Yard equipment/rotating parts have guards in place as needed.
3.2 Riders on forklift trucks prohibited.
3.3 Forklifts in good condition and inspected regularly.
3.4 Cranes/hoists in good condition and inspected regularly.
3.5 Other lifting gear in good condition and stored properly.
3.6 PPE being used correctly.
3.7 General work practices observed are correct.
3.8 Adequate number and accessibility to fire extinguishers.
3.9 For pipe racks, pipe stacked properly and secured on racks.
3.10 Safe vehicle speed limit posted and followed.
Note any CAR below with item reference number:
Page 13 of 14
Offices (suggested weekly)
Ref Yes N/A CAR

1.1 Floors & aisles are clean, and clear of clutter.
1.2 Storage spaces well organized, neat and clean.
1.3 Desks, files neat and clean.
1.4 General office area free of trash or litter.
1.5 NO SMOKING policy enforced.
1.6 Work areas adequate, organized and free of safety hazards.
1.7 Washrooms, toilets adequate and clean.
1.8 Personal lockers adequate and area neat.
2.1 Scrap & garbage cleaned up promptly.
2.2 Garbage containers adequate and well located.
2.4 Garbage segregated according to recycle policy.
3. Work Equipment
3.1 Equipment/machines adequate for needs.
3.2 Work equipment in good condition.
3.3 Extension cords only used for temporary use and in good condition.
3.4 Work stations ergonomically correct.
3.5 Ladders, step-stools available and used properly.
3.6 File cabinets properly loaded and/or secured to walls to prevent tipping over.
4. Work Materials
4.1 Storage space for materials adequate and well organized.
4.2 Materials properly stacked for accessibility and safety.
4.3 Any containers in good condition and labeled.
5. Environment
5.1 Adequate lighting in all work areas.
5.2 Adequate heating and cooling in all areas.
5.3 No exposure to radiation.
5.4 Any hazardous materials in workplace identified.
5.5 No nuisance dust/fumes.
6. General Safety
6.1 Any machine guards in place as needed (including paper guillotines)
6.2 Fire exits clearly marked, accessible and not blocked.
6.3 Fire extinguishers adequate quantity and type and located in necessary
places.
6.4 Fire extinguishers checked regularly.
6.5 Work areas free of slip/trip hazards.
6.6 Wall receptacles (plugs) not overloaded.
6.7 Extension cords not used as permanent wiring.
6.8 Space heaters prohibited in offices.
6.9 Emergency lighting in stairwells.
6.10 Emergency plans in place, training & drills conducted.
Page 14 of 14
“Minimum Safety Standard on Working at Height”
Revision Sheet


2010
SGIAQ
Paragraph “Openings Holes Cover deleted Cold work Permit and substituted
with Work Permit
Renumbered Paragraph “Recording Responsibilities” with n° 13 instead of 12
Page 2 of 25
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................... 4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION.................................................................................................................. 4
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES................................................................................................................ 4
4. DEFINITIONS..................................................................................................................................... 4
5. FUNCTIONS INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS.................................................................................... 6
6. DEFINITION OF WORKING AT HEIGHT.......................................................................................... 7
7. WORKING AT HEIGHT HAZARDS................................................................................................... 8
8. FALL HAZARD MANAGEMENT....................................................................................................... 9
9. GENERAL FALL PROTECTION AND PREVENTION REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 9
10. TYPE OF FALL ARRESTING SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 11
11. SPECIAL FALL PREVENTION AND FALL PROTECTION REQUIRMENTS................................ 17
12. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................................... 23
12. RECORDING RESPONSABILITIES ................................................................................................ 24
13. DISTRIBUTION................................................................................................................................. 24
14. LIST OF ANNEXES .......................................................................................................................... 24
Page 3 of 25
1. SCOPE
This document establishes the eni e&p division minimum safety standard for working at heights and
describes minimum recommended practices for personnel to safely work on elevated surfaces and/or at
heights requiring fall prevention and protection.
This document provides guidance to eni e&p division Companies on how to establish adequate fall
protection and prevention programs and minimum guidelines of training necessary to ensure personnel
understanding and compliance with the program.
In addition to this standard, Company shall ensure that the policy on fall Prevention & Protection is very
strictly enforced.
Company Work at Height Policy Goal shall be to achieve 100% fall prevention/protection for all personnel
exposed to potential falls.
This standard is applicable at all eni e&p sites. In all cases, all requirements listed in EC Directive
2001/45/EC of the European Parliament shall be followed as a minimum guideline. This standard is
intended to provide enhancements to this guideline.
The safety requirements outlined in this document are the minimum safety standard; any required specific
procedures or guidance should be elaborated by the Company for its own particular operations and sites,
including elaborating their own written fall prevention and protection programs and any required specific
procedures.
Any specific requirements which are not discussed in this document shall be addressed with site specific
rules and ensure compliance with the applicable regulations and legal requirements applicable in the host
Country.
This document is applied to all “working on height activities”, carried out by Company or Contractors’
workers in all eni e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies and in DIME and DICS units.
4. DEFINITIONS
• Company: an organization part of or connected to Eni e&p division such as: Geographic Unit, Affiliate,
Subsidiary or Joint Venture under Eni e&p division”s/ Companies operational control (more than 30% share
or relevant business direction).
• Company Site: Refer to any offices, premises, onshore location, offshore platform and any other offshore
supports to production or drilling activities
• Company Sites: Refers to any offices, premises, onshore location, offshore platform and any other
offshore supports to production or drilling activities
• Fragile surface: A surface which would be liable to fail if any reasonably foreseeable loading were applied
to it.
• Working Platform: Any platform used as a place of work or a means of access or egress from a place of
Page 4 of 25
work. It includes any scaffold, suspended scaffold, cradle, mobile platform, trestle, gangway, gantry and
stairway which are also used
• Anchorage: A secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards, or deceleration devices
• Buckle: Any device for holding the full body harness closed around the employees’ body.
• Deceleration device: Any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch lanyard, specially woven lanyard,
tearing or deforming lanyard, automatic self-retracting lifelines, etc., that serves to dissipate a substantial
amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee during fall
arrest.
• Deceleration Distance: The additional vertical distance a falling employee travels, excluding the lifeline
elongation and free fall distance, before stopping, from the point at which the deceleration device begins to
operate. It is measured as the distance between the location of an employees full body harness attachment
point (D-ring) at the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration device during
a fall, and the location of that attachment point after the employee comes to a full stop
• Full Body Harness: Straps that may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall
arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to other
components of a personal fall arrest system
• Guardrail System: A barrier erected to prevent employees from falling to lower levels
• Hole: A gap or void two inches (2") or more in its least dimension in a floor, roof, or other walking/working
surface.
• Lanyard: A flexible line of wire rope or nylon strap that generally has a connector at each end for
connecting a full body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline, or anchorage
• Lifeline: A component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang
vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal
lifeline), and that serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall protection system to
the anchorage
• Lower Levels: Those areas or surfaces to which an employee can fall. Such areas or surfaces include, but
are not limited to, ground levels, floors, platforms, ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks, material, water,
equipment, structures, or portions thereof
• Personal Fall Arrest System: A system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a working level. It
consists of anchorage, connectors, a full body harness, a shock-absorbing lanyard and may include a
deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of these
• Fall Protection: Elimination of fall exposures through use of guardrail systems, aerial lifts, scaffolds or
alternate work methods such as pre assembly at ground level
• Fall Protection: Utilization of fall arrest equipment as a backup to fall prevention system or in the absence
of fall prevention systems, fall prevention and protection can also be used together.
• Self Retracting Lifeline/Lanyard: A deceleration device containing drum wound line that can be slowly
extracted from or retracted onto the drum under slight tension during normal employee movement, and that,
after onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall (Inertia Reel).
• Snaphook: A connector comprised of a hook-shaped member with a normally closed keeper, or similar
arrangement, that may be opened to permit the hook to receive an object and, when released, automatically
closes to retain the object. The locking type with a self-closing keeper that remains closed and locked until
unlocked and pressed open for connection is the only authorized snap hook. Non locking snap hooks are
expressly forbidden for fall prevention/protection purposes
• Toeboard: A low protective barrier (minimum of 3-½ inches in vertical height from their top edge to the
walking/working surface and no more than ¼-inch clearance above the walking/working surface), that will
prevent the fall of materials and equipment to lower levels and provide protection from falls to personnel
• Walking/Working Surface: Any surface, whether vertical or horizontal on which an employee walks or
Page 5 of 25
works, including, but not limited to, floors, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, form work and concrete
reinforcing steel but not including ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which employees shall be located to
perform their duties
5. FUNCTIONS INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS
Roles and responsibilities shall be defined by each organization adopting this standard and customized for
each project, in compliance with the Company regulations.
Company Key Roles

All companies are to ensure that suitable and sufficient assessments are made of the potential hazards that
their employees could be exposed to. The production of a risk assessment document and the appropriate
controls shall be in place prior to any task being undertaken. Only once these have been completed and
documented shall the task proceed.
• Company shall ensure its standard on fall prevention & Protection is very strictly enforced.
• Company Management standard goal shall be to achieve 100% fall prevention/protection for all
personnel exposed to potential falls.
• Company Management on site shall ensure that a fall prevention and protection program is
prepared to address all necessary requirements and guidelines to provide maximum
prevention/protection against falls from elevated area and a minimum standard of training
necessary to ensure personnel understanding and compliance with the program .
• Company Management on site shall ensure all personnel are trained in working at height and fall
protection prior to work on elevated surfaces and pre-job planning is carried out to minimize risk.
• Company should always strive to continuously improve skills and available tools for workplace
hazard recognition and mitigation. and ensure that the current best practices are used , such as :
performing work at ground level where possible ( i.e. build prefab roofs at ground level, then lift into
place with a crane , same could be considered for structural beam erection , etc )
• All fall protection equipments shall be inspected before use and defective equipment reported and
removed from service.
• A competent person shall be designated whenever fall protection is used. The competent person
shall be trained in the nature of fall hazards in the work area, the correct procedures for building,
maintaining, disassembling and inspecting the fall protection systems, use and operation of fall
arrest systems, correct procedures for handling and storage, and for building overhead protection,
and conducting rescues. Much of the equipment being used should be on lifting equipment register
(so there needs to be a link with those procedures and the competent person needs to make sure
equipment is tagged/stamped and within its inspection date
• Company Management on site shall ensure all work at height is properly planned and organised,
adequate risk assessment is carried to control potential falling hazards related to working at height.
• Company Management on site shall ensure Contractors, Subcontractors, and Vendors fall
prevention and protection programs are in compliance with Company requirements.
Supervisors Key Roles

• A Job Safety Analyses should be given to each workers assigned work in elevated areas or in areas
with potential falling hazards. Reference the JSA into the Risk Assessment document or into the
Work Permit.
Page 6 of 25
• Direct Supervisors and Company /Contractor HSE Representatives shall analyze all tasks for their
fall potential and then ensure that adequate fall prevention/ protection systems are implemented,
prior to the commencement of the work.
• Supervisors should verify their employees’ competence of the system being utilized, its proper
methods of use, and emergency procedures associated with the task.
• Ensure all construction and any other activities involving workers working at height are properly
planned, effectively coordinated and executed.
• Supervisors shall ensure all the workers are properly trained on working at height and fall
prevention & protection programs.
• Company Supervisors shall verify all personnel assigned to work on an elevated surface use all
required personal fall protection equipment, and that the equipment is in good working condition.
Workers Key Roles

• Company Employees and Contractors workers shall understand the hazards of working at height,
and the use and limitations of fall protection equipment.
• Company Management is responsible to ensure this takes place respectively and ensure that
Contractors are complying with Company requirements. This may mean the preparation of a
Management System interface document which details the split of responsibilities between
Company and Contractor.
• Company employees and Contractor workers shall observe and adhere to all safety measures
established in these minimum safety standards as well as other related fall prevention and
protection programs prepared by Company, procedures including scaffolding, ladders, mobile
working platform etc.
• Company Employees and Contractor workers shall properly maintain and use fall arresting
equipment provided. Use only fall arrest equipment which are inspected on a regular basis and they
are in good working condition prior to every use.
6. DEFINITION OF WORKING AT HEIGHT

• Working at height (WAH) means any work being carried out at a place from which a person could
be injured by falling from it, regardless of whether it is above, at or below ground level. A place like
this shall be identified as hazardous after an assessment; in any case, a place at an height greater
that 6 feet (2m) above or below the ground shall be considered hazardous. WAH includes also
working on properly constructed walkways or working & access platforms or where a worker could
fall on the Company onshore sites, deck area of an offshore platforms and potential falling into the
sea.
• There are various types of working at height, such as working on or erecting and dismantling of
scaffolds, work on certain cranes and derricks, during work in tunnels, during work near excavations
and use of ladders, during steel erection, etc.
Example of working at height (not an exhaustive list)
• Working on a scaffold or Mobile elevated work platforms (MEWP);

• Working on the back of a lorry;
• Using cradles or ropes to gain access;
• Climbing permanent structures such as gantries;
• Working close to excavations, cellars or other openings;
• Access and egress: Includes ascent and descent;
• Structural steel erection;
Page 7 of 25
• Man Riding operations;

• Personnel Work Baskets;
• Work on a roof, piece of plant or equipment and Work using a ladder or step ladder.
Working Platform:
• Any platform used as an area of work, or as a means of access to or egress from a work area.
• Any scaffold, suspended scaffold, cradle, mobile platform, trestle, gangway, gantry or stairway
which is so used.
Important Notes
1. WAH planning shall include due consideration to a process that moves from the lower risk to the higher
acceptable one. The process shall follow a hierarchical approach with the following steps (see
Attachment 1)
• can the task be done without working at heights?
• determine the equipment needed to collectively protect workers (safe scaffolds, protection nets
etc.)
• identify the hazards for individual workers
• implement specific controls for those hazards (e.g. personal protective equipment)
• carry out work as per method statement.
2. Safety harness is needed for all work performed over 6 feet, (2 meters), above ground level or even
below 2 meters if a risk assessment carried out on a case by case basis suggests to do so.
3. If fall protection tie-off and fall protection system are not available, do not access to the area.
7. WORKING AT HEIGHT HAZARDS
Fall Hazards
Falling from height is one of the major concerns in the industry. To date, falling from height has attributed to
the accident statistic as one of the highest cause of accidents and many of such accidents results to
fatalities.
Falling Objects
• Parts of staging, tools and other articles and materials shall be properly lowered and shall not be thrown
down from a height. They shall be raised by rope or other adequate means.
• Ensure that no loose articles and materials are left unsecured and are not over stacked and lying about
in any elevated areas from which they may fall on workers working, or passing beneath.
• Impacted area shall be properly barricaded and warning signs properly displayed {FALLING OBJECT
HAZARD –DON’T ENTER –KEEP AWAY!}
• All materials including tools and equipment shall be removed at the end of each day shift.
• Work involving the handling of sheeting and cladding requires extra care especially in windy conditions.
Sheeting may cause the person handling it to lose balance and fall.
Page 8 of 25
8. FALL HAZARD MANAGEMENT
SAFE WORK PROCEDURES
BEST SAFETY & WORK

JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS (JSA) PRACTICES
PERMIT SYSTEM
SAFE EXECUTION
TRAINING
Focus on Fall Prevention, CLOSE

And Use Fall Protection MONITORING AND
SAFETY AUDITS
Fall Prevention
Fall prevention systems are the preferred choice for carrying work at height.
These systems provide walking and working surfaces that are free from floor/wall openings and are
equipped with standard guardrail systems on all open sides.
In most cases, fall prevention systems are sufficient fall prevention methods in themselves and do not
require the use of fall protection systems such as harness/lanyard systems; this is applicable to all
approved permanent plant access platforms , permanent staircase , elevated areas with permanent
guardrails and when only certified as No Safety Harness is Required .
In addition to the above, fall protection systems shall be used after all efforts to use fall prevention systems
have been exhausted or when being used in concert with primary systems (i.e. incomplete structure or
working outside of a completed structure, in all construction sites and where there is potential falling
hazards, also as defined in the Company fall prevention-protection program and local site rules.
9. GENERAL FALL PROTECTION AND PREVENTION REQUIREMENTS
• As a minimum precaution of any activity performed at heights the ,employee and Contractor workers
doing the work shall use adequate full body safety harness when working at heights above 2 meters,
on or near fragile surfaces, on or over open sided floors, floor openings, potential hazards, water or
conducting a pre-job hazard analysis with the potential for a fall of a distance that is liable to cause
injury. This includes working above equipment where a fall onto/into the equipment below could cause
injury.
• Safety harness shall be secured always to a solid anchor point capable to withstand the shock load of
worker in case of falling, for personnel exposed to falling into the sea; they shall wear a buoyancy aid,
location beacon, standby watch and close support from standby vessel if there is one,in addition to a
Page 9 of 25
fall arrest system.
• Fall prevention system is to install guardrails or walls on the open sides of edges of an elevated
walking/ working surface with a top rail between 38 in (95 cm) and 45 in (114.3) cm above the
walking/working level and an intermediate rail(s) located so that any gap does not exceed 19 inches
(47 cm) high between the guardrail, the walking surface and a toe guard.
• Any work carried out 2 metres , ( 6 feet) above the ground, shall only be performed from an approved
and certified temporary working platform (all kind of scaffolds, ladder…etc and any aerial man lift or
work basket both used under permit to work control).
• Company employees and Contractor workers shall use full body harnesses when working from
personnel platforms raised by cranes, forklifts or scissor lifts.
• Personnel are not permitted to climb whilst carrying tools or equipment, the only exception being tools
carried in a waist belt designed specifically for the purpose.
• Where necessary, tools shall be hauled up and lowered in a suitable container, using a handling of
suitable size and condition.
• Work shall be planned to allow for immediate rescue of a worker in an emergency.
• The place where work at height shall be always kept in good housekeeping and in a safe condition and
clear from obstruction or over stacked materials.
• Ensure the risks from fragile surfaces are properly controlled; and the risks from falling objects are
properly controlled.
• All work at height shall takes account of weather conditions that could endanger health & safety.
• Adverse weather conditions need to be anticipated and suitable precautions planned for all external
working at height (this will be documented in the Risk Assessment document). Work platforms should
always be inspected prior to work at height commencing to determine whether conditions have
changed and to enable safe working. When deciding whether to continue or suspend work,
consideration should be given to:
• Wind speed;
• Controls already in place to prevent falls from height ;
• The position/height of the working platform in respect of any material being handled;
• The work being undertaken.
Work at Height Training Requirements

As deemed necessary, all Company employees and Contractor workers, Vendors will be trained on the
basic safety measures on the use and maintenance of personal protective equipment including full body
safety harness during the first in-house safety induction training session.
Subsequently, only employee and Contractors, vendors, those involved in work at height shall be trained
and competent.
Annual training shall cover, but not limited to, the skills and techniques required working responsibly in a
particular area or during a specific work task/activity specified as follows:
• Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment associated with working at height and mitigation measures
and the use of fall prevention and protection methods.
• Proper use of fall protection systems, and their inspection requirements.
Page 10 of 25
• PPE Requirements
• Safety requirement on working on fixed and mobile elevated areas (scaffolding, aerial lifts, permanent
structures, incomplete platforms ...Etc).
• Ladder Basic Safety.
• Life lines systems requirements.
• Weather Conditions.
• Particular methods of performing works at height.
10. TYPE OF FALL ARRESTING SYSTEMS
Rope access:
Rope access is a form of work positioning, initially developed from techniques used in climbing and caving,
which applies practical ropework to allow workers to access difficult-to-reach locations without the use of
scaffolding, cradles or mobile elevated work platforms MEWPs. Many companies worldwide can supply
workers such as inspectors, window cleaners, welders, painters and cleaners who are trained in these
techniques.
Specific provisions regarding the use of rope access and positioning techniques:
• When using rope for access and positioning the following specific requirements shall be followed (Ref:
Article 4.4 of directive 2001/45/EC).
• The system shall comprise two separately anchored ropes, one used for access, descent and support
work rope); with the second used as a backup (security rope).
• The work rope shall be equipped with safe means of ascent and descent and have a self-locking
system to prevent the user falling should he lose control of his movements.
• The security rope shall be equipped with a mobile fall prevention system which follows the movements
of the worker.
• The work shall be properly planned and supervised, so that a worker can be rescued immediately in an
emergency.
• In exceptional circumstances where, in view of the assessment of risks, the use of a second rope
would make the work more dangerous, the use of a single rope may be permitted, provided that
appropriate measures have been taken to ensure safety in accordance with national legislation and/or
practice.’
• Workers shall be provided with and use an appropriate full body harness and be connected by it to the
security rope.
• The work rope shall be equipped with safe means of ascent and descent and have a self locking
system to prevent the user falling should he lose control of his movements. The security rope shall be
equipped with a mobile fall prevention system which follows the movements of the worker.
• Workers shall receive adequate training in the specific operation, including emergency procedures. All
equipments shall be regularly inspected and maintained.
Page 11 of 25
Crawling Ladder and Boards

• Crawling ladders/boards will be used by employee working on roofs with a gradient of more than 10º.
Crawling ladders/boards will conform to the following requirements:
• Strong enough for the work to be carried out.
• Properly supported as to provide safe working platform. Securely fixed to the sloping of the roof by
means of a ridge hook placed over the ridge. Ridge hooks will not bear on ridge tiles or capping tiles.
Warning Lines
• A warning-line system is a barrier erected on a roof to warn employees they are approaching an
unprotected roof side or edge. It should be placed on all sides of the roof work area, and erect it not less
than 6 feet from the edge.
• Warning line systems are designed to be utilized while performing work on low-slope roofs.
• The warning line allows employees to readily note when they are approaching an unprotected roof
edge.
• The warning line shall be erected around all open sides of the roof work area.
• Personnel working outside the protection of a warning line system shall be protected by either a
personal fall protection system or a safety net system at all times when there is a fall potential of six feet
(6') or more.
Important Notes
The use of warning lines as a substitute for fall protection is allowed, but only when utilized with a second
component: guardrail, safety net, personal fall arrest, or safety monitoring system.
The use of warning lines alone as fall protection is not admitted.
A warning line system DOES NOT allow workers to be unprotected from potential fall exposures.
Full Body Harness/Shock Absorbing Lanyards

- Full Body Safety Harness
The Body Safety Harness consists of waist belt complete with shoulder, chest and leg straps that secures a
person in a manner that distributes the arresting force over at least the thigh, shoulder and pelvis, with a
mean for attachment to a safety line or rescue line or deceleration device.
- Shock Absorbing Lanyards

The energy absorbing restraining line allows dissipation of energy by extending the deceleration distance.
This type of system shall typically be adopted within a drilling rig. It requires individuals to wear a suitable
fall arrest harness connected at all times to a suitable winch system. An independent backup fall arrest
system must also be in use. Man-riding operations within the derrick are strictly controlled under the permit
to work system via the Drilling contractors management system.
General Requirements
• Fall Body Safety Harness with two lanyards with shock absorbers will be worn when a worker is
required to work at a height of more than 2 meters from the ground.
Page 12 of 25
• Fall Body Safety Harness will be tied off as short as possible but will be short enough to prevent a fall of
more than 2 meters and be secured so that a worker cannot free fall, or contact any lower levels. If
possible always tie your lanyard to a point above your waist height.
• If the work is located on a permanent structure and no fall potential is created by the work or by the
condition of the structure, full body harnesses may not be required.
• When accessing a complete and approved permanent structure by climbing a permanent caged ladder,
a full body harness may not be required.
• NOTE: If at any time an employee is forced to reach, or position any part of their body beyond the
plane of the structure’s boundaries (i.e., guardrail system), full body harnesses shall be worn and
secured to ensure 100% fall protection.
To ensure the integrity of the equipment being used and success of the Fall Prevention/Protection Program, the
following shall be strictly adhered to:
• Safety harness shall be of a type that is approved by the local statutory regulations
or in accordance with a standard that is approved by the Company. Personal safety harnesses/lanyard
systems are strictly forbidden.
• Shock absorbing lanyards shall only be used for fall protection and are never to be used for positioning
or material transport.
• The shock absorbing lanyard shall be secured to the D-ring located on the back of the harness between
the shoulder blades.
• The shock absorbing or deceleration device shall be secured adjacent to the harness D-ring.
• D-rings located at the waist may only be used for positioning or with rail-type ladder climbing devices.
• D-rings located on the front of the harness shall only be used for attachment to rail mounted ladder
climbing devices.
• Fall Body Safety Harness /shock absorbing lanyards shall be attached to an anchorage point capable of
supporting an impact load of 5,000 pounds or twice the potential impact load of the engineered fall
protection system.
• Fall Body Safety Harness and shock absorbing lanyards shall be secured to limit potential freefall
distance to six feet (6') or less.
• Lanyards will be inspected for cuts, excessive wear, loose splices and defective hardware before use.
• Defective full body harnesses and shock absorbing lanyards shall be tagged "DEFECTIVE - DO NOT
USE" and immediately removed from service.
• Fall Body Safety Harness and shock absorbing lanyards subjected to impact loading shall be
immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee protection until inspected
and determined by a Competent Person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse.
• Fall Body Safety Harness will be used only for the period specified by the manufacturer. No harness
(webbing) will be used over a period of five (5) years under average wearing conditions. The yarns used
in a harness will decrease its strength about 5 to 6 percent each year under perfect conditions.
• DO NOT mix components of fall arrest systems. For example, do not attach a lanyard from ABC Co. to
a harness from XYZ Co.
Page 13 of 25
• Fall body Safety Harness shall have components that meet internationally recognized standards.
• The care of full body harnesses is extremely important. When stored, they will be hung away from
exposure to weather, fire and sparks, and corrosive chemicals, free from oils, chemicals, paint and
excessive heat.
• When worn but not in use, the lanyard will be coiled or wrapped around the waist to prevent tripping or
snagging of the lanyard on protruding objects.
General European/International Standards for fall protective and other related equipment include the following:
EN341 PPE against falls from a height – descender devices

EN353-1
PPE against falls from a height – guided type fall arresters including rigid anchor line
EN353-2
PPE against falls from a height- guided type fall arresters including flexible anchor line
EN354 PPE against falls from a height- lanyards

EN355 PPE against falls from a height- shock/energy absorbers
EN358
PPE for work positioning and prevention of falls from a height – belts for work positioning and
restraint and work positioning lanyards
EN360 PPE against falls from a height- retractable type fall arresters
EN361 PPE against falls from a height- full body harness
EN362 PPE against falls from a height- connectors
EN363 PPE against falls from a height- fall arrest systems

EN365
PPE against falls from a height- general requirements for instructions for use, maintenance,
examination, repair, marking and packaging
EN517 Prefabricated accessories for roofing – roof safety hooks

EN565 Safety requirements and test method
EN795
Protection against falls – anchor devices requirements and testing
EN813 PPE against falls from a height- sit harnesses

EN1497 Rescue equipment, rescue harnesses
EN1498 Rescue equipment, rescue loops
Anchor Points
• The strength of a personnel fall arrest system is based on its being attached to an anchor system that
does not reduce the strength of the system.
• Anchor used to attach fall arrest equipment shall be independent of any structural support or
suspension system, capable of supporting 2,270 kg per attached worker, or designed, installed and
used as part of a complete personal fall protection system that maintains a safety factor of at least 2.
• Connectors shall be made of drop forged, pressed or formed steel or equivalent material, have a
corrosion resistant finish and have smooth surface and edges to prevent damage to interfacing parts of
the system.
Page 14 of 25
• Only D rings and locking snap hooks that have a minimum tensile strength of 2,270kg and have been
proof tested to a minimum tensile strength of 1,600 kg with out cracking, breaking or being permanently
deformed shall be used.
• Snap hooks attached to shock absorbing lanyards shall be of the double action/locking type design.
Simple spring resistant snap hooks shall not be used for fall protection.
The following equipment and structure shall NOT be used for anchorage points.
• Screw Pipe.
• Conduit.
• Cable Tray (use requires engineering approval).
• Welded Pipe Less Than 2”.
• Wooden Handrails.
Lifeline Systems (Minimum Safety Requirements):
Company shall ensure that where it is required to design and engineer life lines system for its particular
need, shall use adequate engineering system as defined by a qualified engineer. An inspection program
shall be defined to ensure all life lines used are inspected and safe for use.
- Horizontal lifelines
• Lifeline system shall be designed and installed and use under the supervision of a qualified person or
as part of a personal fall arrest system that maintains a safety factor of at least 2.
• Shall be independent of any platform anchorage and capable of supporting at least 2,270kg. per
worker.
• Lifelines shall be installed, removed, and used under the supervision of a designated qualified
person(s).
• Lifelines shall be protected from being cut or abraded. (i.e., Softeners around lifelines at anchorage
point).
- Vertical lifelines
• Attach each employee to a separate lifeline, the reason for this is that in multiple ties-offs to a single
lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement of the lifeline during the arrest of the fall may pull other
employees' lanyards, causing them to fall as well.
• Lifelines shall have a minimum breaking strength of at least 2,270kg.
• Design install and use only under supervision of designated qualified persons
• Always protect lifelines from being cut or abraded.
• All Self retracting lifelines and lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 60cm or less shall
be able to sustain a minimum tensile load of 1,360kg when fully extended.
• Each retractable lifeline device shall be equipped with a rope tag line for extending the device to
elevations below the point of attachment.
• Ripstitch lanyards or tearing and deforming lanyards, shall all be able to sustain a minimum tensile load
of 2,270 kg when fully extended.
Page 15 of 25
• General test methods for PPE against falls from a height are detailed in European Standard EN364.
Inspecting and Maintaining Fall Protection Equipment
• All Fall Body Safety Harness and shock absorbing lanyards shall be inspected by a competent person
prior to each use and monthly. A register for lifting equipment such that all equipment (including that for
WAH) is uniquely marked and undergoes a thorough inspection every six months should also be
adopted.
• Monthly inspection records will be maintained for the life of the equipment.
• Employees using a Fall Body Safety Harness and shock absorbing lanyards shall inspect them for wear,
damage and other deterioration prior to each use.
• In case any fall protection system components have been subject to impact loading , remove the system
and/or components from service and do not use them until they have been inspected and determined to
be undamaged and suitable by the competent person .
• Fall arrests system will be used by a worker to support a combined person and tool weight less than
140kg, if greater than 140kg, adequate modification on the system shall be performed to provide
protection of such heavier weight (greater than 140kg ) , otherwise the system will not be accepted for
such situations .
WEBBING
Inspect for cuts, cracks, tears or abrasions, undue

stretching and damage due to deterioration, contact
with heat, acids or other corrosives.
BUCKLES
The tongues should be carefully examined where fitted to

the shoulder of buckles; inspect for open or distorted rollers
Page 16 of 25
STITCHING
Inspect for broken, cut or worn threads.
SNAPHOOKS
Inspect for damaged or distorted hooks or faulty

springs.
11. SPECIAL FALL PREVENTION AND FALL PROTECTION REQUIRMENTS
Protecting Personnel Working On Lower Levels
• The danger zone for employees on lower levels includes the covered area directly below the elevated
surface and a minimum radius of 3 meters around the covered area.
• When there is a potential for a person to pass beneath or work below an elevated working surface, that
elevated work surface shall be equipped with toe boards.
• The immediate area around the area of overhead work shall be barricaded to keep personnel from the
area. (Usually hard barriers are used).
• Personnel working on elevated surfaces shall keep tools materials and equipment from falling by
securing them with a rope, wire or keeping them away from the edge.
Working near Excavations

• Excavations with straight cut sides and changes in elevation of six feet (6') or more shall be provided
with fall prevention/protection devices adequate to protect personnel working or traveling adjacent to
them. [Ref.B2].
• The preferred method for safeguarding this fall exposure is with rigid guardrail systems immediately
adjacent to the excavation.
• Where personnel are required to work immediately adjacent to the excavation and guardrail systems do
not provide adequate protection, employees shall be provided fall restraint and/or lifeline systems to
which they can secure their safety lanyard/harness.
• Employees shall remain secured to a lifeline or restraint system when working within six feet (6'),(2m) of
an excavation with unprotected sides or edges.
Page 17 of 25
• Lifeline systems and employee restraint systems shall meet engineered drawing and technical
specification prior to use.
• Workers shall not used retractable lifeline for horizontal movements.
Openings Holes Cover
Protection and Covers for opening in floors, roofs, and other walking/working surfaces shall meet the
following requirements:
• Avoid stepping on opening cover; however it shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least
twice the weight of workers, equipment, and materials that may be placed on the cover.
• All covers shall be properly secured when installed to prevent accidental displacement by the wind,
equipment, or employees.
• All covers shall be marked with the words "OPENING COVER - DO NOT REMOVE" to provide
adequate warning of the hazard.
• Opening covers shall be removed only by authorized personnel.
• Ensure the protected opening area is barricaded before removing the cover, to prevent workers from
accidentally stepping through an opening.
• For short duration tasks (single shift), barricade tape may be used to warn employees provided the
opening is attended by a monitor at all times. The monitor shall have no other duties.
• Barricade tape shall be erected a minimum distance of six feet (6') ),(2m) from the opening.
• Falling hazards associated with permanent grating removal shall be properly addressed and controlled;
Grating removal should be performed under use of work permit.
Working on Roofs
Working on roofs can be dangerous if not properly planned, coordinated and executed. The safety
measures for working on roofs are:
• Safe means of access and egress including ladders and scaffolding shall be provided and used by all
workers. Access and egress shall be inspected by a qualified person at regular intervals.
• Fall prevention system or structure including lifelines and barricades shall be provided and used by all
workers. Lifelines and barricades shall be inspected by a qualified person at regular basis.
• Crawling ladders/boards when required shall be provided and used by workers working on sloping roofs
of more than 10º gradients. Crawler ladders/boards will be securely fixed to prevent slipping. Crawler
ladders/boards shall be inspected daily by the workers prior to the start of work.
• The provision of all the above does not exempt a worker from wearing and anchoring his fall arresting
equipment (harnesses and lanyard).
• Prior to working on roofs, a risk assessment will be performed. Upon identifying any hazards, measures
will be taken to reinforce, barricade or cover these hazards.
• Workers will walk and work on properly secured crawling ladders/boards.
• Tools and material will be carried in a suitable designed waist bag. No tools or material will be thrown up
or down from the roof. All tools and materials will be removed from the roofs after work.
• No materials, tools or equipment shall be allowed to be stored on a roof. All materials including tools
and materials shall be removed at the end of each day shift.
• Work requiring the handling of sheeting and cladding needs extra care especially in bad weather
conditions (i.e. windy conditions). Sheeting may cause the person handling it to lose balance and fall.
• In the event when a lifeline has to be removed for the purpose of work, a secondary lifeline shall be
provided away from the work location. The secondary lifeline shall be installed before the primary lifeline
is being removed.
• When work has to be carried over into the night hours, adequate lighting will be provided, (risk
assessment to be carried out for night shift work).
Page 18 of 25
Steel Structure Erection
The erection of structural steel work shall be carefully planned. Potential accidents are often caused by
falling from the work area or when trying to gain access to a work area on the structure.
The old "Custom and Practice" of walking horizontal steel members, or shinning up or sliding down steel
columns greatly increases the risk of falling and serious injury.
The following minimum requirements shall be carried out to ensure that the erection of structural steel work
is executed in a safe and controlled manner.
• Access to structure shall be achieved by use of ladders, aerial lifts, or other approved personnel aerial
lift. Climbing of structural steel members such as columns and diagonal braces is expressly forbidden.
• Personnel erecting skeletal steel structures shall maintain 100% fall prevention/protection through the
use of personal fall protection systems, retractable lifelines, connector’s toggles, and aerial lifts.
• Safe access and egress including ladders and scaffolding shall be provided and used by all workers.
Access and egress will be inspected by a qualified person at regular basis.
• Fall prevention systems including lifelines, safety nets and catch platform (scaffold) will be provided and
used by all workers. Lifelines, safety nets and catch platforms shall be inspected by a qualified person
at regular interval.
• All workers will be provided with fall arresting equipment (harnesses with double lanyards to ensure
100% fall protection all the time).
• Harnesses will be effectively anchored onto lifelines or solid steel members to prevent fall.
• Workers shall not be permitted to walk along unguarded structural steel members for access to working
positions. Access to working positions will only be performed through the "straddling" method on steel
beam. When "straddling" through the steel beam and changing direction or negotiating an obstacle, the
safety harness lanyard will be secured to a suitable anchor point.
• Tools and material will be carried in a purpose designed waist bag. No tools or equipment will be thrown
up or down from a steel structure. All tools and material will be removed from the steel structure.
Working on Scaffolding and Temporary Platforms

General Requirements
• Scaffold shall meet the requirements of the Scaffold Industry Association (SIA) handbook, or equivalent
local regulatory standard.
• Ensure all temporary platforms/walkways are equipped with solid decking free of openings and
standards guardrail systems.
• Personnel working/traveling on temporary platforms with fall exposure shall secure their lanyards to an
anchorage point capable of supporting 5,000 pounds, (2267 kg) or designed as part of a complete
personal fall arrest system that maintains a safety factor of at least two (2).
• Every temporary work platform shall be provided with a safe means of access/egress. Retractable
lifelines shall be used while ascending or descending access ladders to temporary work platforms or
walkways with a fall hazard greater than twelve feet (12') ,(3.65 m), unless ladder are erected inside
scaffolding cage ladder .
• Employees and contractors shall not work from an incomplete scaffold, work on scaffolding during
storms or high winds, climb across handrails, use the toe board as a support when climbing up or down,
or use the scaffold as a hoist point.
• Tag lines shall be used to hoist material onto a scaffold. Small items may be lifted in a bag or bucket.
• Scaffolds shall only to be erected, modified, or dismantled by a competent scaffold erector under the
supervision of a competent person.
• All scaffolds shall be inspected and have a Scaffold tag.
• Only work on scaffolds with a Green Scaffold tag that has been inspected safe for use shall be signed
by a competent person.
• Shall be inspected also after any high winds or other very bad weather that could cause damage to the
scaffold.
• The supervisor of the work team using the scaffold shall also inspect the scaffold which is used before
allowing his workers to use it. The craft using the scaffold shall not modify it. If modifications are
Page 19 of 25
necessary the scaffold supervision should be informed and a new Scaffold Tag provided by scaffolding
inspector.
• If you are working over water, then use a fall arrest system that includes a full body harness.
• Employees and contractor shall not ride a rolling scaffold, or attempt to move a rolling scaffold without
help.
• When moving scaffolds, watch for overhead obstructions and holes. Use all caster brakes on rolling
scaffolds when they are not in motion. It should be free from workers.
• Keep all loose items in a container on the deck while work is in progress.
• Remove all material and equipment from platforms when work is completed.
• Remove scaffolding as soon as possible once the job is completed.
Minimum Safety Requirements in Constructing Scaffolding
• The crew supervisor (or designated competent person) will be trained on the guidelines for safe
scaffolding construction, ensure that scaffolding is inspected daily and that the scaffold meets
acceptable published standards.
• The crew shall wear a full body harness while constructing the scaffolding. The scaffolding supervisor
(or designated competent person) shall directly supervise the erection and dismantling of the scaffold.
• Scaffolding Supervisor will inspect all materials used to verify that they are of sufficient quality and in
good condition. Defective material shall be discarded.
• Scaffolds shall be large enough to provide space for all personnel to perform work safely and capable of
supporting at least four times the combined weight of the total estimated number of workers plus their
tools and materials.
• For critical Scaffold, a competent person will design all drawings and specifications for all frame
scaffolds. A copy of the plan shall be kept at the site for reference by workers constructing, using and
dismantling the scaffold.
• Keep scaffolds plumb and level at all times. Use adjusting screws instead of blocks to adjust scaffolds
on uneven grades.
• Level scaffolds until all braces fit easily and securely
• Do not fully extend the adjusting screws, extend the adjusting screws over the manufacturer’s
recommendations or as defined in the scaffolding site rules.
Page 20 of 25
The following specifications apply to all scaffolds:
Element Requirements
Foundation Use adequate sills and base plates to support all scaffolds. Extra measures are required
when erecting scaffolds in unstable areas, on dirt or uneven surfaces to keep them plumb
and level
Decking Fully deck all scaffolds. All boards shall be scaffold grade quality lumber without cracks or
repairs, be in place and cleared on each end to prevent slipping, extend between 15-30cm
over their end supports, fastened to the scaffold, preferably by wiring them down with a wire
fastener on the bottom of the plank
Bracing Use horizontal and/or angle bracing as required by the manufacturer. Use horizontal stiff leg
bracing at the bottom of the scaffold, at the top of the scaffold, every 7m on scaffold higher
than 7m .
A competent scaffolder can work out how much diagonal bracing is needed.
Fall Install guardrails, top and center and toe boards of at least 10cm on scaffolds and platforms
Protection that stand 3m or more over the floor or the ground. Install top rails between 90-105 cm to
above the scaffold back.
If personnel will potentially pass under the scaffolding, then barricade the area below the
scaffold at least 3m from the base of the scaffold
Install a screen of 1cm mesh or smaller between the toe board and the guard rail that
extends the full length of the opening.
If personnel will be working above the scaffold, then provide overhead protection for workers
on the scaffold.
Support Scaffolds over 7 m shall be tied to a permanent structure at 7m intervals. No part of the
scaffold may be tied to or protrude into a fixed ladder well. If scaffolds are more than three
times as high as their smallest base dimension then they shall have outriggers or be tied into
a stable structure.
Access Provide a safe means of accessing the scaffold using built in or attached ladders that extend
over the scaffold deck and allow step across access, and adjoining platforms or landings
Safety Requirements for Working on a Ladder
• Use only ladders which satisfy applicable internationally recognized design and construction standards
made of wood, metal or fiberglass
• Do not use job made ladders and metal ladders around electrical equipment, or place ladders on top on
any unstable base to obtain additional height, or level the ladder.
• Do not use ladders as runways, platforms or scaffolds.
• Open step ladders completely and place all four legs squarely on the floor.
• Permanent caged ladders being used to access complete structures where no fall exposure exists, may
be ascended/descended without wearing a safety harness/lanyard.
• If you use a portable ladder for access or egress and to gain access to tops of coolers, roofs, platforms
or other elevated areas, then select a ladder that extends at least 1m above the surface and be secured
against displacement.
• Retractable lifelines shall be placed above every temporary construction ladder that is to be used for
repeated access/egress and exposes employees to a fall hazard greater than twelve feet (12') ,(3.65
m), The retractable device shall be attached in such a manner that it does not interfere with the
employee who is using the ladder for access or egress. Personnel ascending or descending these
ladders shall secure the retractable lifeline to their safety harness prior to ladder use.
• One time access/egress on a portable ladder may not require the use of a retractable lifeline. The
following procedure shall be used when a retractable lifeline is not required.
• Falling hazards shall be assessed to demonstrate that risk is controlled and access/egress is feasible
without putting ladder users in danger.
Page 21 of 25
• Workers ascending ladders that are not yet secured at the top shall have another employee hold the
ladder at the bottom until it can be properly secured. This also includes the last trip down after untying
the ladder at the top.
• Upon reaching the elevation where the work is to be performed, the employee shall secure their shock
absorbing lanyard prior to proceeding with the task. The ladder should then be properly secured and
the task may begin. When the task is completed, this process should be reversed with the shock
absorbing lanyard being the last protective device to be released prior to descent.
• When climbing a ladder, use both hands, face the ladder, use three point climbing to keep either both
hands and one foot or both feet and one hand always in contact with the ladder.
• Do not stand or climb on the top two steps on the ladder, or the bracing on the back legs of a step
ladder.
• Do not carry tools by hand or in clothing pockets. If you need to carry tools up the ladder, carry them in
a bag strapped over your shoulder, or hoist them using a mechanical carrier, such as a tag line,
suspended bucket, or tool belt. Pull the tools up to the job site only after reaching the area of work.
• Do not use props, stools and empty drums to gain extra height or to level up ladders.
• Do not attach short ladders together to make a longer ladder, use pieces of extension ladder separately,
fold step ladders to use as a straight ladder or paint wooden ladders.
• Only one person on any ladder at a time. Firstly, they are not designed to take the weight of two people,
and secondly one person could accidentally kick the other and make them fall.
• When the vertical height of a ladder exceeds 9 meters, an intermediate landing platform complete with
guardrails and toe boards will be provided whenever practicable.
• Do not tie off fall protection equipment to the ladder.
• Before stepping onto the ladder make sure that your boots are clean and free from mud or any other
slippery substance.
• For every 120cm of height, place the base of straight or extension ladders 30cm away from the point of
contact at the top of the ladder.
Inspecting and Maintaining Ladders
• Inspect ladders before each use and monthly.

• During inspections, note broken or cracked rungs or side rails, hardware on stepladders, and safety feet
on straight or extension ladders.
• Inspect wooden ladders, look for the label stating conformity to applicable international/local standard)
and that the ladder is not painted.
• Inspect metal and fiberglass ladders, looking for dents or bends in the metal or cracks or stresses in the
fiberglass. Also look for the label stating conformity applicable international/local standard).
• If the ladder is defective, remove the ladder from service, report the defective ladder to the supervisor
immediately and tag DANGEROUS, DO NOT USE for repair or destroy it if it is beyond repair.
• Inspection records shall be kept for two years and include the type and size of ladder.
• Follow manufacturer recommendations when repairing a ladder.
Operating Aerial Lift (Bucket) Trucks
• Aerial lift trucks such as cherry pickers, scissor lifts, flying carpets or other names shall meet all
applicable legislative regulations, or if not exist then relevant EC regulations covering this type of
equipment. [Ref.B1].
• These are very useful tools, and when used properly are very safe ways of gaining access to heights
without the need for scaffolding.
• There are basically two issues to consider before using a mobile elevated work platform, the operator
and the machine itself.
• The operator shall be trained to be competent in the use of the specific machine that he wants to use,
and in possession of a certificate of competency from his employer and authorized by Company.
• Different types operate in different ways so we can not assume that a person who can safely use one
type can automatically use a different one without danger. The operator shall also be physically capable
Page 22 of 25
to use the machine.

• The machine itself shall also be safe to use and at the first time that any such machine arrives on site it
shall be examined and certified by a third party ( approved certification agency in the local Country).
This inspection shall be repeated in accordance with the certification process.
• In addition, the user of any mobile elevated work platform shall inspect the safety critical items before
each use of the machine. This includes tyres, brakes, alarms, hydraulics, and any other critical systems.
An inspection checklist should be used.
• Inspections of aerial lift trucks shall be conducted per the manufacturer’s recommendations and ensure
regular maintenance.
• Do not operate aerial lift devices with noted, reported deficiencies until repairs are made and equipment
is authorized for use.
• Prior to use, verify that controls are plainly marked as to their function and test the controls to ensure
proper working order.
• Company shall ensure that each Contractor and Subcontractor is responsible for ensuring that all
mobile elevated work platforms are maintained in accordance with the suppliers’ recommendations.
• MEWPs (Mobile Elevated Work Platform) shall only be used on level, stable ground and the work
platform is fitted with guard rails, toe boards or other suitable barriers.
• Aerial lift trucks shall have both platform (upper) and lower controls. Upper controls shall be in or beside
the platform within easy reach of the operator. Lower controls shall provide for overriding the upper
controls. Lower controls shall not be operated unless permission has been obtained from the employee
in the lift, except in an emergency.
• The insulated portion of an aerial lift shall not be altered in any manner that might reduce its insulating
value.
• Aerial lift trucks may be ‘”field modified”, for uses other than those intended by the manufacturer,
provided the modification has been certified in writing by the manufacturer or by any other equivalent
entity to be in conformity applicable design and regulatory requirements, and deemed at least as safe
as the equipment was before modification. This should be supported by a risk
assessment/management of change review before the modifications are made.
• An aerial lift truck shall not be moved when the boom is elevated in a working position with personnel in
the basket (unless it is designed for this purpose, and then only within the operating restrictions).
• Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected to verify that it is properly cradled
and outriggers are in stowed position.
• Set the brakes and position the outrigger devices on pads or similar solid surface and install the wheel
chocks, before use; especially on inclines.
• Do not operate aerial lift trucks on grades, side slopes or ramps that exceed the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• Maintain a clear view of the path of travel, maintain a safe distance from other obstacles, debris, drop
offs, holes, depressions, slopes and other hazards. Maintain a safe distance from overhead obstacles,
especially power lines. Place signs at ground level to warn of overhead obstacles above the sign. Use
trained banks man.
• All personnel in the working elevated platform shall wear appropriate PPE at all times.
• A restraint or tethering system with a body harness shall be worn at all times while working from the lift,
with the lanyard securely attached to the boom or basket as recommended by the manufacturer.
• Securing the lanyard to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working from a lift is prohibited.
• Workers shall stand firmly on the floor of the basket and shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket
or use plank, ladders, or other devices for a work position.
• Loads shall be distributed on platforms and extensions in accordance with the manufacturer’s rated
capacity.
• Do not position an aerial lift device against another object to steady the elevated platform.
• Clear the area surrounding the elevated platform prior to lowering.
• It is prohibited to leave the basket at any time whilst elevated.
• Requirements on maximum persons allowed in the aerial lift and the maximum working load shall be in
accordance with manufacturer specification.

Any need of updating the present document is notified to SICI department, responsible for possible updating
of the document.
Page 23 of 25
13. . RECORDING RESPONSIBILITIES

The functions involved in the process described herein arrange for the preservation of the documentation for
the purposes of the traceability of its individual steps.
14. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
TO DIME and DICS UNITS
TO SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATED COMPANIES AND THEIR BRANCHES
For Information:
TO DIME and DICS UNITS
TO SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATED COMPANIES AND THEIR BRANCHES
15. LIST OF ANNEXES
Annex A - WAH Flowchart
Page 24 of 25
ANNEX A
WAH Flowchart
WORKING AT HEIGHT HIERARCHY

Rethink Task
No
Can we
Can we Can we
AVOID
Review Task No PREVENT No MINIMISE
Working at
Falls? Falls?
Height?
Do we need to d o t he U se co ntrols t ha t p reven t Use con tro ls / eq uip me nt
job ? p eo ple g ettin g in to a th at min im ise th e d istan ce
Can th e job / eq uip m ent p o sitio n were th ey cou ld an d co ns equ enc es of a
Yes be m od ified t o rem o ve Yes fall, e.g . g uard s, b arrie rs , Yes po tential fa ll, e.g . Ro pe
th e nee d for Wo rking at wo rk restrain t system s Access , Work Po siti on ing ,
Heig ht? restrict ing access to Safe ty Ha rn esses / inertia
d an ger areas . reels, so ft lan din g s ystem s
etc .
Apply Standard CNRI

WAH Requirements.
Carry out NON Working at Carry out Working at Height

Height Task using ISSOW Task using ISSOW
Capture Lessons Learnt
Page 25 of 25
“Minimum Safety Standard on Protecting against Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S)”
Revision Sheet


2010
SGIAQ
Paragraph 6 page 5 Deleted : a gas which is even more toxic than H2S,
Page 2 of 20
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE.......................................................................................................................... 4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION............................................................................................. 4
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES ........................................................................................... 4
4. DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................ 4
5. IDENTIFYING H2S (H2S CHARACTERISTICS) .......................................................... 5
6. PROPERTIES OF HYDROGEN SULPHIDE (H2S) ...................................................... 5
7. UNDERSTANDING THE EFFECTS OF HYDROGEN SULPHIDE ............................... 7
8. PROTECTION SYSTEMS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 10
9. DEVELOPING AN H2S SAFETY PLAN ..................................................................... 11
10. WORKING IN AN ENVIRIONMENT THAT CONTAINS H2S .................................. 12
11. REQUIRED TRAINING............................................................................................ 15
12. STOCKING SAFETY EQUIPMENT......................................................................... 16
13. USING WARNING SIGNALS .................................................................................. 17
14. DETECTING H2S .................................................................................................... 17
15. DETECTING H2S ON NEARBY VESSELS AND FACILITIES ............................... 17
16. DETECTING H2S DURING DRILLING AND WELL OPERATIONS....................... 18
17. DETECTING H2S DURING PRODUCTION OPERATIONS ................................... 18
18. CALIBRATING H2S DETECTORS ......................................................................... 18
19. MONITORING SO2 WHILE BURNING GAS CONTAINING H2S ........................... 18
20. RESPONDING TO AN H2S LEAK .......................................................................... 18
21. PERFORMING AN EMERGENCY RESCUE OPERATION .................................... 19
22. GIVING FIRST AID.................................................................................................. 19
23. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................ 20
24. RECORDING RESPONSIBILITIES......................................................................... 20
25. DISTRIBUTION ....................................................................................................... 20
Page 3 of 20
1. SCOPE
The purpose of this minimum safety standard is to provide guidance on the management of hazards
resulting from the presence of hydrogen sulfide (H2S).
The requirements outlined in this document are applicable to all personnel, contractors,
subcontractors and visitors who require entering or working in an H2S restricted areas for onshore and
offshore installations operated and controlled by eni e&p division Companies. An area which
contains and known to contain H2S is identified as a restricted area.
Important Notes:
• The Minimum safety requirements outlined in this document are the minimum safety standard;
any required specific procedures or guidance should be elaborated by the individual companies
for their own particular operations and sites, including elaborating their own written specific H2S
safety Plans and any required specific procedures.
• Any specific requirements which are not discussed in this document shall be addressed with site
specific rules and ensure compliance with the applicable regulations and legal requirements in the
host country. It is recommended that the Company implements a continuous H2S awareness
campaign (trainings, tool box talks, safety posters …etc).
• Ensuring that the engineering enhancements of the H2S detection systems are considered as
part of technology advancement to help to ensure optimal protection of personnel.
This document is applied to all the activities with the presence of H2S, carried out by Company or
Contractors’ workers in all eni e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies and in DIME and
DICS units.
4. DEFINITIONS
• Company: an organization part of or connected to eni e&p division such as: Geographic Unit,
Affiliate, Subsidiary or Joint Venture under eni e&p division’s Companies operational control
(more than 30% share or relevant business direction).
• Company Site: Refer to any offices, premises, onshore location, offshore platform and any other
offshore supports to production or drilling activities
Page 4 of 20
5. IDENTIFYING H2S (H2S CHARACTERISTICS)
Hydrogen sulphide (H2S) occurs in a variety of natural and industrial settings, it may be found in the
following places:
1. Naturally in a soluble form in crud oil and gas, and when actively disturbed or agitated is released
from solution as toxic H2S gas;
2. Due to the reaction of acids on the metallic sulphides or chemicals;
3. Decomposition of organic material.
4. Occurs in deoxygenated seawater , which allows growth of sulphate reducing bacteria , H2S is
generated by bacteria in sea water which thrive in conditions of oxygen deficiency and , with
organic material as a nutrient , reduces sulphate in seawater to H2S and stagnant water and
anaerobic systems – waste water treatment.
The common names for H2S include H2S, stink damp, sulfurated hydrogen, sour crude, rotten egg gas,
hydro sulfuric acid, sulfur hydride, sour gas, and silent killer.
When H2S occurs in natural gas and oil reservoirs, it is usually mixed with other hydrocarbons. H2S
escapes from other hydrocarbons as it reaches the surface. Heat accelerates this process. It is a
commonly found gas in the oil and gas industry.
6. PROPERTIES OF HYDROGEN SULPHIDE (H2S)
• H2S is a highly toxic gas, even in very low concentrations;
• It is colorless gas with distinctive smell of sulphur or rotten eggs, at low concentration, it
deadens the olfactory senses at about 50-100ppm and it kills the sense of smell at higher
concentrations – very dangerous characteristics;
• H2S is soluble in water and oil allowing it to be carried out in solution for a considerable
distance;
• H2S is irritant, when it mixes with water it forms a weak acid, there is water in the eyes, nose,
throat and respiratory systems which lead to irritation;
• H2S is heavier that air ;
• Corrosive ;
• Flammable: it burns into SO2,
• Explosive;
Page 5 of 20
The following chart outlines the physical properties of H2S
COMMENTS
CHARACTERISTIC
H2S is a highly toxic gas, even in very low concentrations. No one can develop immunity to H2S. Low levels can damage the respiratory
Toxic system. High levels can kill within minutes.
Colorless H2S is invisible.
In low concentrations, H2S has an offensive odor, which resembles rotten eggs. Because H2S deadens the sense of smell, odor is
Offensive Odor not a good indicator of its presence or concentration.
H2S is soluble in water and hydrocarbons and will absorb into most liquids at elevated pressures, but emerges as a gas in ambient
Soluble conditions. H2S dissolves in water to produce a very weak hydrosulfurous acid.
H2S is corrosive to:
Corrosive Most metals, especially in the presence of water, plastics, tissues and nerves.
H2S can cause extreme damage to valves and piping, including hydrogen embrittlement and sulfide stress cracking.
Heavier than air H2S is 20% heavier than air, Specific Gravity: 1.1895, but it can be dispersed over great distances with only a slight breeze. Because of
its weight, it will collect in poorly ventilated and low lying areas including pits, ditches and cellars.
H2S is flammable when mixed with air and burns with a blue flame and produce Sulphure dioxide (SO2) less toxic than H2S but is very
Flammable irritant and cause serious injury. H2S can be ignited by:
260°C Heat , Burning cigarettes , Hot engine manifolds , Electrical arcs , Welding rods
H2S’s explosive range varies from 4.3-46% by volume.
Toxic by-products When ignited, H2S produces sulfur dioxide (SO2) which can cause pneumonia and respiratory damage if inhaled. Avoid flare stacks and
burning pits when H2S is flared or ignited.
Reactive H2S reacts with soluble metal salts to produce insoluble precipitates. For example, H2S reacts with lead acetate to produce dark brown
lead sulfide.
Page 6 of 20
7. UNDERSTANDING THE EFFECTS OF HYDROGEN SULPHIDE
H2S enters the bloodstream through:

• Inhalation;
• Ingestion;
• Skin absorption.
Since injection of H2S rarely occurs in the workplace, this document deals with the effects of H2S when
it:
• Is inhaled;
• Is touched;
• Comes in contact with the eyes.
Symptoms can take hours to develop of may present themselves in seconds, depending on the
concentration of H2S.
IF YOU NOTICE ANY OF THE FOLLOWING SYPTOMS IN YOURSELF OR IN OTHERS MOVE

IMMEDIATELY TO THE DESIGNATED SAFE AREA, THEN GET MEDICAL HELP IMMEDIATELY.
Symptoms of H2S poisoning by inhalation:

• Dryness in nose and throat and/or coughing;
• Headache;
• Loss of appetite and/or nausea;
• Fatigue, dizziness, and/or loss of consciousness;
• Irrational behavior;
• Difficulty breathing,
• Death.
Symptoms by skin contact:
Symptoms of H2S poisoning through contact with the skin include skin irritation and/or skin
discoloration.
Symptoms by eye contact:
• Eye irritation;
• Pain or burning sensation in eyes;
• Blurred vision;
• Painful secretion of tears.
After effects of limited exposure include:
• Nervousness ;
• Dry non productive cough;
• Painful breathing and/or pain in the nose and throat;
Page 7 of 20
• Nausea;
• Headache;
• Insomnia;
• Eye irritation;
• Inflammation and or pain;
• Excessive tearing and or sensitivity to light;
• Pulmonary edema (fluid in the lungs) in extreme cases.
The effects of H2S depend on the victim’s sensitivity and the:
• Duration of the exposure ;

• Frequency of the exposure;
• Intensity of the exposure (concentration of H2S).
Several health conditions can increase the effect of H2S, including:
• Emphysema or asthma;
• Diabetes;
• Epilepsy;
• Eye infections;
• Anemia;
• Alcoholism or consumption of alcohol within the past 24 hours.
Individuals with these conditions shall minimize or avoid exposure to H2S.
Notes:
• Medical conditions or other non-obvious factors may impact an individual’s tolerance for
H2S.
• Never assume that you can withstand large concentrations of the gas.
Page 8 of 20
The following chart outlines the hazards of various exposure levels. Symptoms listed in one stage
continue or worsen through the rest.
PPM 75 sec.-2 2-15 minutes 15-30 minutes 30-60 minutes 1-4 hours 4-8 hours >8 hours
** minutes
20-100 -- -- Loss of smell Eye/throat Fatigue, Symptoms Pulmonary
irritation headache worsen edema,
eye injury,
death
100- -- Cough, eye Difficulty Throat irritation Saliva and Symptoms death
150 irritation, breathing, eye mucous worsen
fatigue, loss pain discharge
of smell
150- -- Loss of smell Eye/throat Symptoms Blurry death
200 irritation worsen vision, light
sensitivity
200- Eye Symptoms Eye pain, Light sensitivity death
350 irritation, worsen painful tears, runny nose,
loss of fatigue difficulty
smell breathing
350- Loss of Eye irritation, Difficulty death

450 smell dizziness breathing,
Eye coughing
irritation fatigue, nausea
450- Difficulty Symptoms Heart

650 breathing, worsen palpitations
eye death
irritation,
collapse
650+ Collapse,
permanent
brain
damage,
death
Notes:
• **PPM is the concentration of H2S in the atmosphere, expressed as the number of H2S parts
present in a million parts of air.
• A 1% concentration of H2S is equal to 10,000 PPM. Only 650 PPM is required to cause death in 75
seconds.
7.1. H2S – Exposure Standards
• Threshold limit value –time weighted average: Threshold limit value –time weighted
average is normally abbreviated as TLV-TWA.
• This value is the maximum concentration of a toxic gas that a worker can be exposed to day
after day without suffering health problems.
• TLV is the time weighted average concentration for an 8 hrs a day or 40 hrs a week to which
nearly all workers are repeatedly exposed without adverse effect.
Page 9 of 20
• STEL (Short term Exposure Limit) : This is the higher TLV which defines the maximum
concentration that a person may be exposed to for a maximum of 15 minutes
• There should be no more than four (4) such exposures per day with at least 1 hour between
exposures.
• Worker to be assigned proper respiratory protection above 10 ppm.
• Conventionally, 5 ppm is considered a primary warning level.
• Best safe practice is to work at zero exposure to H2S.
• Threshold Limit Value- Ceiling (TLV-C): this is the concentration level beyond which
workers shall never be exposed in working time assuming direct reading instruments are
used –even for instant! It is 20 ppm.
Based on ACGIH (American conference of governmental industrial hygienists):
• LTEL (Long Term Exposure Limit) 10 ppm, defined as the maximum air concentration you
can be exposed to in an 8 hour period, 40 hours a week, without respiratory protection. Due
recognition has to be given to a working day longer than 8 hours when working offshore (in
this case, 5 ppm can be taken as LTEL).
• STEL (Short term Exposure Limit) 15 ppm based on 15 minute time period.
• ACGIH Threshold Limit Value (TLV) - LTEL 10ppm, STEL 15ppm.
Note: 700ppm sounds a lot, but it is only 0.07% vol., There may well be 99.93% vol. of fresh air as the
remainder.
8. PROTECTION SYSTEMS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
This is the minimum requirements which should be considered in controlling Hazards of H2S, but not
limited to the following:
• Proper engineering design;
• Management of Change;
• H2S sources identified;
• Reduce number of fittings to a minimum;
• Vents and drains to be routed to closed systems;
• Separate flare lines;
• Emergency Shut Down systems;
• Workplace controls and risk assessments;
• Chemical treatment;
• Know Escape Routes and take heed of signs and warnings;
Page 10 of 20
• Use Positive Pressure Air-Supplied Respirators;
• Monitor the area;
• Have escape sets available;
• Follow Work Procedures and H2S Safety plans;
• Use the “Buddy” System;
• Ventilate if work is in enclosed area.
• Use Windsocks and be “Wind Conscious”.
9. DEVELOPING AN H2S SAFETY PLAN
A copy of the approved plan shall be kept at the location where there is a potential for H2S exposure.
All personnel shall follow the plan at all times.
All H2S safety plans shall address:
• Safety procedures and rules concerning routine and non-routine operations (including
possible maintenance operations), equipment, drills, and smoking ;
• Training provided by the company for all employees, contractors and visitors;
• A plan for providing respiratory protection equipment to all affected personnel, including
contractors and visitors ;
• A description of protection measures and evacuation procedures ;
• Engineering controls to protect personnel from H2S.
All H2S safety plans shall include descriptions of the procedures to be taken in response to a
H2S release. These plans shall include:
• Actions taken when the concentration of H2S reaches 5 ppm and 10 ppm;
• Personnel responsible for those actions;
• Description of the audible and visual alarms to be activated;
• A list of at least two briefing areas on each location where personnel will assemble during
H2S alerts (Note: At least one of these areas shall be upwind of the H2S source at any
given time);
• A list of the governmental agencies, persons in the surrounding area, and Company
Departments to notify if H2S is released as well as how they will be reached and the
contact information. (Note: Include all facilities that might be exposed to H2S;
• A list of medical personnel and facilities, including phone numbers and addresses.
All H2S safety plans shall also include evacuation procedures, including
• Criteria for deciding when and how to evacuate;

• For offshore operations, procedures for evacuation by vessel, capsule or lifeboat ;
Page 11 of 20
• If helicopters shall be used during H2S alerts, then describe the types of H2S emergencies that
warrant the additional risk of using helicopters to evacuate personnel and any additional
precautions to be taken during the flights.
H2S safety plans for offshore operations will include criteria for safely positioning attendant
vessels, including:
• The location of the attendant vessel with respect to wind direction and distance from the facility
;
• Procedures used to relocate the vessel in an emergency;
H2S safety plans will include information regarding the facility’s procedures for monitoring
operations, including:
• Location of H2S detectors in plant installations, rigs or facilities;

• Approximate maximum concentration of H2S in the process stream;
• Operational conditions when you expect to flare gas containing H2S, including:
o Estimated maximum gas flow rate;
o H2S concentration;
o Duration of flaring,
o Assessment of risks to personnel during flaring and precautions taken to counter those
risks;
o Primary and alternate methods to ignite the flare and processes for sustaining ignition
and monitoring the status of the flare ;
o A procedure to shut off the gas to the flare in the event the flare is extinguished;
o Portable or fixed SO2 detection system used to determine SO2 hazard and concentration
when H2S is burned ;
o Increased monitoring and warning procedures taken when SO2 concentration reaches 2
PPM;
o Special equipment, procedures or precautions used to conduct a combination of drilling,
well completion, well workovers and production operations simultaneously.
10. WORKING IN AN ENVIRIONMENT THAT CONTAINS H2S
• Never enter marked and restricted areas without proper training, equipment or
authorization[Ref. B1];
• Personnel working in H2S areas shall be clean shaven to ensure a proper respirator mask
to face seal.[Ref. B2].
a).When working around H2S

• Always work in pairs to avoid being trapped in H2S environments ;
• Maintain adequate ventilation in all areas ;
• Avoid low-lying areas where H2S may collect;
• Adopt personal monitors when walking around live plants.
Page 12 of 20
Note: Personnel working in an H2S atmosphere or on equipment where H2S is present should be
‘overseen’ by a person outside the H2S risk area.
b). When working in areas having a concentration of H2S 10 PPM or higher, personnel shall:
• Always wear the proper respiratory protection ;
• Adopt personal monitors;
• Maintain and monitor devices indicating the wind direction including wind socks and
streamers ;
• Maintain reliable communications within the area ;
• Keep iron sulfide scale deposits in tanks, vessels and piping that are open to the air wet
to avoid ignition ;
• If working in a confined space, follow all confined space entry requirements [Ref. B1] ;
• Station a backup person equipped with suitable self contained breathing apparatus (and
rescue equipment as appropriate) outside of the hazardous area;
• Have a dedicated emergency plan;
• Always refer to a Job Safety Analysis.
c). Asset Management is responsible for

Training all Company employee and ensure Contract workers are trained before working in or around
H2S areas on the characteristics of H2S and Its dangers and safety measures .
Safety procedures to be used when H2S is encountered, including but not limited to the
following:
• Use and location of personal protection equipment ;
• CPR (Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation ) ;
• Rescue and first aid procedures ;
• Emergency numbers ;
• Escape routes and evacuation plans.
Ensuring that all personnel who may be required to use respirators or self contained
breathing apparatus (SCBA):
• Are trained in the use of that equipment ;
• Have annual pulmonary function tests ;
• Are properly fit tested as required by the Company Respiratory Protection Program ;
• Posting the following in visible and readily accessible locations ;
• Warning signs for visitors and others unfamiliar with the area ;
• Phone numbers of supervisors and emergency personnel (ambulance, police, fire
department, doctors, and hospital ;
• Communicating safety procedures to contractors and subcontractors, vendors, visitors
;
Page 13 of 20
• Provision and control of personal H2S detectors and chemical cartridge escape packs,
maintenance of such equipments and self calibrating of personal H2S monitors.
Before Contractors provide services on an existing company facility that has a potential H2S
concentration or in an H2S restricted areas, Company will provide the Contractor with:
• a copy of the locations including

o H2S safety plan;
o Safety rules and policies,
o Current gas analysis showing detailed content of the gas, including the concentration
of H2S in the gas stream.
• An on-site briefing to Contractors on emergency procedures and operation of all equipment;
• One hydrogen sulfide trained individual to act as a safety observer when maintenance is being
performed.
Note: Company shall ensure that EPC Contractors and their Subcontractors are fully complying
with Company requirements; specific H2S Safety Plans should be prepared by EPC Contractors
and submitted to Company for review and approval.
d). Workers are responsible for:
• ensuring they have and properly use all required personal protective equipment ;
• using required H2S detection equipment ;
• complying with all Company safety rules at the location.
Page 14 of 20
11. REQUIRED TRAINING
a. Required H2S training sessions shall cover as a minimum:
• Hazards of H2S and S02;

• Provisions for personal safety in the H2S contingency plan;
• Proper use of the safety equipment;
• Location of :
o Breathing Apparatus;
o H2S detectors and alarms ;
o Ventilation equipment;
o Warning and alarms systems ;
o Evacuation routes and direction of prevailing winds ;
o First Aid kits ;
o Resuscitators ;
• Restrictions for facial hair, glasses and contacts lenses;
• Basic first aid training ;
• Review of the site H2S Safety Plan (if applicable).
b. All Company employees and Contractor personnel with a potential for H2S exposure
shall receive H2S training :
• before beginning work at the facility ;

• annually within one year of completing the previous class ;
• trained employees or contractors transferred from another facility shall attend a
supplemental briefing on H2S equipment, procedures and the site H2S Safety Plan before
beginning duty at the facility.
c. Visitors to Company locations who will remain at the location for more than 24 hours
shall receive the same training as employees.
Visitors who will spend less than 24 hours at the facility are exempt from the above requirement but
shall be escorted and be briefed on:
• the location and use of an assigned respirator, including practice in wearing and adjusting
the respirator fit.
• safe briefing areas and alarm systems.
• hazards of H2S and sulfur dioxide.
• their responsibilities in the event of an H2S release.
Page 15 of 20
12. STOCKING SAFETY EQUIPMENT
• Select, use and maintain respiratory equipment to conform to ANSI Z88.2 or an

internationally recognized equivalent standard ;
• Store protective breathing equipment in a location that is quickly and easily accessible to
all personnel and ensure personnel are familiar with its location ;
• Label all breathing air bottles as containing breathing air for human use.
The following table outlines the recommended requirements for respiratory equipment. These
should however, but customized to the site’s requirements as determined by the site H2S Safety
Plan.
Required equipment Quantity
Self contained pressure demand respirators with Enough to provide all personnel, contractors
hose line capability and breathing time of at least and visitors with immediate access.
15 minutes
Spectacle kits As needed
System of breathing air manifolds, hoses and Determined by location supervisor

masks at the location and briefing area
Cascade air bottle breathing apparatus Determined by location supervisor
Optional: high pressure compressor suitable for If necessary to re-charge the cascade air
providing breathing quality air bottle system
• All locations with workers who will potentially encounter a H2S environment shall have
personal H2S detectors capable of detecting small (< or = 10 ppm) concentrations available
for use by all affected personnel ;
• Install explosion-proof ventilation devices in areas where H2S or SO2 may accumulate.
Provide movable ventilation devices in work areas. The movable devices shall be multi-
directional and capable of dispersing H2S or SO2 gases away from personnel;
• Suitable types and quantities of first aid supplies and equipment shall be defined by the
site’s medical department ;
• Suitable types and quantities of communication equipments shall be defined in the site
H2S Safety Plan.
Page 16 of 20
13. USING WARNING SIGNALS
• Safety information signs will be posted at the location and on all facilities/vessels serving
the location warning of the potential presence of H2S and precautions to be taken.
• Wind direction indicating equipment (such as flags or streamers) shall be installed in areas
that are visible at all times to individuals at the location or in the immediate vicinity.
When atmospheric concentrations of H2S reach 10 PPM, activate:
• audible alarms and display flags (if used) ;

• flashing lights
Note: Sites with an H2S risk shall have an alarm system that is understood by all personnel.
14. DETECTING H2S
• Always use detection equipment when working in an H2S restricted area ;
• Portable batter operated detectors with electronic sensors, visual display and audible
warning shall be used by personnel working in the area if fixed detection systems are not
installed ;
• Fixed detectors consist of sensor heads placed in suspect areas and attached to a
controller unit housed in a hard plastic or metal case. When the sensors detect H2S, they
signal the controller unit. The controller unit analyses the data and provides an exact
reading of the H2S concentration (in PPM) on a digital or needle type indicator. When a
predetermined level of H2S has been detected, relay devices activate warning alarms
and/or lights in the work area. These detectors can also be used to detect other gases,
such as carbon dioxide (CO2), carbon monoxide (CO), and methane (CH4).
• Personal gas monitors with alarms both visual and audible should be provided for
personnel entering and working in an H2S restricted area and it is used for monitoring
workplace, confined space…etc ;
• Although more costly than portable detectors, fixed detectors offer 24 hour protection,
quick response time (10-35 seconds), ability to monitor multiple sensors in the work site
(depending on the brand and model), and ability to monitor hazardous areas without
exposing personnel to the atmosphere.
15. DETECTING H2S ON NEARBY VESSELS AND FACILITIES
• If vessels are stationed overnight alongside facilities where H2S may be present, they will
be equipped with an H2S detection system that activates audible and visual alarms when
the concentration of H2S in the atmosphere reaches 10 PPM. This does not apply to
vessels positioned upwind and at a safe distance from the facility in accordance with the
H2S contingency plan.
• Facilities near H2S areas shall be equipped with portable or fixed H2S detectors that are
regularly tested and calibrated. Company will develop dispersion modeling to determine
where 10 PPM H2S concentration levels could exist at nearby facilities.
Page 17 of 20
16. DETECTING H2S DURING DRILLING AND WELL OPERATIONS
• The drilling or workover contractor shall be responsible to develop and produce an H2S
Safety Plan for the drilling/work over operation. This plan shall be reviewed by Company
HSE representative and approved prior to commencing operations.
17. DETECTING H2S DURING PRODUCTION OPERATIONS
• A detailed risk assessment shall be conducted in areas of production operations where

there is the possibility of release of H2S in concentrations exceeding 10 ppm. The risk
assessment shall be used to produce a site H2S Safety Plan.
18. CALIBRATING H2S DETECTORS
• H2S detection equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Calibration shall be done by a qualified person and calibration records
documented and maintained at the site. Calibration date and next due date shall be
displayed on each detector.
19. MONITORING SO2 WHILE BURNING GAS CONTAINING H2S
• When flaring gas/crude containing H2S monitoring for SO2 shall be conducted with
suitable monitoring equipment. This requirement shall be addressed in the site H2S Safety
Plan.
20. RESPONDING TO AN H2S LEAK
If there is an H2S leak, the following are general emergency actions to be taken. However, each site
shall develop emergency action plans specific to their situation as part of the H2S Safety Plan.
Step Action
1 Evacuate all personnel immediately to a safe briefing area (upwind or crosswind from
release). Assembly, Shallering and personnel accounting
Trained staff to give immediate medical attention to injured or exposed personnel.
2 Assess the situation. During the assessment, determine which equipment and valves will
need to be closed to stop the leak.
3 Contact the rescue team and Company HSE Department.
Close the appropriate valves or shut down the equipment to stop the leak, if possible. Only
Trained people equipped with Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) can remain in or
4 Enter the affected Area (ESCAPE SETS ARE ONLY FOR ESCAPE ONLY NEVER USE
ESCAPE SETS FOR WORK OR RESCUE )
5 If the assessment of the situation requires, initiate site/installation evacuation according to

the emergency procedures in the H2S Safety Plan.
Page 18 of 20
21. PERFORMING AN EMERGENCY RESCUE OPERATION
• Never attempt a rescue without proper respiratory protection in the form of an SCBA or an
approved supplied air hose unit. Rushing into the hazardous area without proper protection
will result in two victims instead of one and is the main reason why rescue efforts fail ;
• Never use escape sets for work or rescue, your Escape Mask is what it says it is – For
escape only – NO Rescue heroics;
• If you pass people continuing with their work during an alarm situation, wave at them, pull
them off their work; kick them, but DON’T STOP to explain – Just Keep escaping ;
• Emergency rescue operations shall be defined and detailed in the H2S safety plan for each
site, and shall be followed and rescue is performed only by trained people equipment with
SCBA.
22. GIVING FIRST AID
• Before administering first aid, determine whether the exposure has occurred through
inhalation, skin contact, or eye contact. The following are general first aid procedures to be
followed. The Company Medical Department responsible for each site shall review these and
modify them if needed, and include the first aid procedures in the site H2S Safety Plan.
Exposure Through Inhalation
H2S is detoxified rapidly and symptoms of poisoning may disappear when inhalation of the gas
ceases. Follow these steps to treat a victim who has inhaled the gas.
Step Action
1
Move the victim to a fresh air environment upwind or crosswind of the hazardous area.
2
Briefly apply the chest pressure arm lift method of artificial respiration to clear the victim’s
lungs. Do NOT inhale any toxic gas directly from the victim’s lungs.
3
If… Then…
The victim is not breathing Remove your respirator and begin mouth
to mouth artificial respiration. Continue
until relieved by an emergency medical
responder
The victim’s breathing is slow, impaired or Use a resuscitator to administer oxygen
labored.
4 Once the victim is breathing on his/her own, or with a resuscitator, remove all
contaminated clothing from the victim and keep him/her calm and warm
5 Transport the victim to a doctor or medical facility as soon as possible
Page 19 of 20
Exposure Through Eye Contact
H2S can cause painful eye irritation. Follow these steps to treat the irritation.
Step Action
1 Flush the eyes with fresh water for at least 15 minutes. Do not use a hose or other
pressurized device.
2 Apply cool compresses to the eyes.
3 Transport the victim to a doctor, preferably and eye specialist, as soon as possible.
Exposure Through Skin Contact

When combined with perspiration, H2S produces a mild solution of sulfuric acid that can irritate the
skin and may cause skin discoloration.
Treat this condition by washing the affected area with fresh water for at least 15 minutes.
Transport the victim to a doctor as soon as possible.


25. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
For Information:
Page 20 of 20
“Minimum Safety Standard on Permit to Work System”
Revision Sheet

2010
SGIAQ
Paragraph 14.2 Substituted “ 7 certificates” with “5 certificates”
Page 2 of 32
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE ..............................................................................................................................4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION .................................................................................................5
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES ...............................................................................................5
4. DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................................5
5. PTW OBJECTIVES ...........................................................................................................6
6. WORK PERMIT FORMS STRUCTURE ...........................................................................6
7. FUNCTIONS INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS...................................................................7
8. PTW APPLICATION PROCEDURE ...............................................................................11
9. PTW PROCESS ..............................................................................................................18
10. WORK COMPLETIONS ..................................................................................................20
11. TRAINING AND COMPETENCE ....................................................................................22
12. COMMUNICATIONS .......................................................................................................22
13. PTW AUDITING AND MONITORING .............................................................................22
14. PERMIT TO WORK CATEGORIES AND SUPPORTING CERTIFICATES

DESCRIPTION .........................................................................................................................23
15. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................................26
16. RECORDING RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................26
17. DISTRIBUTION ...............................................................................................................26
18. LIST OF ANNEXES.........................................................................................................26
Page 3 of 32
1. SCOPE
This document establishes the requirements and minimum safety standard for the definition and
implementation of the PTW system
• The purpose of the PTW system is to identify the risk in performing activities associated with operations,
maintenance, and construction activities, and to define methods for controlling risks so the work can be
performed in a safe manner and ensure safe operations within a restricted area.
• This is achieved by means of process which needs formal communication between the workforce
engaged in the work , concerned workers and performing supervisors and other staff who have
influence on how, where and when it is done to ensure a safe completion of the assigned task .
• The PTW system provides a formal method of evaluating a task, and how to control the risks created to
the workforce, facility and the environment.
• The PTW system shall be used in conjunction with all applicable legislative and regulatory requirements
and good oil and gas industry practice. It is only part of an overall HSE management system. It provides
a means to manage HSE aspects of one or more operations conducted at Company sites and
operations in a systematic, formalized, auditable manner.
• Requirements outlined in this document are in accordance to OGP Guidelines on PTW System [Ref.
B1].
• The guidelines and the requirements discussed in this document are the ENI (e&p) division minimum
Standard; any required specific work procedures or guidance should be elaborated by the individual
Company for its own particular operations and activities and elaborating their own specific PTW
procedures including developing and introducing the required PTW Forms and any required supporting
certificates as outlined in this document.
• Any specific requirements not discussed in this document shall be addressed with site specific rules and
ensure compliance with the applicable regulations and legal requirements applicable in the host country.
• This document outlines the Minimum Standard on PTW System and it is a core document that
establishes not only a foundation for basic safe work, but also associates together the Job Safety
Analysis and Safe Work Systems with other Specialized work and Safety procedures to protect
employees and Company Installations (such as Work Procedure) that could be necessary for controlling
hazardous job activities.
• This document applies to exploration projects, onshore, offshore and operations at Company plant,
wellhead platforms, sea lines, export pipeline and umbilical.
• A PTW should be used in any work that involves work on energy systems, hot work, naked flame,
confined space entry or excavation, radiography...Etc (See Appendix 1: Permit to Work Categories and
Supporting certificates Description.)
• A PTW is required and used for any hazardous cold work (e.g. Hydro testing or pneumatic testing, ) or
working in a hazardous area (e.g. live plant), when handling hazardous substances (chemicals,
radioactive sources, etc.), drilling or well service in a well pad, heavy or complicated and critical lifts (
e.g. Tandem Lifts ), erection and dismantling of scaffolds.
• When an external contractor is performing work on Company sites, generally speaking when in the
judgment of those responsible for monitoring the safe completion of an activity that the risks or hazards
involved require the use of the PTW.
Page 4 of 32
• The PTW rules are a generic set of administrative and verification rules to ensure proper implementation
and improvement, whichever PTW system is used, the types of Permit (construction, commissioning,
operations etc. ), should follow the same criteria albeit often presented in different layouts.
Company needs to ensure the full implementation of the PTW system in all transition phases and interfaces
with different operations (hand-over to production, construction & commissioning and so on).
Important Notes:
1. In case of different groups or functions are involved, such as during SIMOPs and CONOPs, the PTW
system shall be used.
2. Contractor PTW System shall be reviewed and approved by the Company.
This document is applied to all the site activities, carried out by Company or Contractors’ workers in all eni
e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies and in DIME and DICS units.
4. DEFINITIONS
• Company: An organization part of or connected to Eni e&p division such as: Geographic Unit, Affiliate,
Subsidiary or Joint Venture under Eni Divisions/ Companies have an operational control
supports to production or drilling activities
• Competent Person: Person appointed by Company from various trades assigned the responsibilities to
aid in the facilitation of the PTW procedure (i.e. Authorized Electrical person, Authorized Gas Tester).
• Intrinsically safe electrical equipment: Intrinsically safe piece of equipment is an electrical device that is
incapable of causing an ignition of the prescribed flammable gas, vapor, or dust, regardless of any spark or
thermal effect that may occur in normal use, or under any conditions of fault likely to occur in practice
• Issuing Authority: Assigned Section Manager, subsequently approved by the Company senior
Management as an Issuing Authority and responsible for the planning and safe execution of non-routine or
potentially hazardous activities on, or associated with the Dolphin Onshore Facilities Project., by issuing
PTW forms and certificates to the subcontractor Performing Authorities
• Job Safety Analysis (JSA): is a method that is used to identify, analyze and record 1) the steps involved
in performing a specific job, 2) the existing or potential safety and health hazards associated with each
step, and 3) the recommended action(s)/procedure(s) that will eliminate or reduce these hazards and the
risk of a workplace injury or illness.
• Performing Authority: Approved Supervisors and Contractor Supervisors in charge and responsible for
the execution of non-routine or potentially hazardous activities to be carried out on, or associated with the
Company Facilities Project under the control of a PTW
• Restricted Area: A restricted area means a plant or associated areas that by nature of the processing,
control systems, hazardous substances, pipeline systems etc. present, cab be entered only by authorised
personnel, in order to perform a particular and specified activity
• Risk: Combination of the likelihood (or probability, or frequency) and consequence(s) of a specified
hazardous event occurring (OHSAS 18001:1999).
• Risk Assessment:
1. Overall process of risk analysis and risk evaluation (ISO 17776:2000);
2. The whole process of risk analysis and the evaluation of the results of the risk analysis against
Page 5 of 32
technological and/or economic, social and political criteria (OGP report 11.1/98, 1984 ‘Applications and
limitations of risk assessment in offshore exploration and production’).
• Sanction to test: Testing or running of equipment prior to completion and return to normal operations.
5. PTW OBJECTIVES
• Provide ENI e&p division companies with guidelines so they are able to elaborate and implement their
specific PTW System and Procedures.
• Control potential hazards and risks associated with non-routine, high risk and critical activities.
• Ensure control of all permitted work from one point.
• Identify the required personnel to monitor and perform the work.
• Define training requirements for Company and contractor personnel performing the work.
• Ensure adequate planning, effective communication and right authorization of the work prior, during and
after the completion of the task together with adequate site reinstatement.
6. WORK PERMIT FORMS STRUCTURE
• As outlined in the OGP Guidelines on PTW system, the core of the P.T.W system is the form itself. Many
different types of forms could be used by installation owners. Some companies use a simple form to
cover all activities. However Company should consider that when a large number of active permits are in
force, then administration of the permit system and control of work may be enhanced by using color
combinations, to distinguish between the permits issued for the work of differing type and degree of
potential hazard (See attached Confined Space PTW Form and Excavation PTW Form for guidance).
Notes:
1. It is recommended that the method of differentiation selected should be consistent within a Company
and/or geographic areas. Every effort should be made to keep the PTW forms simple and user friendly.
2. Universal pictograms and multi-Language formats should be used where appropriate; a model of PTW
process flow chart for guidance only is provided in Annex 1- Sample of PTW process Flow Chart. This
form is for guidance only; it is generic flow chart as it is stand-alone document, it is provided to the users
of this document as a basic reference.
Work Permit Details
A. Sequential Numbering
• Permits are to be serially numbered to ensure that permits can be uniquely identified.
• An example of the numbering system might be using eight digit number, i.e. 2009-0001 for the first
permit issued in 2009. Some systems will include an identifier in the number that refers to a specific
area within that site. (e.g. 1995.0001. CPF –Train1) or permit numbering may be given the next
sequential number (in free text) from the Permit Register. …etc.
Note: Company shall ensure that Whichever PTW system is used, the types of Permit etc, PTW are
serially numbered to allow easy identification and monitoring.
B. Work Permit Form Section Details
Each permit will have the option to highlight but not limited to, the following areas:
• Work area ;
• Validity of permit ;
• Cross referencing to other permits;
• Safety checks, limitations and instructions;
• Gas tests / Oxygen level if applicable;
Page 6 of 32
In considering the content of the form the following list is typical of the information required:
• Indication of the Validity of permit ;

• Description of task to be done;
• Description of exact location /plant numbers etc;
• Details of work party and tools to be used;
• Details of potential hazards;
• Details of precautions taken;
• Details of protective equipment to be used or worn;
• Other persons to be notified and approve;
• Time of issue and period of validity;
• Signature of person in charge of the work;
• Signature of person issuing the permit;
• Signature for handover of responsibilities between shifts;
• Declaration by person in charge of work that work is complete or incomplete and sit has been left in a
safe condition ;
• Signature of person issuing the permit which confirms that site has been checked and that equipment
may be reinstated or left safely isolated and that the permit is cancelled.
The following “figures” are not referred to organizational roles, but indicate only operational involvements in the
activity management.
The following is an overview of the various roles and responsibilities of those involved in the PTW system,
Individual Company should further define all the specific duties and responsibilities in its PTW procedure and
ensure this in accordance to the specific activities and operations performed within Company sites under its
operational control.
Company Senior Management
Will ensure the following:
• An appropriate PTW system is introduced and properly used and implemented;

• Training programs and competence requirements are established and maintained;
• Monitoring, auditing and reviewing of the PTW system is performed and maintained;
• PTW Bridging documents for various operational phases ( construction , commissioning, SIMOPS,
Operation ) should be prepared will the need arise and when a contractor PTW System is used during
the EPC Phase of a development projects , Contractor PTW System when used shall be reviewed and
approved by the Company ;
• Permit to Work Procedures for EPC Phase (construction, commissioning, SIMOPS) shall be prepared by
EPC Contractor and submitted to Company for approval before the work commencement;
• The Installation or project development Management Representatives are custodians of the PTW
procedure and they have overall responsibility for ensuring that all parties concerned in the Permit to
Work System fulfil their roles and responsibilities and that the system is correctly administered.
Individual
The individuals working within the PTW system shall make the work site safe and ensure but not limited to,
the Following:
• Have a general understanding of the PTW system ;
• Have a working knowledge of their own job;
• Do not start any job requiring a permit until it has been properly authorized and issued;
Page 7 of 32
• Understand conditions and precautions set out in the permit and they receive a briefing from the
performing Authority ;
• All safety measures are strictly followed and if any doubt or condition changes, they should STOP
the work and consult with their supervisor ;
• The individual worker is also responsible for wearing the proper PPE.
Issuing Authority
• It is essential that an appropriate person should coordinate and control the issue and return of
permits. The person needs to be in a position to have an overview of all operations planned and/or
underway in order to avoid risks caused by simultaneous activities.
• Issuing Authorities shall attend an approved Permit to Work training courses, and will be formally
assessed and confirmed competent before being formally appointed to undertake the
responsibilities defined in this standard.
Issuing Authority shall ensure that:
• The applicable PTW (e.g. Confined Space, Hot Work, Excavation, etc.), required for the
performance of non-routine, high risk and hazardous construction activities, has been checked and
approved by all parties before issued for the commencement of such work ;
• The Issuing Authority is responsible for ensuring that the work is carried out in accordance with the
Permit requirements;
• All hazards associated with the work have been identified ;
• All steps have been identified to ensure safety;
• A sufficient time is spent on shift handover to discuss all ongoing or suspended permits with
oncoming permit issuer;
• Work site has been inspected;
• Person in charge of work (performing authority) is aware of precautions taken, additional ones
required, equipment used, and procedures to follow;
• The permit specifies the action to be taken if the work has to be suspended;
• Copies of all issued permits are displayed in a permanently manned area (usually the Control
Room);
• The work site is examined when work is suspended or completed;
• He or she shall be familiar with the proper PPE needed and how it should be worn;
• Once the work site has been examined the Issuing Authority shall make sure that all precautions
specified and taken before work commenced and remain effective while the permit in force;
• Before the permit is cancelled any precautions and isolations still to be withdrawn are in fact
withdrawn and the systems are returned to normal conditions.
Performing Authority
Performing Authority is the individual responsible for carrying out the work activity. He is in charge of the
work at the Job Site. Prior to the commencement of the work, the Performing Authority shall:
Page 8 of 32
• Ensure that an applicable PTW (e.g. Confined Space, Hot Work, Excavation, etc.) has been checked
and approved by the relevant authorizing party;
• Ensure that the Issuing Supervisor is informed when work is suspended or completed;
• Ensure that the conditions and precautions in the permit(s) shall be fully understood and followed at all
times and PPE is issued and used properly,
• Ensure that after the completion and suspension of the permit shall be formally handed back and signed
off by the proper Issuing Supervisor;
• Ensure that all potential hazards and risks associated with a specific activity have been identified,
mitigated against, and effectively communicated to the workforce involved;
• Ensure that he/she personally inspects the job site along with the Issuing Authority and a PTW copy is
posted on the Job site ;
• Ensure that the worksite is returned in a clean and safe condition to the Issuing Authority at completion
of the work or workday;
• The Performing authority shall hold HSE tool box talks prior to the work commencing and ensure that all
members of the work party have a clear understanding of the scope of the work, the risks in carrying out
the work and the precautions implemented to reduce the risk;
• Ensure that the work environment is monitored on continues basis and ensure no deviation from the
approved work scope covered by the permit;
• Ensure that all people involved in the WORK performed under the issued PTW are competent and
properly trained, the training should insure that the personnel understand the PTW system and
procedures in general, and the specific precautions required for their work.
Important Notes:
1- The Performing Authority of one discipline shall not act as Performing Authority for another discipline.
2- The same person shall not have the role of both Issuing Authority and Performing Authority for the
same PTW.
Company - HSE Department
The HSE Department is the custodian of the Permit to Work System and for the PTW procedures elaborated
by the Company as well; it is responsible for the review, maintenance, assignment and communication of
responsibilities.
The HSE Management Representative assisted by his/her team members will oversee the development,
implementation, update and maintenance of the PTW System & procedure. They are actively involved in
monitoring and ensuring effective implementation of the PTW system and procedures.
Key responsibilities of the HSE Management Representative include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Ensure adequate PTW procedure, PTW forms are elaborated and implemented;
• Review this PTW Procedure through regular audit and inspection, and make recommendations to
update or amend the procedure to ensure that it remains current and effective;
• Ensure that a PTW is issued for all non-routine, high risk and hazardous activities before work is allowed
to commence and participate in the safe work preparation process and perform joint site inspections;
Page 9 of 32
• Check that key persons involved in the PTW System are competent and aware of their responsibilities.
Provide special technical training and perform special technical support such as Confined Space Entry
gas testing….etc ;
• Provide and conduct training to familiarize Company employees with the PTW System & Procedure.
Authorized Gas Tester
• Authorized Gas Testers are authorized to perform gas test for the presence of flammable vapors, toxic
gases and oxygen as instructed by the issuing Authority before and during work performed under a
PTW.
• An AGT is appointed in writing by the HSE Management Representatives after successfully completing
the approved gas tester course and certified accordingly. Also, the AGT shall be a certified user of the
PTW system, and has the appropriate certificate corresponding with his PTW duties.
• The HSE Department should maintain and update a list of all Authorised Gas Testers, copies of the list
should be kept in the main Permit Control Facility (i.e., Plant Control Room) and HSE Department.
The Authorized Gas Tester shall:
• Take and record measurements before the work starts.

• Monitor and record measurements during the work carried out under a permit.
Authorized Firewatcher
• The Authorized Firewatcher is authorized to help the performers in prevention of the occurrence of any
uncontrolled fire when performing hot work, based on the instruction of the issuing Authority and under
the supervision of the Performing Authority.
• Personnel designated as Fire Watchers shall be properly trained in the use of gas monitors for detection
of flammable/toxic gases, and the use of portable fire extinguishers, He shall know how to raise an
alarm, and what to do in the event of an alarm sounding, and shall check and monitor work areas, and
the precautionary measures taken in those areas, when specified by the Issuing Authority on the PTW.
Fire Watchers shall undertake initial fire fighting activities as required.
• When the fire and gas detection system is inhibited, all special requirements in relation to fire watch
duties should be specified on the permit.
Confined Space Attendant
Details on duties of confined space attendant are provided in the MSS -1 [Ref. B4]; the Confined Space
Attendant shall be properly trained so he or she can perform the job responsibly. At all times during a
confined space entry operation, he or she shall remain outside the confined space, in a safe atmosphere,
and perform the assigned duties under this procedure.
Authorized Electrical Persons
• Company should ensure that authorized Electrical Persons are appointed by the Electrical Technical
Authority, in writing;
• These personnel are authorized to carry out electrical work according to the level of authorization (level
of voltage or equipment type); this includes the responsibility for defining and carrying out electrical
isolations in co-ordination with the Area Authority;
• The Roles and Responsibilities shall be better defined and explained in the PTW procedure to be
prepared by the Company for the special needs of its sites and operations.
Authorized PTW Personnel
Page 10 of 32
An up to date list of Authorised PTW Signatories shall be maintained by the Senior Management (Appropriate
level and location should to be defined by local Company) and copies of the list is normally kept in the main
Permit central Control Facility and with HSE Department.
PTW Controller
Depending on the size and complexity of the site/activities and number of permits used, Company shall ensure
that a PTW controller (s) is or are appointed when required and their roles and responsibilities are defined in
the PTW procedure prepared for the special need of the local site.
Examples of the roles and responsibilities of PTW Controller are but not limited to, the following:
• Immediately inform the Issuing Authority of any situation presenting and impact on the safe completion
of an activity or on the associated precautions;
• Should check and review all PTW associated documents supplied for completeness by Performing
Authority applies for a PTW i.e.: Work Procedure and Task Risk Assessment approved by Company ,
As built drawings / other documents , Implement the Certificate requirements (Gas testing, Isolation
requirements . excavation certificate etc.) in order to complete the requirements of a PTW before issue .
• Maintain up to date written or computer-based registers of permits and supplementary certificates,

together with cross-references, unless local rules assign this responsibility to someone else.
• Ensure a display board of all Permits and Certificates is maintained and used, together with a separate
display board for Isolation Certificates under which a Sanctioned Test is being performed and for long-
term Isolation Confirmation Certificates.
• Collate all copies of each PTW at the end of the shift / day for revalidation or cancellation as is required
(inform the right persons and HSE Representative if a PTW has not been returned at the end of shift /
day) .
• Ensure and securely store all the completed and cancelled PTW’s following cancellation for the agreed
period of 2 years at site and 5 years at Head Office.
8. PTW APPLICATION PROCEDURE

8.1. Work Preparation
Preparation of Work Site / Equipment:
The aim of preparing the work site is to prevent any danger of fire, explosion, exposure to toxic gasses or
other hazards; moreover work site preparation allows a proper identification of safety requirements to allow
the work to proceed safely.
The precautionary measures to be taken may be various and complex and shall be indicated in the relevant
section of the permit. Examples are:
• Depressurizing and draining;

• Disconnection - removal of valves, spool pieces;
• Isolation - use spades/pancakes, solid blank flanges;
• Electrical isolation of power sources;
• Removal and management of all combustible materials;
• Provision of additional fire fighting equipment;
• Provision and erection of fire resistant tarps/blankets to limit spread of sparks from
welding/burning/grinding;
• Safe siting equipment e.g. welding equipment, diesel driven air compressors, etc;
• Effect on any adjacent work;
• Gas testing, requirement for constant monitoring.
Page 11 of 32
Important Note: Roles and Responsibilities of issuing, performing authorities and HSE Representative with
regards to Worksite preparation including PTW Process shall be further defined and explained in the PTW
procedure to be prepared by the company for the special needs in its sites.
8.2. Co-ordination
• It is important to ensure that work activities, requiring permits, are planned and coordinated in order to
avoid risks caused by simultaneous activities. This coordination is best achieved by having one person,
usually the SIMOPS Coordinator or Hookup up Manager, control the issue and return of all permits to
work. On some installations or project it may be necessary to delegate this responsibility to more than
one person.
• The delegated responsible persons would be responsible for the single point coordination of work
activities within their own well defined areas and for informing others where the work may infringe on
another area.
• A person should be appointed by the Company and should retain overall responsibility for coordinating
activities between the different delegated areas.
8.2.1. Special Requirements for SIMOPS
• All activities performed inside the SIMOPS Restricted Area should follow the Company Permit to Work
system and procedures used by Company.
• Company shall prepare and define methods and plans of controlling and coordinating SIMOPS work to
allow Company and contractor personnel to carry out their duties in a safe manner, also they will outline
the rules and guidelines for performing construction, pre-commissioning and commissioning works on,
or in the vicinity of, any part of the Company facilities simultaneously with production operations , these
plans and methods are proposed to ensure that all activities construction, pre-commissioning and
commissioning activities, which are conducted simultaneously on, or in the vicinity of plant production
facilities are properly assessed and executed in a safe manner.
• All personnel involved with work in SIMOPS restricted areas should be familiar with the Company PTW
system.
In addition to the requirements of the PTW system the following shall be followed:
• The number of Hot Work Permits and Naked Flames shall be limited in order not to jeopardize the safety
of the installation
• Hot Work (work effected in hazardous areas) and Heavy Lift Permits, at least, require a risk assessment.
Note: The Company Permit to Work procedure shall detail all PTW requirements of SIMOPS and shall be
strictly implemented and followed.
8.2.2. Motorized Equipment/Vehicle Entry to Company Locations
• Gas, diesel or petrol powered motorized equipment such as cranes, forklifts, welding sets, cement
mixers, compressors, soil excavators, generating sets, and similar equipment requiring entering and be
used on a Company location will need to comply with safety rules implemented and used in the
particular location;
• Company shall ensure that adequate engineering controls and administrative controls and the protective
control for vehicle entry are implemented in their site locations (operating plants, well head, SIMOPS
restricted Areas etc);
• This can be provided by proper implementation of PTW system and associated certificate used to
control vehicles & motorized equipments entry into these areas ;
Page 12 of 32
• Control of Motorized Equipments and vehicles entry into these areas is subject to issuing PTW after a
request is made to the Issuing Authority at the proper PTW issuing office (i.e. local Main Control Room
or PTW office), the request shall be made by the discipline or party planning to access the location. This
shall be performed before the Motorized Equipment/vehicle entry into the requested location;
• The Issuing Authority and the concerned or equipment operator or vehicle driver shall complete and sign
the Motorized Equipment Vehicle/ Entry Certificate in order to control the access into the area and
identify the equipment accessing the area with a full details of the scope of the of the access;
• As explained in the above paragraph, an Entry Certificate shall be used to support the work permit
(HWP, NFP or CWP) providing all the details of the scope of work and defining all the precautionary
measures;
• The permit and certificate numbers shall be used together and provide cross referencing on each
document;
• Any vehicle entry within 10 metres of a hazardous area requires a Hot Work Permit;
• An Authorised Gas Tester shall perform a gas test which is obligatory for any motorized equipment and
vehicle requiring access into Company location;
• Issuing Authority shall specify frequency of periodic gas test and this shall be indicated in the PTW and
its supplementary vehicle entry certificate, particularly when process conditions may change or in case
where the motorized equipment or vehicle position has hanged within the area;
• Precautions shall be taken to ensure that all the equipments and vehicles accessing or used with
Company locations are in good working conditions and have a valid inspection certificate, in addition
ensure they are modified wherever required to be allowed for entry and operation within classified
hazardous areas;
• Where mobile equipments or vehicles are manoeuvring in congested areas or within restricted areas, a
trained banks man shall be provided all the time, requirements for use of banks man shall be indicated
in the PTW and its associated certificate.
• Particular attention shall be given to position and location of vehicles and mobiles equipments including
their associated equipments so they do not block he emergency exits or pose additional hazards.
• Proper instructions shall be provided to the equipment operators and vehicles drivers on safety
requirements used and implemented in the area to be entered such us training on SIMOPS
requirements , PPE , Hot work requirements , emergency response plans prepared for the area .
• All the Contractor operators and vehicles drivers shall be properly trained and familiar with the location
safety rules and energy response requirements (such us switching off their mobile equipments, vehicles
in case of Gas alarm or any other type of emergency).
• The works site shall be left clear and in safe condition, issuing Authority with the performing supervisor
shall ensure this compliance.
8.3. Work Planning
Careful planning of work should take place to ensure:
• Appropriate approval for the work and a sufficient time to identify potential hazards, implement
precautions and worksite preparation.
• All persons in charge of areas which may be affected are made aware and hence take
precautions against possible interaction with other work activity .
8.3.1. Work Permits regular meetings
Page 13 of 32
• It is expected that each Individual Company will prepare and define further PTW procedure addressing
PTW planning meeting requirements in accordance with their specific needs and requirements.
• These meetings will be for the approval of the work and review of the work to be done during the
following shift including maintenance activities and all the PTW’s associated with this activity and identify
any conflicting activities.
• During the meetings work to be performed is discussed, i.e. when the work will be carried out, and what
method to be used, impacts on other activities, special precaution to be taken, necessary Area
Authorities to be involved and informed.
• During the meetings, all required documents and procedures will be made available (Task Risk
assessment, work procedure, PTW, associated certificates).
8.4. Hazard Assessment
This is critical element of the P.T.W. in the preparation stage; the assessment should be carried out by the
Issuing Authority, in conjunction with the Performing Authority and any other persons whose specialist
knowledge may be needed.
The following principles apply to assessments:
• Precise details of the work to be undertaken should be obtained from the Task Supervisor.
Consideration should be given to any safer alternatives, either in terms of the timing, or the intended
method of performance of the work.
• The “process” hazards should be considered. This will include a consideration of hazards associated
with the material being handled, and of process equipment.
• The practical difficulties of carrying out the work should be assessed, if necessary consulting the
discipline specialists undertaking the work.
• The possible impact of the work on the surrounding environment should be assessed.
• Potential hazards to the safe execution of the work arising from the surrounding environment should be
similarly considered.
• From the assessment of the hazards involved, the precautions which will have to be taken to enable the
work to be carried out safely may be deduced.
8.5. Precautions
• The safe condition of the work is subject to the detailed precautions specified in the Permit and
associated certificates.
• It is the responsibility of the permit issuer and other responsible persons involved in raising the permit
who should indicate on the permit those precautions which will be necessary to allow the work to start.
This may take the form of a statement, or may be by means of a checklist.
• The person in charge of the work should ensure that all the precautions are put into operation and
properly implemented.
8.6. Work Categorization
As outlined in the OGP guidelines, the types of work for which PTW Systems are normally required include
maintenance and repair, inspection, testing, construction, dismantling, modification and cleaning. The type of
jobs requiring the control of a P.T.W system may include:
• All non routine job and critical activities which requires specific safety measures.
Page 14 of 32
• Hot work of any type where heat is used and generated, for example by welding flame cutting, grinding,
grit/sandblasting etc
• Work which may generate ignition sparks or other sources of ignition. Work which may cause an
unintended or uncontrolled hydrocarbon release, including any disconnection or opening of any closed
pipeline, vessel or equipment containing, or which has contained, flammable or toxic materials
• Work at any place on an offshore installation from which any person could fall into the sea.
• Work involving the use of dangerous substances, including radioactive materials and explosives.
• Excavations, diving activities, Pressure testing, dropped objects, Electrical work, Confined Space.
• Maintenance operations which compromise critical safety systems or which remove them from service
e.g. fire and gas detection systems, public address systems, life saving equipment and fire fighting
equipment. (Note): This is not an exhaustive list. It is important that each Company’s PTW procedures
include their own list of jobs that require the use of the PTW system.
8.7. Energy Isolation
• Isolation Requirements outlined in this section are in accordance with OGP guidelines on PTW
System, See MSS 2[Ref. B5].
• An essential ingredient of any safe system of work is the method and integrity of the isolation procedure.
• The isolation principle to be adopted, prior to carrying out maintenance or repair will be determined by a
number of factors eg potential for pressure, dangerous substances, lack of oxygen, moving machinery
etc It is beyond the scope of this document to provide guidance on the isolation required for each
Potential hazard.
• Each Company should develop its own isolation procedures and philosophies to be adopted depending
on work activity and risk involved.
The following additional points should be considered within the isolation procedures:
• Complex isolations should be planned and recorded on a working drawing. This should be discussed
between the person issuing the permit and the person in charge of the work to ensure all isolation points
are clearly understood and agreed. The marked up drawing should be readily available to all concerned.
Consideration should be given to attaching a copy to the permit.
• It is essential that the isolation standard is commensurate with the type of work being carried out, plant
operating conditions and other local influences.
• Isolation procedures should include all energy sources, i.e. mechanical, electrical, hydraulic pressure Etc.
• The tag or key number should be recorded on the permit form or on a separate form which should in turn
be cross referenced and attached to the PTW form.
• Isolation should only be applied and removed on instruction from the person issuing the permit.
• If more than one task is to be carried out on part of a plant or piece of equipment, there is a risk that on
completion of one of the tasks the isolations are removed and the equipment is put back into service.
Controls should be in place to prevent premature de-isolation where dual tasks are involved.
• If the work is not able to be completed within the shift ,the site should be checked by both the person in
charge of the work and the permit issuer to ensure it is left in a safe condition and equipment cannot
be reinstated until all work is properly completed
• If the permit is suspended, the status of the work site should be left on display in a suitable location e.g.
Page 15 of 32
Control Room and the isolation padlock keys kept in a secure place to ensure no unauthorized access.
All persons authorized to carry out isolations should be assessed for their competence prior to
appointment i.e. they should:
• Be able to demonstrate their knowledge by examination.

• Be suitably qualified.
• Have experience on the plant/equipment.
• Have received specific instructions on the plant, methods of isolation etc.
• Their areas of responsibility should be made quite clear.
8.7.1. Mechanical / Process & Electrical Isolation Certificates
Company shall ensure that a Comprehensive Mechanical / Process Isolation Certificate, and Electrical
Isolation certificate are prepared and used as required for all work requiring physical isolation / disconnection /
double block and bleed etc. and the associated lock-out / tag-out of such equipment.
The Mechanical / Process and Electrical Isolation Certificates support the PTW by providing the means
of:
• Provide a means of recording the isolations which are required before the task indicated in the
associated PTW can be started.
• Provide an assurance and confirming that all necessary isolations have been made so that the task can
be performed (requiring an authorization of other PTW’s, e.g. Confined Space Entry PTW).
• Provide a formal authorization and recording approval to isolate, lock-out/tag-out and double block-
bleed, spading etc. of the requested equipment.
• Provide a means of requesting authorization to remove isolation, lock-out/tag-out, double block out, and
spading etc. devices on completion of the task detailed in the associated PTW.
Important Notes:
1. The completed Isolation Certificates shall be issued before the relevant Permit to Work can be
authorized.
2. Roles and Responsibilities of the Isolation Authorities shall be better defined and explained in the PTW
procedure and in the specific Isolation methods & procedures –certificates to be prepared by Company
for the special needs of their site.
8.7.2. Sanction to test
• Some activities need the testing or running, positioning of equipment prior to completion and return to
normal operations. Where this is required a sanction to test is requested and its requirements specified
on the permit and/ or in the risk assessment, all de-isolation and re-isolation are documented on the
applicable Energy Isolation certificates.
• Where testing requires additional precautions to those specified on the original permit, a new permit
shall be raised to carry out the test.
8.7.3. Gas Testing
This is detailed in the MSS 1-Minimum safety standard on Confined Space Entry. P.T.W preparation may
involve a consideration of the likely presence of flammable or toxic gases, or oxygen
deficiency/enrichment, at the worksite.Where required testing shall be carried out by a competent person. A
competent person can be defined as being:
Page 16 of 32
• Able to assess the risks and hazards.

• Able to take the necessary precautions for gas testing.
• Fully familiar with and in the use of the measuring equipment.
Tests should be made for:
• Combustible gasses.
• Toxic vapors and gasses ((e.g. H2S).
• Oxygen deficiency or enrichment.
Test should be carried out:
• Just prior to entry no more than 30 minutes prior to work starting.

• Continuously as required.
• When it is suspected that conditions have changed either inside or outside the confined space.
• Before a permit extension is granted.
Initial gas testing of the internal atmosphere shall be carried out from the outside of the confined space. If the
gas tester is required to enter the confined space to make further tests, breathing apparatus, harness and
safety line shall be worn. Further a safety attendant shall be present.
The types of measurements to be taken and when they should be taken should be spelled out in the on site
permit. Results of any gas testing should be recorded and timed, and entered on the Gas Test Certificate and
will be attached in the PTW , If levels change during the work, the permit should be suspended.
8.8. Signatures
• Before any work subject to a permit is allowed to commence, certain signatures will be required.
• The number and designation of the signatories will be determined by the type of permit and the nature of
the work to be undertaken.
• This should be specified within the PTW procedure prepared by Companies for the special needs of their
site.
• As a minimum, the permit issuer and the Performing Authority should sign the permit. Other personnel
involved in the permit preparation, e.g. gas tester, should also sign the permit.
• Personnel, who need to be aware of the permit, or of aspects of the particular task, may also be required to
sign.
• Where a transfer of responsibilities takes place eg a new Supervisor assumes responsibility for the permit
or for the work, provision should be made for this person to sign the valid permit.
• No one should authorize/issue a work permit for work they will carry out themselves.
8.9. Cross reference
The objective of a cross reference is to ensure that no interaction takes place between work activities
which might endanger the safety of personnel or the installation. The permit issuer should, by knowledge of
work going on in his area of responsibility, be aware of potential interaction when issuing different permits for
the same piece of equipment or system, or where there may be potential conflict with adjacent work activities.
• It is essential to make sure that one activity under a PTW does not create danger and impact another
activity. The Issuing Authority should be aware of potential interaction and identify conflicting activities,
and should cross-check when a permit is prepared whether it impinges on one already issued.
Page 17 of 32
• Each permit should record the existence of the other permits and its ramifications. The cross-reference
shall include the actual work being done and the relevant permit number(s).
8.10. PTW Validity and Revalidation
• The permit will specify the time in which it is valid. Its validity will be for not more than the normal working
shift. If the work is not completed within the time specified, the permit may be extended as long as it does
not over run the initial shift time. If an emergency alarm sounds, all work permits are suspended, work
will cease, and the work site left in a safe condition, so far as is reasonably practicable and time allows.
• Prior to re-commencing work after such an alarm status the performing authority should ensure
revalidation of the permit by the issuing authority.
• The PTW validity shall be completed by the performing authority and Issuing Authority, considering the
particular circumstances and the likelihood of any change that may affect the period of validity (e.g.,
removal of long term isolation).
• To ensure and maintain an effective control is changing circumstances there should be a limit on the life of
a permit. Depending on the task, the overall life of a permit could be up to 7 days, although it will be
required to revalidate PTW on daily basis before start of day/shift).
Important Note:
Some permits could be valid only for one shift of 12h (e.g., Naked Flame or Hot work Permit) in any case the
PTW validity and revalidation shall be further defined and explained in the PTW procedure to be prepared by
the Companies for the special needs of their sites.
9. PTW PROCESS
9.1. PTW Display
As outlined in the OGP Guidelines on PTW System, permits shall be displayed so the persons, who need to be
aware of them, or to refer to them, are able to do so.
Copies should normally be distributed /displayed as follows:
• At the worksite. Where this is not practicable ( e.g. at an exposed location), the person in charge of the
job should retain the copy on his person, having ensured that the work party members are familiar with
its content .
• At the main control/co-ordination room, where they should be displayed in a systematic arrangement
• Where the permit issuer is remote from the main control/co-ordination centre, he should have a copy of
the permit.
9.2. Permit Display Board and Register
• At all sites, the controlling point for the issue of permits is the control room or base de vie. There shall
always be close co-operation and frequent communication between the Area Authority(s), Performing
Authority and control room personnel.
• To ensure that the status of work permits is readily available a Permit Register and Permit Display Board
are maintained by the Area Authority (in control room for production), or on site for Construction Field.
• The Permit Display Board authorizes two sections to display permits (active and suspended).
• Note: Depending on the size and complexity of the site/location where the work is performed, Company
shall prepare a local written PTW procedure which will specify the distribution and retention and display
of the permit copies.
Page 18 of 32
9.3. Work Suspension and Cancellation of PTW
Work being carried out under a P.T.W. system may have to be stopped before the work is completed. Typical
circumstances where this may arise are:
• In the event of an emergency.

• For operational reasons to prevent interaction with another activity.
• Work carried out during single shift only.
• Waiting for materials or services.
In certain circumstances it may be appropriate to cancel the permit and to implement a secure long term isolation
procedure.On completion or suspension of work, or if all the revalidation boxes in the PTW from are complete,
the Performing Authority returns the permit to the Permit Control Facility or PTW controller office or as defined in
the Company PTW procedure, all copies of PTW shall be collated and the relevant Section shall be signed
with date and time by the performing Authority who indicates if the work is completed or cancelled and if it will be
continued on new permit.
• Both Issuing Authority and the Performing Authority and any authorized person involved in the PTW
system shall confirm that the site is left in a clean and safe condition.
• Ensure that the work site is examined when the work is suspended, before it is restarted, and finally
when the work is completed to ensure that it is left in a safe condition.
• Ensure that before the permit is cancelled any precautions and isolations still to be withdrawn are in fact
withdrawn and the systems are returned to normal.
• A qualified person shall also acknowledge that the equipment worked on is fully operational before the
permit is finally cancelled.
• The person in charge of the operation or his deputy shall be notified of the suspension or completion of
the work or any other relevant safety factors.
9.4. Shift handover
Requirements outlined in this section are in accordance with OGP guidelines on PTW Systems.
• Shift changeovers can be one of the most vulnerable times for the P.T.W. system. The failure to pass on
information or the correct information has been shown to be the cause of many accidents.
• Installation owners should take into account, when developing P.T.W. systems, the importance of
planning the shift change such that there is sufficient overlap to allow proper review and discussion of
the status of all permits to work.
Written means of communicating information can be by:
• Permit Log Book.

• Permit Files.
• Display Boards.
• Computer Screen/Print Out or a combination of any of the above.
Whichever arrangements are adopted, the shift handover arrangement should be monitored regularly to
ensure its continued effectiveness.
The Permit Register provides a record of permit status on a continuing basis and supports the formal
handover of permits that is carried out during shift and crew changes.
Page 19 of 32
9.5. Action in an emergency
The P.T.W. system should make provision for actions in an emergency. Normally this will consist of an
instruction that all work should cease in the event of an emergency (except for announced testing activities),
it is likely that time will not allow formal suspension of permits by way of their return to a central control /co-
ordination point.
Post-emergency actions should however include a re-assessment of work subject to permits to ensure that
conditions have not altered as a result of the emergency, and that the permit remains valid.
The following situation should be considered and addressed in the P.T.W. system:
• In emergency situation where a normal condition would require a PTW, and where immediate action
shall be taken considering that the situation is either imminently life threatening or poses disastrous
potential.
• In such particular cases the Senior Manager or plant operation Manager, in consultation with
another senior person present at the time of the emergency, can waive the requirement for a permit.
• It should be highlighted in the written local PTW procedure that the waiver of work permits is
considered to be an exceptional and very rare occurrence.
9.6. Deviations and Amendment to Live Permits
Company PTW procedure shall address the following:
• Amendments to a permit are only permissible after approval from the Permit Approver.
• Mistakes/errors to be crossed with a single line and initialled by Issuing Authority & Performing
Authority.
• Using other means of correction invalidates the permit/certificate.
• Tampering or misuse of the PTW will be subject to disciplinary action.
10. WORK COMPLETIONS
Return of permit
• On completion of work, the issued copies of the permit should be re-united and returned to the point
of issue.
• The copies should then be signed off by the permit issuer and the Task Super visor to indicate
completion, subject to a satisfactory inspection of the worksite.
• Other parties to the permits, i.e. those made aware of the work who may have been signatory
to the permit, should also be informed of its completion.
Permit Formal Hand-off
One of the objectives of the PTW system is to provide a formal hand-off procedure to ensure that the part of
the project affected by the work is in a safe condition and ready for reinstatement. The hand-off procedure
should include obtaining answers to the following questions:
• Has the work been completed?

• Is the area, equipment, etc., in a safe condition?
• Has the equipment been returned to an operational status?
• Have these items been checked by the Issuing Supervisor?
• Only when formal hand-off is acceptable should all copies of the permit be assembled, signed and
filed.
• Permits should be filed for at least 12 months.
Page 20 of 32
Site inspection
• Prior to signing off the permit, the permit issuer or a delegated representative should conduct an
inspection of the worksite to confirm that it has been left in a satisfactory condition.
• The person in charge of the work in signing completion is making a statement that the worksite has
been left in a safe condition, and the permit issuer has to be satisfied of this before he signs his
acceptance of the completed permit.
Cancellation of overrides
• Where the override of process shutdown or fire and gas detection/protection systems has been
necessary to allow work to proceed, these should be cancelled as part of the permit completion
arrangements. Overrides should be in place for the shortest practicable time and should not necessarily
wait until the work is completed.
• The permit issuer, when he is satisfied that such overrides are no longer required, should authorize their
cancellation and verification. The cancellation of overrides should be indicated on the permit.
Return to service
Company shall ensure that there is a formal procedure for returning equipment to service which has been
subject to work under the P.T.W. system.
This procedure should consider the following:
• That work on the equipment has been completed and the plant or equipment has been left in a safe
condition, and that this has been verified by the person finally signing off the permit.
• That all isolations /overrides pertaining to the plant or equipment have been removed/ cancelled, or that
the status of any remaining isolations/overrides is known to Operations personnel.
• That the Operations person responsible for that area formally acknowledges his acceptance of the plant
or equipment.
Complementary Supporting Certificates
Company shall ensure that one or more of the following supplementary certificates may also be required where
specialist activities have to be performed, before a Permit to Work can be safely issued:
• Electrical Isolation Certificate / Lock Out – Tag out Certificate.
• Process / Mechanical Isolation Certificate.
• Excavation Clearance Certificate ,
• Gas Test Certificate.
• Vehicle / Equipment Entry Certificate.
Important Note:
The Local written PTW procedure shall provide provision for cross-referencing the Permits and their associated
certificates. The relationships between the Permits, Supplementary Certificates and other components of the
system should be detailed in the PTW procedure.
Page 21 of 32
11. TRAINING AND COMPETENCE
• Company should identify and address training and competence requirements in their PTW Procedure in
accordance with OGP Guidelines on PTW System.
• A system should be put in place to ensure that assessment of competence of personnel is carried out
before they are given responsibilities under the permit procedure.
• Company shall ensure that Training Requirements for contractors are included in training and
competence procedure, plans...etc.
• The extent of training required will vary according to the nature and types of activity to be carried out, as
well as the roles and responsibilities of appointment holders.
The training needs for the following categories of employees should be taken in account:
• Performing Authority and Issuing Authority ;

• Competent Person;
• Authorized Gas Testers;
• Process Isolators;
• Authorized Electrical Persons ;
• Confined Space Attendants;
• Workers;
• Fire Watchers;
• HSE personnel.
12. COMMUNICATIONS
The importance of effective communication within the P.T.W system cannot be overstated. Due to the number
of people who may be involved in the PTW system and the potentially large number of interfaces, this is one of
the most important areas of a PTW system.
Special attention should be paid to the possibility of communication problems on sites where more than one
language is spoken. Areas of specific emphasis include:
• Person requesting the work to state clearly the exact nature and scope of the work, the number of
workers, different skills and special tools involved.
• Person issuing the permit to communicate clearly the potential hazards at the worksite, the precautions
he has taken and the precautions to be taken by the person in charge of the work. He should also
ensure that any other person who may be affected by the work is informed.
• Person in charge of the work to communicate clearly to the members of his work party the information
received on hazards and precautions and the action required in the event of an emergency. He should
tell the person issuing the permit if there are changes in the work conditions which may affect
the validity of the permit.
This communication is normally done during a start of shift ‘Tool Box’ meeting, but can be completed at any
time prior to work beginning. Those involved with the work will sign acknowledge their understanding of the
work activity and the necessary controls, tools, PPE, isolations, etc. described on the PTW.
13. PTW AUDITING AND MONITORING
The extent and frequency of verification and monitoring will be determined by the size of the
location/installation, the numbers of permits in normal use and the extent of discrepancies found on previous
checks.
Page 22 of 32
Note: Company should ensure requirements are made in their PTW procedure to allow auditing and monitoring
of PTW system.
13.1. Monitoring and Auditing
To ensure that the PTW system is complying with the rules and procedures outlined in this Document and
local written PTW procedure, an ongoing monitoring and auditing assessment program is required. The extent
and frequency at which the system is assessed could be as follows:
A) Monitoring:
Daily: routine day-to-day checking by the worksite supervisor and HSE personnel to verify PTW
compliance, and permits and certificates are checked / verified by the Permit Documentation Controller at
the Area Permit Control Facility.
Weekly: a checklist for use by involved discipline and HSE department to be used to verify that the PTW
System is being complied with, associated documents are in order, and work site conditions are being
complied with.
B) Auditing:
Monthly: HSE department and involved discipline shall determine if permits in progress are complete,
e.g., completion of the hazard assessments in implementation of specified precautions, briefing of the
work party, etc.
Annually: HSE Department and involved discipline shall audit the PTW standard to assess how it has
been used over the previous year and to ensure it is operated as intended.
Company site Management (e.g., Installation Manager) and HSE Manager are responsible for this audit.
These assessments are used to provide feedback to management of non-compliance and provide
management with a level of assurance that work activities covered in the PTW system are being controlled
safely. Records are maintained by HSE Department.
14. PERMIT TO WORK CATEGORIES AND SUPPORTING CERTIFICATES DESCRIPTION
14.1. Permit to Work
A formal written system used to control work carried out. PTW lays down conditions, limitations and
precautions that have to be observed. All this is done to ensure the safety of the people doing the work and
the safety of the operation, it is also a mean of communication and planning between site management,
supervisors, plant operators, contractors and those who carry out the work in all Company Sites.
14.2. Complementary Supporting Certificates
They address main hazards or provide a complement of formal communication; they are joined to work
permits. The five certificates in the Permit to Work procedure are as follows: Energy Isolation Certificate,
Excavation Certificate, Vehicle and Equipment Entry Certificate, Gas Test Certificate and Diving Certificate.
The certificates shall be used in conjunction with a work permit and are not stand-alone documents
14.3. Naked Flame Work (NFP)
Any work relating the use of a flame or other high-energy source of ignition which is certainly cause ignition of
a flammable mixture is potentially extremely hazardous, NFP work shall be used only when there is not other
Page 23 of 32
methods of performing the task. A JSA shall be prepared prior the commencement of Naked Flame Work and
issuing the NFP Permits.
Naked Flame consists of:
• Welding and Brazing, Burning and Blow Torches. Flame Cutting.
• Grinding and Disc Cutting of metal and reinforced concrete, Plasma Cutting.
The NAKED FLAME PERMIT is intended to ensure that all aspects of safety are evaluated in a correct
manner and that all required precautions measures and prevention measures are taken before carrying out
this Activity.
14.4. Hot Work Permit (HWP)
Any work involving the use of a source of ignition (other than naked flames requiring NFP) capable of igniting
flammable gases, volatile liquids or other materials. A Hot Work Permit is required for work involving the use
of an open flame or spark:
• The use of engine motors in plant (diesel / petrol-driven mobile equipment).

• Work on electrical systems where access is possible to electrical conductors that are or could
possibly be live.
• Work involving the installation or repair of electric cables.
• Connection or disconnection of electrical motors.
• Work on instrumentation, instrument panels or telecom equipment.
• Use of explosives or perforating guns, dry grit or shot blasting.
• Using non intrinsically safe electrical equipment (e.g. Aero meter, power tools, photography.)
• Pneumatic spanners, jack hammers, hacksaws and drills
• Spark producing hand tools
• Soldering
• Portable and transportable electrical equipment
• Post weld heat treatment / stress relieving etc..
14.5. Cold Work Permit (CWP)
A Cold Work Permit is required for work not involving hot work or Naked Flame work that is also potentially
hazardous, which may expose personnel, equipment or the environment to hazard. For example:
• Pressure testing of plant and equipment.

• Actual or possible breaking of containment of systems under pressure or systems that contain
substances which are flammable, toxic or corrosive.
• Disconnection or opening up of any closed pipeline or vessels.
• Spading and de-spading of process lines.
• Chemical cleaning Handling of hazardous substances, e.g. radioactive sources, toxic/corrosive
chemicals. Spraying of paint and brush painting
• Erection and dismantling of scaffolds.
• Lagging and insulation activities.
• Confined Space Entry & Working at Heights.
• Any non-routine activity or any activity that requires specific control measures to be taken to ensure
safety.
14.6. Confined Space Entry Permit (CSEP)
A CSEP is required before entering or working inside a confined space. Confined spaces may include
vessels, tanks, furnaces, separators, drums, pipes, sewers, sumps or drains and machinery enclosures, or
excavations greater than 1, 20 metre in depth. A confined space is defined as a space that is large enough
to be entered bodily and has one or more of the following characteristics: has limited or restricted access for
Page 24 of 32
entry or exit; contains or has the potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere; it is not intended for
continuous operation; has insufficient ventilation and may contain known or potential hazards.
14.7. Radiography Permit (RPT)
A Radiography Permit To work is issued for controlling the use of radioactive materials used for non-
destructive testing of welds, or other associated type of activity. The Radiography Permit is effective for the
period specified on the PTW Form, normally for 1 day shift, and shall be used and accompanied by the
Radiation Protection Supervisor (RPS) who ensure proper preparation and planning of the worksite prior to
the commencement of radiography activity and supervises the safety of the worksite and personnel.
14.8. Excavation Permit to Work
An Excavation Permit to Work defines requirements that shall be followed and implemented before an
excavation start, it applies to trenching, burying, pile driving and any other operations, which could cause
damage covered or underground services or utilities such pipelines, cables, or utilities and has a potential to
harm workers. The excavation permit allows that excavations work and trenches are performed safely.
14.9. Excavation Clearance Certificate
An Excavation Certificate defines administrative requirements that shall be followed for authorization of
excavation, trenching, burying, pile driving and any other operations, which could damage covered or buried
pipelines, cables, or utilities.
The procedure also ensures that excavations and trenches are constructed in a safe manner; this certificate
ensures appropriate communications take place and different discipline departments are consulted before the
issue of the PTW.
14.10. Electrical Work Permit
An Electrical Permit is used to define requirements for all works involving the repair and maintenance of
electrical equipment and supply, in which there is a risk of electrocution of personnel.
Such Electrical Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
• Work on isolated electrical equipment.

• Installation of instrumentation pipe work, cable and terminations (no live tie ins).Installation.
• Earthling / grounding/Termination.
• Continuity checks.
• Maintenance.
14.11. Isolation Certificate
An Isolation Certificate defines the requirements for all work requiring isolation and lock-out / tag-out of
equipment. The isolation method, safety precautions and responsibilities related to isolation and lock-out /
tag-out are detailed in the MSS-2[Ref. B5].
The Isolation Certificate is used to supports the PTW by providing the means of:
• recording the required isolations before the commencement of the work indicated in the associated PTW.
• confirming that the isolations have been made so that the work can start (subject to authorization of other
permits, e.g. Confined Space Entry – Electrical Work Permit).
• formal authorization and recording of approval to isolate lock-out/tag-out and block out the requested
equipment.
• ensuring proper authorization is granted to remove isolation, lock-out/tag-out and block out devices on
completion of the work indicated in the associated PTW.
Page 25 of 32
The Isolation Certificate shall be completed before the relevant Permit to Work can be authorized.
14.12. Vehicle / Equipment Entry Certificate
The Vehicle/Equipment Entry Certificate is used and required in production plant or during SIMOPS phases, it
is intended to define the requirements for the control of the vehicles entry of or other motorized equipment
into hazardous areas that may contain hazards, which may include flammable vapours, overhead lines,
buried piping or tankage, or unprotected equipment.
14.13. Gas Test Certificate
• Where required, the atmosphere in which the work will be carried out, particularly within confined spaces,
shall be tested by a qualified person (i.e. an Authorized Gas Tester) before entry is allowed.
• Results of any gas testing should be recorded and timed is indicated, and entered on the Gas Test
Certificate, it will be attached in the PTW.

of the document.

17. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
For Information:
18. LIST OF ANNEXES
1. Annex A: Sample Confined Space PTW
2. Annex B: Sample Excavation PTW Format
3. Annex C: Sample PTW Process Sample PTW Flow Chart (Universal Form)
Page 26 of 32
ANNEX A
Sample Confined Space PTW
Page 27 of 32
Page 28 of 32
ANNEX B
Sample Excavation PTW Format
Page 29 of 32
Page 30 of 32
ANNEX C
Sample PTW Process Sample PTW Flow Chart (Universal Form)
Page 31 of 32
Page 32 of 32
“Minimum Safety Standard on Lifting and Hoisting Operation”
Revision Sheet


2010
SGIAQ
Page 2 of 24
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE .........................................................................................................................4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION ............................................................................................5
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES ..........................................................................................5
4. DEFINITIONS ...............................................................................................................5
5. HAZARD IDENTIFICATION & RISK ANALYSIS .........................................................6
6. LIFT OPERATION PLANNING ....................................................................................7
7. LIFTING & RIGGING STUDIES ...................................................................................8
8. CONTROL OF THE LIFT OPERATION .......................................................................9
9. LIFTING AND HOISTING SAFETY PRACTICES ......................................................12
10. FUNCTIONS INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS.............................................................13
11. TRAINING AND COMPETENCE................................................................................16
12. LIFTING EQUIPMENT................................................................................................17
13. EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE....................................................18
14. CERTIFICATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF LIFTING EQUIPMENT .......................19
15. LIFTING OF PERSONNEL.........................................................................................19
16. REVIEW AND MONITORING.....................................................................................22
20. LIST OF ANNEXES ....................................................................................................22
Page 3 of 24
1. SCOPE
Safety beside to play a fundamental role in the HSE IMS offers the common way to pursue the
This document establishes the requirements and minimum safety standard for confined space the eni
e&p division minimum safety standard for lifting and hoisting operations, to be followed in order to
control the risk to personnel and assets during these operations.
This minimum safety standard is applicable in all Company site and operations, including contractors
conducting lifting and hoisting operations on Company property and sites.
This document applies to both Company employees and includes Contract employees working on all
Company sites.
This standard applies to all lifting and hoisting operations carried out with any type of crane or winch,
and their associated accessories or equipment being lifted. It applies to all lifting and hoisting
operations not specifically excluded in the following paragraph.
This standard does not apply, despite in principle can be adapted, to:
• Drilling crown block, traveling block and top drive operations.

• Elevators carrying personnel or freight.
• Ship/rig anchor handling, and routine ship operations.
• Earthmoving equipment and operations.
• Tree cutting and associated movement of lumber.
• Helicopter lifting operations.
• Fall protection.
• Manual handling.
• Marine towing.
The minimum safety requirements discussed in this document are the minimum safety standard and
any specific requirements not discussed in this document shall be addressed by the individual
Company.
Company sites shall develop additional procedures as required either due to legal/regulatory
requirements, or due to risk assessment results specific to their operations.
Any required specific procedures or guidance should be elaborated by the company for its own
particular operations and sites.
Company sites shall modify and adapt this to produce their own specific standard which takes into
account any prevailing recognized authorities and/or national standards for lifting and hoisting
operations. This includes but it not limited to the following international/national standards:
• ANSI: American National Standards Institute

• API: American Petroleum Institute
• ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
• ATS: Australian Technical Standards
• BSI: British Standards Institute
• CFR: Code of Federal Regulations (USA)
Page 4 of 24
• CTS: Canadian Technical Standards

• DNV: Det Norske VERITAS
• EN: European National Standard
• GOST: Gosudarstvennye Standarty State Standard (Russia)
• ISO: International Standards Organization
• LR Lloyds Register
• LOLER: Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment Regulations
• OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration
• PUWER: The Provision and Use of Working Equipment Regulations, UK
In addition, full reference shall be done to the Eni e&p division’s MSS-4[Ref. B2].
Contractors that have lifting and hoisting procedures in place may utilize those procedures provided
they meet the minimum requirements as defined in this document and any other applicable
requirement in the local country.
This document is applied to all lifting and hoisting activities, carried out by Company or
Contractors’ workers in all eni e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies and in DIME and
DICS units.
4. DEFINITIONS
• QCP: Quality Control Plan
• Company: An organization part of or connected to Eni e&p division such as: Geographic Unit,
Affiliate, Subsidiary or Joint Venture under Eni e&p division”s/ Companies operational control
(more than 30% share or relevant business direction
• Certification: An approved, legally compliant method of checking and providing evidence that a
piece of equipment has been inspected and meets standards.
• Competent Person: A person concerned with the testing, examination and certification of lifting
equipment and who shall have the requisite knowledge and certify whether the Lifting
Equipment is free from patent defects and is suitable in every way for the duty for which the
equipment is required. He is a person who due to training and/or experience is knowledgeable
of standards, has demonstrated ability to perform specific tasks, capable of identifying
Page 5 of 24
workplace hazards relative to specific operations, designated by the employer and authorized to
take specific actions
• Free-fall capability: Disengaging the hoist brake completely to lower to lower the load with
gravity and inertia (i.e. uncontrolled lowering).
• Lift plan: The details of how a lifting operation shall be executed, including lifting equipment to
be used, rigging/slinging methods to be employed and control measure in place to manage
identified risks
• Lifting equipment: Any device used to suspend the load (containers, baskets, cargo nets, pipe
racks, skids, bulk containers, etc.) Includes all lifting appliances, lifting accessories and lifted
equipment
• Lifting accessory: Any device used to connect a lifting appliance to a load, and does not form
part of the load. These include but are not limited to wire rope (and other types of) slings,
shackles, eye bolts, hoist and swivel rings, turnbuckles, lifting harnesses, spreader beams, drill
pipe/casing elevators, hooks, pad eyes, pallet hook, etc.
• Lifting appliance: Mechanical device capable of raising or lowering a load. These include
offshore pedestal cranes, mobile cranes, A-frames and derricks (excluding drilling derricks),
tower cranes, overhead/gantry cranes, lifting beam, jacks, mobile/aerial platforms, hoists,
winches, forklifts, beam trolleys, etc
• Pre-use inspection: A visual check, and where necessary functional check of lifting equipment
by a competent person before use.
• Self-acting fail-safe: An automatic braking system that applies the hoist brake any time the
control lever is in the neutral position.
• Lifting Gear: Any item used to connect a load to a lifting machine or appliance, but which is not
in itself capable of providing any movement to lift or lower the load
• Safe Working Load (S.W.L.): The maximum load with reference to Manufacturers design data
as assessed by a Competent Person which an item of Lifting Equipment may raise, lower or
suspend under specified service conditions. The Safe Working Load will normally be the same
as the maximum load which can be lift in safe way
5. HAZARD IDENTIFICATION & RISK ANALYSIS
Hazard identification and risk analysis are an integral part of planning a lift, an assessment of the lift
and determination of the lift method, equipment and number of people required is critical to planning
of the lift.
Company and / or the performing Contractor shall perform hazard identification & risk assessment in
accordance with their hazards and risk identification procedures to study the complete lifting
operation.
This hazards assessment should include the following potential hazards that are common to a lifting
operation, but not limited to:
• Working in or near elevated power cables.

• Working in or near congested areas.
• Ground condition (hollow or soft ground condition).
• Meteorological Limitation, Weather condition (high wind velocity).
• Violent swinging (failure to use tag line and guide rope).
• Falling from height (access to secure or release rigging points).
Page 6 of 24
• Failure of crane load bearing structure and Failure of lifting equipment.

• What is to be lifted, its weight, configuration, lift points, center of gravity.
6. LIFT OPERATION PLANNING
• Non-routine lift operations require a lift plan supported by a risk assessment or a method
statement as required (e.g. awkward, heavy lift, pre cast column erection...etc).
• The level of detail of the lift plan will be determined by the complexity of the lift.
• Simple, routine, low risk and repetitive types of lifts may be covered by a simple generic lift
plan, requiring compliance with company lifting minimum safety standard as outlined in this
document and any applicable requirements at the local company sites , also these type of lifts
requires a brief pre-lift risk assessment and crew team meeting.
• Routine, low-risk lifts would typically be repetitive types of lifts, with known weights, operations
well within the capacity of the equipment, experienced personnel and with no immediate other
hazards in the area , however all the lifting rules shall be strictly followed .
• Company shall assess lifts and classify them as either routine or non-routine operations.
Examples of non-routine lifts could include but not limited, to the following:
o Continuation of a lifting operation with different appliances/equipment or personnel than

was used to initiate the operation.
o Lifts with more than one lifting appliance (e.g. two cranes, or crane and winch, etc.)
o Lifting of personnel.
o Lifting objects over sensitive or critical installations (process equipment in operation,
near electrical lines, etc.)
o All lifts where safety is at risk, which is a concern rose by HSE personnel or the
responsible departments.
• As a minimum, all non-routine lifts shall require a formal lifting work procedure, including Risk
Assessment / Job Safety Analysis, Toolbox Safety Meeting, and any required Work Permit
and work Method Statement.
• A lifting work procedure , method statement should typically include and address at least the
following issues:
o Description of scope and location of lifting activities to be carried out.

o The type and number of personnel needed, and their responsibilities and
competency level.
o What is to be lifted, its weight, configuration, lift points, center of gravity.
o Pick up and set down area and any restrictions.
o Lifting equipment required and its certification.
o Need for Job Safety Analysis and step-by-step instructions.
o Communications methods.
o Abnormal situations and response (interrupted lift, emergencies, etc.)
o Any potential environmental restrictions (weather, sea state, lighting strikes,
wind speed etc.)
o Potential impact from nearby simultaneous operations.
o Access and egress routes for those slinging/un-slinging the load.
o Will a Work Permit be required?
o Load charts to be used for the lift.
Page 7 of 24
o Whether tag lines will be required and their restrictions.
• During planning stage of a development project, Company or performing Contractor should

prepare a list of all equipment design for installation to identify and classify the heavy
equipment that may be categorized under heavy lift or tandem lift or critical lift.
• All lifting work procedure shall be reviewed by a competent person; and the level of review
shall be determined by the complexity of the lift.
• Any change to a prepared lifting work procedure shall be considered and shall be adequately
reassessed; consequently a new lifting work procedure shall be prepared and require the
same review as the original lift plan.
7. LIFTING & RIGGING STUDIES
As a minimum, the studies shall indicate the following, but not limited to:
• Required radius;
• Boom length;
• Safe Working Limits;
• Net weight of the load, the gross load weight, including the weight of all blocks and
rigging tackle;
• Ground and site conditions;
• Deck loading if applicable
• Material being lifted (particularly if chemicals/gases/explosives and other hazardous
substances)
• Crane location;
• Calculation of the percentage of the cranes rated capacity at which the lift will be
made;
• Swing and tail clearance;
• Explanation of hand signals;
• Rigging hardware and the engineering design and calculation of the lifting eyes;
• Any potential environmental restrictions (weather, sea state, lighting strikes, wind
speed etc.);
• Sequence of work, including lift-off, steady state conditions, and set-down of load
(including positions where there is a shift in the location of the center of gravity, for the
pick points).
These studies shall be compiled by designated and competent engineer. Critical and heavy lifts or
where the load is in an awkward shape or increased length and for tandem lifts shall be approved by
Company assigned representatives.
Comprehensive Lifting & Rigging Plan
Company to ensure that the Comprehensive Lifting & Rigging Plan should contain, at a minimum,
the following information’s:
Weight and Loading
• Weight of the load including any dressings.
Page 8 of 24
• Total lifting weight including the load (fully dressed) and the weight of lifting equipment
including wire ropes, shackles and spreader beam.
• Impact loading or safety factor for sudden movement during hoisting and weather
condition limitation such as wind velocity, temperature, rain and etc.
• The centre of gravity (CG) in order to determine the position lifting point and the design of
lifting eyes or lifting lugs
Lifting Eyes or Lifting Lugs
The following measures should be considered when designing and installing the lifting eyes or lifting
lugs:
• Material of the load.

• Weight and shape of the load.
• Installation and testing/inspection criteria.
The quality and integrity of the lifting eyes or lifting lugs should be tested or inspected with relevant
test/inspection certificate from an approved test/ third party certification agency.
Cranes & Lifting Equipment

During planning stage of a development project, Company or performing Contractor should prepare a
list of all equipment design for installation to identify and classify the heavy equipment that may be
categorized under heavy lift or tandem lift or critical lift.
Based on this equipment list and the process in which the weight and loading of the equipment is
determined, the following measures should be considered and followed when selecting a lifting crane
and its associated lifting equipment:
• Total weight of load including impact loading (safety factor);

• Size of load including height, width or diameter;
• Distance to transverse or swing angle and hoist angle;
• Operation space and site condition;
• Type and size of lifting equipment including wire ropes, shackles and spreader beam.
The quality and integrity of a specially designed spreader beam should be tested or inspected with
relevant test/inspection certificate from an approved test/ third party certification agency.
8. CONTROL OF THE LIFT OPERATION
Pre-Operation Preparation
Area Preparation
Company shall ensure the area where the lifting and hoisting operation is planned to take place
including contractor lifting and hoisting activities is prepared in accordance with the following but not
limited to:
• Soil investigation for soft condition, air pockets and underground services (e.g. power
lines, sewer line or drainage).
Page 9 of 24
• Soil shall be compacted to ensure it is capable of taking the whole loading during lifting
operation (i.e. crane, total weight of load, weight of lifting equipment and impact load).
• Affected lifting area shall be kept clear of any obstruction, above or underground services
and any other conflicting activities witch may exist within the lifting area.
Pre-lift Meeting
• Before the lifting operation starts the person in charge shall conduct a pre-job meeting to
review the lift plan or any applicable method statement with the lift team and ensure that
clear communications procedures are in place.
• Before the lifting operation starts, the performing Contractor and/or the Appointed Person
will conduct a pre-lift meeting to all personnel involved in the lifting operation.
• Pre-lift meeting may be conducted in the form of a Toolbox Talk/Meeting. Such meeting
should include information such as, but not limited to, the following:
• Roles and responsibilities of each individual including verification checks to be performed

before a lifting operation are defined, discussed and understood.
• Potential hazards and its associated risks are discussed and understood.
• The prevention, control and mitigation measures in preventing the occurrence of an

incident are discussed and understood.
• Ensure proper means of communication, instruction and signs used.
• During the pre-lift meeting, the signaler to be used shall be identified to all team members
and all made to understand that only one person is permitted to give signals to the lift
operator at any time.
• All personnel shall acknowledge the pre-lift meeting conducted as in Toolbox

Talk/Meeting.
Appointed Person (Lifting)
Company shall ensure an appointed competent person is designated as the person in charge of each
lifting operation.
He shall be responsible to the following:
• The person in charge shall be responsible to ensure that a suitable lift plan is in place,
reviewed and approved, and that all team members understand their responsibilities in the
operation.
• The person in charge is responsible to suspend the lift operations should any changes occur
which could cause a deviation from the lift plan or procedure.
• Perform pre-operation inspection on crane(s) and lifting equipment after it has been set up.
• Ensure crane(s) and lifting equipment is adequate and suitable for the work (lifting capacity).
Page 10 of 24
• Ensure availability and suitability test and training certificates of crane(s), lifting equipment,
NDT or any other test suitable for testing the integrity of lifting eyes or lifting lugs welded on
the load, Crane Operator(s) and Banksman.
• Ensure adequate barricades of lifting zone in provided to prevent unauthorized entry.
• Ensure implemented of the required prevention, control and mitigation measures before the
lifting operation start and, ensure those measures required during the lifting operation are
properly implemented and maintained.
In case of a tandem lift, ensure only one (1) person is assigned in coordinating and providing
instructions to the crane operators, pre lifting meeting in required between all the operators involved
including other involved person in the lifting operations.
Pre-Operation Inspection
Lifting Appliances (e.g. cranes, hoists)
• The Appointed Person for Lifting shall perform a pre-inspection before the lifting or
hoisting lifting operation by the Appointed Person in the checklist provided in Annex A.
Lifting Equipment and Gears
• All lifting equipment shall be visually inspected before use. (An example of a pre-use
inspection checklist is included as Appendix 1A, and 1B)
• Inspection on lifting equipment shall also be carried out in accordance with the local
inspection procedure to be elaborated by the individual companies for their own particular
sites and needs.
Final Inspection (After Set up)
• Once the crane is set and all lifting equipment attached to the intended load, the
Appointed Person for lifting shall conduct a final inspection on the crane and all its
accessories.
The following shall be considered during the final inspection as a minimum:
• Working conditions of all mechanical parts on the crane. Mechanical parts referred to
brakes, winches, pulleys and drums.
• Working conditions of all safety devices on the crane. Safety devices referred to limit
switches, load indicator and radius indicator.
• Ground condition and stability of the crane including outriggers position and sitting.
• Physical conditions and validity of all lifting appliances and gears.
Page 11 of 24
9. LIFTING AND HOISTING SAFETY PRACTICES
Company shall ensure that all the lifting and hoisting operation performed at the company sites are
complying with the following safety practices but not limited, to the following:
• Ensure that an assessment of the lift has been completed and the lift method and
equipment has been determined and documented by a competent person(s).
• A lift plan shall be prepared, reviewed and approved by a competent person and followed.
Anytime there is a variation from the lift plan, the work shall be stopped, the job made safe
and the lift reassessed to ensure it can continue safely.
• Operators of powered, lifting devices are competent, trained and certified for the
equipment to be used.
• The operator of the lifting appliance (e.g. crane operator) shall immediately obey to
emergency stop signal from the signaler or any person noticing an unsafe act or condition,
however it is required that full supervision coverage is provided during the lifting operation
and roles and responsibilities of all personnel involved in the lift operations are clearly
defined and communicated and understood.
• The lift plan shall include and demonstrate that the weight of the load (and accessories) to
be lifted has been calculated / estimated and is within the lift capacity of the lifting
equipment and that suitable lifting accessories are selected and attached to the load.
• The operator of the lifting appliance shall not leave the controls anytime the load is
suspended.
• Personnel shall understand and attend to their designated tasks, and not attempt to
perform multiple tasks at the same time.
• Loads shall never be lifted or moved over people.
• Load does not exceed dynamic and/or static capacities of the lifting equipment.
• Rigging of the load is carried out by a competent person(s).
• Lifting devices and equipment has been certified for use within the last 12 months (at a
minimum) or as required by any applicable local regulation.
• Unnecessary personnel shall be kept out of the area; and the area secured from entry if
necessary.
• Lifting zone shall be barricaded and personnel shall not be positioned underneath a lifted
load.
• Personnel shall ensure they have escape routes in case of unexpected movement of the
load.
• Manual load handling shall not be used to stop a swinging load.
• Adequate taglines shall be used to control the load
Page 12 of 24
• Any safety devices installed on lifting equipment are operational and in good working
condition.
• All lifting devices and equipment have been visually examined before each lift by a
competent person(s), and a system is in place for lifting and rigging devices identification
and marking.
• During all lifting operations the load should be lifted only a nominal distance in the first
instance. This trial lift allows the crane operator to verify his estimations of balance,
stability, and general safety of the load, whilst it is in relatively safe position. If any
anomalies are detected, the load should be lowered and the problem is investigated,
slinging revised. The sequence of trial lifts and adjustments should be repeated until he is
satisfied that the load is balanced, stable and secure and lifting can process safely.
• Before landing any lifted load, a complete check should be performed to ensure that the
lay down point is of adequate size and capable of taking the weight of the load. In
addition, it may be necessary to provide suitable landing packing, e.g. timber bearers, to
enable the slings to be removed from under the load.
• Special precautions are put in place for laying down loads which contain substances
which may be harmful to people, environment or structures.
The following “figures” are not referred to organizational roles, but indicate only operational
involvements in the activity management.
• Company Site Management have overall responsibility for safe lifting and hoisting
operations at the site and is responsible in ensuring the following:
• Appoint a qualified heavy lifting operator/Contractor as required.
• Appoint a qualified person(s) in overseeing all lifting operations, either for a specific lift or
generally for any types of lifting operations.
• Responsible to ensure personnel in lifting and hoisting operations have received adequate
training and are competent in their respective jobs.
• All lifting operations, Heavy, Critical and Awkward lifting operations are properly studied,
assessed, designed and calculated and the prevention, control and mitigation measures
are implemented.
• Suitable and sound equipment and machinery are provided to facilitate heavy and
awkward lifting operation.
• Ensure Contractors(s), Subcontractor and Vendors fully complies with Company

requirements.
HSE Department
Page 13 of 24
• Assists the Company site management and the person in charge (Appointed person)
with technical risk assessments and preparation of the lift plan and any required safe
work method statement as required.
Contractors
The performing Subcontractor or the appointed Lifting Subcontractor shall be responsible to the
following:
• Perform detail study of the lifting operation to be performed and submit a method
statement and comprehensive lifting and rigging plan to Company prior the lifting
operations starts and as defined by the individual Company .
• Identify potential hazards that may exist in a lifting operation and its associated risks and
determine its prevention, control and mitigation measures.
• Provide and use only safe and sound equipment and machinery suitable for the lifting
operation.
• Construct and ensure lifting lugs/eyes are tested in accordance with engineering design,
drawing and calculation.
• Perform pre-mobilization inspection on crane(s) and lifting equipment and ensure they are
within the rated capacity before delivering to the site.
• Verify all test and training certificates of crane(s), lifting equipment, NDT, or any other test
suitable for testing the integrity of lifting eyes or lifting lugs welded on the load, Crane
Operator(s) and Banksmen before submitting it to Company for approval as required.
• Conduct pre-operation briefings to all personnel involved on the potential hazards

identified, its’ associated risks and the prevention, control and mitigation measures,
• Ensure such prevention, control and mitigation measures are implemented before and
during the lifting operation.
Lifting Engineer
Site Engineer or performing Contractor shall be involved in the preparation stage of all lifting and
hoisting operations. He will be responsible to the following:
• Study in detail the load to be lifted and determine its’ weight and centre of gravity (CG).
• Design and calculate suitable lifting points and lifting lugs/eyes.
• Determine weight of the load (including impact loads during lifting).
• Propose suitable crane(s) and lifting equipment for the lifting operation.
• Determine the potential hazards and its associated risks that may arise during the lifting
operation.
Appointed Person (Lifting)

Company shall ensure an appointed competent person is designated as the person in charge of
each lifting operation.
Page 14 of 24
Note: Roles and responsibilities of the appointed person are described in the previous paragraph,
14.5. Appointed Person (Lifting).
Signaler
• Has sole responsibility for passing signals to the lift equipment operator(s).
• Maintains direct line of sight to the load and lift equipment operator(s), except for
those lifts where radio communication shall be used at times.
• Does not perform any other job while the lift is in progress.
Banksman
Banks man is responsible to the following:
• Perform pre-operation inspection on all lifting equipment used;
• Communicate with Crane Operator(s) before operation to establish common

understanding signs and instructions that will be used, the potential hazards that may
exist during lifting and its associated risks and its prevention, control and mitigation
measures;
• Check that the load is safely rigged before the lifting operation.
In the event of a tandem lift, ensure only one (1) person is assigned in coordinating and providing
instructions to the crane operators.
Lift Equipment /Crane Operator
• Shall be trained and authorized to operate the specific piece of equipment/lift

appliance being used, and shall operate the equipment within the technical limitations
of that equipment.
• Shall conduct pre-use inspection per established procedures.
Crane Operator(s) is responsible to the following
• The crane operator shall not carry, lift or suspend loads above people
• Perform pre-operation on crane and all its associated parts including safety limit
switches and load indicator and ensure they are in good working condition. (An
example of a pre-use crane inspection checklist is included as Appendix 1A).
• Inspect ground condition where crane is to be seated (verify with Appointed Person if
unsure of condition) before setting up.
• Ensure the crane location is able to ensure visibility of those who are managing lifting
operations at site.
Page 15 of 24
• Cranes shall be properly secured on firm and level foundation with outriggers properly
set before the crane is operated. Crane mats or timber pads shall be used under
outriggers when operating on potentially unstable ground.
• Verify weight of load does not exceed the safe working load (SWL) of crane and lifting
equipment.
• Communicate with banksmen before operation to establish common understanding

signs and instructions that will be used, the potential hazards that may exist during
lifting and its associated risks and its prevention, control and mitigation measures.
• An adequate fire extinguisher shall be located in the crane cab and the crane
operator shall be competent in its use
Slingers/Riggers/Handlers
• Execute their jobs under the direction of the person in charge.
Individual Worker
• It is responsibility of all employee and contractor , subcontractor , vendors on site,
and mainly the supervisors, to ensure personnel keep out of any area where they
might be injured by falling or shifting load, ensure that they do not stand below or
between loads and always ensure an escape rout available , follow the lifting rules
and practices .
• All personnel involved or aware of any lifting operation has a responsibility to use only
properly color coded and marked equipment with SWL/ID No.
• Ensure all equipment that is in good order and rated as fit for intended purpose.
11. TRAINING AND COMPETENCE
• All persons engaged in lifting and hoisting operations shall receive adequate training
(including refresher training as determined by site procedures) and be competent in
their assigned duties.
• Competency assessments shall be conducted at a frequency of no less than every

two years.
• Company site management shall define training requirements and ensure that
competency assessments are conducted periodically.
• Training and competency (and any formal certification) shall always comply with any
established local regulatory and legislative requirements as a minimum.
• All training and competency assessments shall be documented and retained in the
employee’s training file.
Page 16 of 24
12. LIFTING EQUIPMENT
• Lifting equipment shall include the lifting appliance (e.g. cranes, hoists, winches etc.), the lift
accessories (e.g. shackles, slings, spreader bars, pad-eyes etc.) and the lifted equipment
(e.g. baskets, containers, pieces of equipment, etc.) All shall be marked with the safe
working load (SWL) and shall have unique identification to track inspection/certification, and
have current certification.
• A registry of all lifting equipment shall be developed and maintained at all sites showing the
identification of each piece of equipment, a description, SWL, test weight and date as a
minimum.
• Sites shall establish local documents that control purchasing specifications, inspection,
maintenance and storage of lifting equipment consistent with an internationally recognized
standard.
• Lifting equipment shall be equipped with appropriate safety devices as defined in the site
control documentation; and these safety devices shall be maintained in proper operational
condition and never by-passed.
• Load radius charts shall be displayed on all lifting appliances (cranes, hoists, forklifts, etc.)
• All lifting equipment (as appropriate) shall have the manufacturer’s operations and
maintenance manuals maintained on site.
• Any lifting accessories that are custom fabricated locally/regionally (e.g. spreader bars for
specific equipment lifts) shall be designed, structurally verified and load tested by a qualified
person or agency. Those documents created as a result of the design, verification and
testing shall form the basis for the equipment file for each piece of specialist equipment.
• It is recommended that each site prepare a comprehensive spreadsheet detailing the

design, test, certification and inspection requirements for each piece of equipment at the
site. An example of such a matrix can be found in Appendix 9 of the OGP Report No. 376,
April 2006[Ref. B1].
• Lifting equipment shall be stored properly after each use to prevent damage.
• Lifting equipment such as slings shall always be protected from being cut by sharp corners,
sharp edges, protrusions or abrasive surfaces.
• Alloy steel chain slings shall have permanently affixed durable identification, stating size,
grade, rated capacity, reach and serial number.
• The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the lifting equipment.
• Lifting equipment shall be securely attached to their load.
Page 17 of 24
13. EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Documentation
• Inspection and maintenance schedules shall be established and documented locally for all
lifting equipment.
• A register of all equipment, its scheduled inspection dates, and inspection technical criteria
to be used (i.e. ASME, ASTM, API, BS, etc.) shall be documented.
• Company to ensure all documents related to lifting and hoisting are maintained and
compiles all drawings, calculations, and test / inspection and training certificates such as the
following:
• Lifting & Rigging Plan and Technical Specification of Crane and Lifting Equipment (e.g.
Load Chart).
• Test / Inspection Certificate of Crane, Lifting Equipment and Spreader Beam .
• Training Certificate of Crane Operator & Banksmen.
• A register shall be kept on the worksite area, with details of all loose lifting equipment (lifting
gear).
• The register shall record and show the identification (ID number) and status of the
certification of the lifting gear.
Inspection and maintenance schedules shall take into account:
• Applicable legal requirements and industry standards.
• Manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Operating conditions (frequency of use, harshness of use, age of equipment etc.).
• Results of previous inspections and any prior equipment failures for this type of equipment.
• Inspections/maintenance shall be carried out by qualified persons, and were necessary due
to regulatory or internal requirements, by certified inspectors.
• Inspections shall be done to internationally recognized standards relevant to that particular

piece of equipment (i.e. ASME, ASTM, API, BS, ANSI), including any national regulatory
standards that may apply (e.g. Canada-CSA, Australia-AS, Russia-GOST,etc.).
• Inspection frequency for lifting equipment shall be no more than 12 months, and no more
than 6 months for lifting equipment used for lifting personnel.
• All lifting equipment shall be visually inspected before use. (An example of a pre-use
inspection checklist is included as Appendix 1A and 1B).
• It is required to use color coding to identify and control inspection frequency for portable
items of lifting equipment. Color codes should be standardized as much as possible.
Page 18 of 24
• Equipment shall be subject to immediate inspection before further use if it is involved a

lifting incident or overload.
14. CERTIFICATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF LIFTING EQUIPMENT
• All lifting equipment used at the company site shall be certified in accordance with relevant
Local Legislation or International Standards.
• Every item of lifting equipment/gear is required to be thoroughly examined and tested by an

independent and approved Agency:
• Before being brought into use for the first time (manufacturer certification).
• After any substantial alteration, or repair (as per relevant legislation requirements).
• Inspection frequency for lifting equipment shall be no more than 12 months or less than 12
month as required by the local company or local regulations, and no more than 6 months for
lifting equipment used for lifting personnel.
• All items of lifting gear shall be visually inspected at least every six months to identify any
wear / crack deformation and/or any other damages, provided pre-use visual inspection is
carried out to prevent any defective lifting gear is going to be used.
• Only lifting equipment/gear identified with a current Certificate of Test Examination shall be
used.
• Only lifting gear with the Safe Working Load (SWL) clearly marked shall be used.
• No lifting equipment shall be used to carry loads in excess of the indicated SWL.
• Only lifting gear (i.e. wire, Alloy steel chain slings and fiber rope) showing the current color
coding shall be used.
15. LIFTING OF PERSONNEL
• Lifting of personnel for purposes of personnel transfer (e.g. offshore between vessel/rig) shall
not be done during darkness unless supported by specific risk assessment and approved by
site manager. Standard procedures for this type of lift shall be prepared for each site and only
equipment designed and approved for personnel transfer shall be used.
• Lifting personnel for other work activities (excluding personnel transfer) shall be avoided
unless that risk has been shown to be acceptably low and the risk controllable. This shall
require a specific risk assessment and a dedicated lift plan each time. Risk assessment is
also required for personnel transfer. (See MSS-4 Doc 1.3.3.25 Rev.00)
Additional requirements include the following:
• Equipment shall be designed, approved and certified for the task, and not used for any other
lifting purpose.
• A lift plan shall be documented, and a person in charge assigned.
Page 19 of 24
• Two mechanisms for preventing the person from falling shall be installed, one of which shall
be self-acting fail-safe. Free-fall capability shall be positively locked out.
• Direct line of sight between signaler and lift operator, and signaler and person being lifted
shall be maintained.
• Emergency/contingency plans shall be included in the lift plan.
• All personnel, including those being lifted shall have received adequate and appropriate
training and be competent to carry out the task.
• Lifting equipment which is designed for lifting people shall be clearly marked
• Lifting equipment not designed for lifting people but which might be used so in error shall be
clearly marked
Operating Aerial Lift (Bucket) Trucks
Aerial lift trucks such us cherry pickers, scissor lifts, flying carpets or other names shall meet all
applicable legislative regulations, or if not exist then relevant EC regulations covering this type of
equipment. See Minimum safety standard working at height for additional information (MSS -4
Doc N° 1.3.3.25 Rev. 00).
These are very useful tools, and when used properly are very safe ways of gaining access to
heights without the need for scaffolding.
There are basically two issues to consider before using a mobile elevated work platform, the
operator and the machine itself.
• The operator shall be trained to be competent in the use of the specific machine that
he wants to use, and in possession of a certificate of competency from his employer
and authorized by Company.
• Different types operate in different ways so we can not assume that a person who can
safely use one type can automatically use a different one without danger. The
operator shall also be physically capable to use the machine.
• The machine itself shall also be safe to use and at the first time that any such
machine arrives on site it shall be examined and certified by a third party such as an
approved certification agency in the local country. This inspection shall be repeated in
accordance with the certification process.
• In addition, the user of any mobile elevated work platform shall inspect the safety
critical items before each use of the machine. This includes tyres, brakes, alarms,
hydraulics, and any other critical systems. An inspection checklist should be used.
• Inspections of aerial lift trucks shall be conducted per the manufacturer’s

recommendations and ensure regular maintenance.
• Do not operate aerial lift devices with noted, reported deficiencies until repairs are
made and equipment is authorized for use.
Page 20 of 24
• Prior to use, verify that controls are plainly marked as to their function and test the
controls to ensure proper working order.
• Company shall ensure that each Contractor and Subcontractor is responsible for
ensuring that all mobile elevated work platforms are maintained in accordance with
the suppliers’ recommendations.
• MEWPs (Mobile Elevated Work Platform) shall only be used on level, stable ground
and the work platform is fitted with guard rails, toe boards or other suitable barriers.
• Aerial lift trucks shall have both platform (upper) and lower controls. Upper controls
shall be in or beside the platform within easy reach of the operator. Lower controls
shall provide for overriding the upper controls. Lower controls shall not be operated
unless permission has been obtained from the employee in the lift, except in an
emergency.
• The insulated portion of an aerial lift shall not be altered in any manner that might
reduce its insulating value.
• Aerial lift trucks may be ‘”field modified”, for uses other than those intended by the
manufacturer, provided the modification has been certified in writing by the
manufacturer or by any other equivalent entity to be in conformity applicable design
and regulatory requirements, and deemed at least as safe as the equipment was
before modification. This should be supported by a risk assessment/management of
change review before the modifications are made.
• An aerial lift truck shall not be moved when the boom is elevated in a working position
with personnel in the basket (unless it is designed for this purpose, and then only
within the operating restrictions).
• Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected to verify that it is
properly cradled and outriggers are in stowed position.
• Set the brakes and position the outrigger devices on pads or similar solid surface and
install the wheel chocks, before use; especially on inclines.
• Do not operate aerial lift trucks on grades, side slopes or ramps that exceed the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Maintain a clear view of the path of travel, maintain a safe distance from other
obstacles, debris, drop offs, holes, depressions, slopes and other hazards. Maintain a
safe distance from overhead obstacles, especially power lines. Place signs at ground
level to warn of overhead obstacles above the sign. Use trained banks man.
• All personnel in the working elevated platform shall wear appropriate PPE at all times.
(Safety Helmet , Safety boots , coverall , safety glasses , glove and any other
particular PPE such as Full body harness .
• A restraint or tethering system with a body harness shall be worn at all times while
working from the lift, with the lanyard securely attached to the boom or basket as
recommended by the manufacturer.
Page 21 of 24
• Securing the lanyard to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working from
a lift is prohibited.
• Workers shall stand firmly on the floor of the basket and shall not sit or climb on the
edge of the basket or use plank, ladders, or other devices for a work position.
• Loads shall be distributed on platforms and extensions in accordance with the

manufacturer’s rated capacity.
• Do not position an aerial lift device against another object to steady the elevated
platform.
• Clear the area surrounding the elevated platform prior to lowering.
• It is prohibited to leave the basket at any time whilst elevated.
Requirements on maximum persons allowed in the aerial lift and the maximum working load shall be
in accordance with manufacturer specification.
16. REVIEW AND MONITORING

As part of the continuous improvement process in the HSE Management System, all procedures
developed and implemented under the Lifting and Hoisting Minimum Standard should be reviewed
periodically by management review to ensure their continued adequacy.


19. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
For Information:
20. LIST OF ANNEXES
Annex A: Example of pre-use inspection checklist for Cranes.

Annex B: Example of pre-use inspection checklist for forklift trucks.
Page 22 of 24
ANNEX A
EXAMPLE OF PRE-USE INSPECTION CHECKLIST FOR CRANES
Location of Unit: Date:

Crane Unit No.: Checked by:
INSPECTION ITEM Y/N/NA COMMENTS

Before you start the unit:
General
1. Is crane visually in good condition/clean?
2. Accessories properly stored?
Mechanical
1. Fluid levels correct?
Engine oil
Hydraulic oil
Battery liquid
Radiator coolant
Fuel
2. Windscreen clean, good visibility?
3. Steps/handles clean/free of grease?
4. Crane deck tidy, free of oil spills?
5. Tires; condition OK and air pressure correct?
6. Engine V-belts good condition and adjustment OK?
Hydraulics
1. Hoses in good condition?
2. Any leaks in hoses/cylinders?
Electrical
1. Wiring visually in good condition?
Safety Systems
1. Is a level gauge installed?
2. Is a Safe Working Load displayed?
3. Are load/radius charts displayed?
4. Are load limiting devices installed/working?
5. Is boom angle indicator visible to operator?
Lifting Gear
1. Has winch been certified in last 12 months (including load test)?
2. Are brakes adequately rated for SWL?
3. Is warning displayed to check failsafe brake before using?
4. Have brakes been serviced in last 3 months?
5. Is cable correct size/type for winch and in good visible condition?
6. Is cable properly terminated?
7. Is hook rating adequate for SWL?
8. Is hook in good condition, including swivel and safety latch?
9. Are operating controls well laid out and clearly labeled?
After starting the unit:
1. Are pressure gauges operational?
2. All operational functions checked?
3. Are lights operational?
4. Is main horn operational?
5. Are overboom/underboom stops available and functional?
6. Do brakes apply automatically on loss of power?
7. Do 5 turns of cable remain on drum when hook is in contact with the ground?
8. Do Operating levers return to neutral when released?
9. Reversing alarm working?
Any additional comments/concerns:
Note: these forms are generic forms, it is provided to the users of this document as a basic reference. It should be
further defined and adapted according to the specific sites requirements of the local companies.
Page 23 of 24
ANNEX B
EXAMPLE OF PRE-USE INSPECTION CHECKLIST FOR FORKLIFT TRUCKS.
Location of Unit: Date:

Crane Unit No.: Checked by:
INSPECTION ITEM Y/N/NA COMMENTS

Before starting the unit:
1. Fluid levels correct?
Engine oil
Hydraulic oil
Battery liquid
Radiator coolant
Fuel
2. Tires: condition OK and pressure correct?
3. Engine V-belts good condition and adjustment OK?
4. Seat belt installed and in good condition?
5. Hydraulic system free of leaks?
6. Engine free of oil leaks?
7. Is load chart on unit and legible?
8. Are control levers clearly marked?
9. Are forks free of obvious damage/cracks?
10. Do forks have lateral adjustment locks?
After starting the unit:
1. Are pressure gauges working?
2. Parking brake working and holding?
3. Warning horn working?
4. Driving brakes checked and holding?
5. Lights operational?
6. Steering checked and working OK?
7. Reverse alarm functioning?
8. All controls checked and functioning properly (up,
down, tilt, side boom, etc.)?
Additional comments/concerns:
Page 24 of 24
“Minimum Safety Standard on Respiratory Protection”
Revision Sheet


2010
SGIAQ
Page 2 of 14
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................... 4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION ............................................................................................................ 4
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES .......................................................................................................... 4
4. DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................... 5
5. ESTABLISHING A PROGRAM ................................................................................................... 5
6. EVALUATING PROGRAM EFFECTIVENESS............................................................................ 5
7. TRAINING .................................................................................................................................... 5
8. ANALYZING ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS ............................................................................. 6
9. DETERMINING APPROPRIATE PROTECTIVE MEASURES.................................................... 7
10. RESPIRATOR SELECTION......................................................................................................... 8
11. IDLH ATMOSPHERES............................................................................................................... 10
12. OXYGEN DEFICIENT ATMOSPHERES ................................................................................... 11
13. FIT CHECK AND TEST.............................................................................................................. 12
14. TEMPERATURE EXTREMES ................................................................................................... 13
15. EMERGENCY USE AND RESCUE RESPIRATORS ................................................................ 14
16. INSPECTION AND RECORDKEEPING .................................................................................... 14
17. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES .............................................................................................. 14
18. RECORDING RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................... 14
19. DISTRIBUTION .......................................................................................................................... 14
Page 3 of 14
1. SCOPE
Safety beside to play a fundamental role in the HSE IMS offers the common way to pursue the
This document establishes the basic requirements for the use of the respiratory protection and n
particular, when it is necessary to protect employees from respiratory illness associated with
industrial task.
This document outlines the minimum standard for use of respiratory protection. The program
applies to both company employees and contractors at all Company sites and operations.
The Minimum requirements outlined in this document are the eni e&p division minimum
Standard; any required specific work procedures or guidance should be elaborated by the
individual companies for their own particular operations and activities, including elaborating their
own written specific Respiratory protection programs.
specific rules and ensure compliance with the applicable regulations and legal requirements
applicable in the host country.
Requirements outlined in this minimum standard are intended to prevent occupational injuries
and illness from exposure to harmful atmospheric conditions. Respiratory protections primarily
consist of engineering controls that prevent atmospheric contamination, such as enclosure of the
operation, ventilation and substitution of less toxic materials. If effective engineering controls are
not feasible, being instituted or evaluated, or unable to reduce atmospheric contamination to
acceptable levels, then personnel shall use the appropriate respiratory protective devices.
• Company shall provide suitable respirators to protect the health of the workers, ensure
personnel using respirators have been trained and fit tested; respirators are used and cared
for properly and inspected as outlined.
• Employees shall use the respirators according to the training they have received, and
manufacturer specifications and recommendations and report and correct any deficiencies in
their use and care.
• The Company shall ensure that contractors and subcontractors, vendors are in compliance
with company requirements, best practices and standards, should verify contractors HSE
performance according to the Contractor (and/or Company) HSE MS, including
implementation of respiratory protection program.
This document is applied to all site activities requiring respiratory protection, carried out by
Company or Contractors’ workers in all eni e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies
and in DIME and DICS units.
Page 4 of 14
4. DEFINITIONS
• Company: An organization part of or connected to Eni e&p division such as: Geographic
Unit, Affiliate, Subsidiary or Joint Venture under Eni divisions/ Companies have an
operational control
• Risk: a term which combines the likelihood that a specified undesired event will occur and
the severity of the consequences of the event
• Standard: Rule, guideline, specification (including best practices, external information etc.),
or characteristics set out for activities or for results of such activities.
5. ESTABLISHING A PROGRAM
• Each Company shall appoint a competent person to perform the required assessments,
training, recordkeeping and testing associated with program implementation.
• All necessary medical evaluations, fit tests, training and equipment shall be provided to
employees at no cost.
• Written procedures shall be developed to address the specific implementation of the program
at the location.
6. EVALUATING PROGRAM EFFECTIVENESS
Annual evaluations shall be conducted to recommend improvements to program implementation.

Medical surveillance programs may be required to evaluate the overall effectiveness of the
program. Random inspections will ensure proper use and care, including cleaning and storage
and maintenance.
7. TRAINING
• Supervisors shall be trained in the nature and extent of respiratory hazards in the workplace,
basic respiratory protection practices, training requirements for respirator wearers, fit testing
and local regulations regarding respiratory protection.
• Respirator wearers shall be trained annually on respiratory hazards, and the consequences,
equipment selection, use and care, and the signs and symptoms of limitation for respirator
users and emergency use.
• They should also receive fitting instructions, including a demonstration and practice in how
the respirator is worn and in how to determine if it’s properly fitted (by using the
positive/negative pressure tests).
• Training on respiratory hazards shall include physical properties, toxicity and effects; and
detection methods. Information about the equipment provided, such as the capabilities and
limitation and selection criteria shall be covered.
• Training will clearly outline the differences between atmosphere supplying respirators and air
purifying respirators. Hands on training for donning equipment and seal checks shall be
included.
Page 5 of 14
• Employee training is documented on the "RESPIRATORY PROTECTION TRAINING" record

to be implemented and used.
8. ANALYZING ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS

• An atmosphere that is Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH) is one from which an
unprotected worker cannot escape without suffering permanent eye and/or respiratory
damage. Examples include oxygen deficient, or contaminants present in concentrations to
cause permanent damage during a single short term exposure.
• Oxygen deficient is less than 19.5% oxygen by volume. Physiological effects include
impaired coordination, nausea and vomiting, irregular breathing unconsciousness and death.
Atmospheres containing more than 23% oxygen by volume are considered oxygen rich and
are hazardous as well.
• Gas and vapor contaminants include asphyxiates, irritants, anesthetics, sensitizers, systemic
poisons and carcinogens.
The following effects are possible:
Contaminant Effect Examples
Asphyxiates Create an oxygen deficient atmosphere by diluting Nitrogen, hydrogen, helium, methane,
the oxygen in the air or interfering with the supply carbon monoxide, hydrogen cyanide,
or use of oxygen in the body. cyanogens, nitrides
Irritants Cause irritation an inflammation of parts of the Ammonia hydrogen chloride,

respiratory system, skin and eyes, as well as formaldehyde, sulfur dioxide, chlorine,
pulmonary edema. ozone, nitrogen dioxide, phosgene,
arsenic trichloride
Anesthetics Cause loss of feeling, may cause Benzene, chloroform, carbon

unconsciousness, injury to internal organs or tetrachloride, carbon disulfide
death.
Sensitizers Amplify the effects of other chemicals Isocyanates, epoxy resin systems
Systemic Damage organs and systems in the body Mercury, phosphorous, hydrogen sulfide
poisons
Carcinogen May eventually produce cancer Vinyl chloride, benzene
Page 6 of 14
Particulate contaminants include: dust, fog, fume, mist, smoke, biological particles and spray. The
following chart describes their effects on the body.
Classification Effect Example
Allergy producing Itching, sneezing and asthma Pollen, spices, mold spores, animal fur
Febrile producing Produce chills followed by fever Zinc fumes, copper fumes
Chemical irritants Irritation, inflammation, and ulceration in upper Acidic mists, alkalis
respiratory tract
Pulmonary fibrosis Produce nodules and inflammation in the lung, Quartz, asbestos
producing possibly leading to complications
Relatively inert May cause discomfort and minor irritation but Marble, gypsum
generally do not cause injury at reasonable
concentration
Systemic poisons Produce pathologic reactions in various Lead, manganese, cadmium

systems of the body
Carcinogens May eventually lead to cancer Asbestos, chromates, radioactive

particulates
• Combinations of contaminants may occur in the atmosphere.

• These combinations may contain entirely different substances or the particulate and vapor form
of the same substance.
• Combinations of contaminants can have a greater physiological impact than one contaminant
would have created individually.
• Some combinations may require extraordinary protective measures.
9. DETERMINING APPROPRIATE PROTECTIVE MEASURES
• Only personnel who are physically able to perform the work and have passed the medical
exam shall be assigned tasks requiring the use of respirators.
• A physician or other licensed health care professional shall certify whether a worker is capable
of wearing a respirator, based on the task assigned, results of the medical evaluation, the
medical history and results of the pulmonary function test.
• Pulmonary function tests shall be conducted annually. Personnel may be deemed qualified to
wear any respirator, wear certain respirators with restrictions or not qualified to wear a
respirator.
• Medical findings shall also be used to determine whether adequate respiratory protection is
being utilized. Information obtained shall remain confidential.
Page 7 of 14
The following safety precautions are taken when using a respirator:
• In noisy areas, establish an alternate form of communication between workers. Speech

transmission over short distances in relatively quiet areas is usually satisfactory.
• To prevent a face piece from fogging up in low temperatures, use an anti-fog compound to coat
the inside of the face piece.
• Do not use pure oxygen in a supplied-air respirator.
• Do not work in or near the flammable range of a gas or vapor.

• Select an air supply hose that resists chemicals to which it may be exposed.
10. RESPIRATOR SELECTION
• Employees shall only use respiratory equipment provided by the Company.

• The program administrator shall select respirators that meet internationally recognized
standards such as National Institutes of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH).
• Respirators shall be approved for use based on the manufacturer’s instructions.

• Approved respirators shall be used only for the purpose for which they were originally intended
and shall not be modified in any way.
Respirators shall be selected based on the process characteristics, materials handled during the
process, necessity for escape or rescue, the length of use, and protection factors.
Note: Contact the safety and health department if assistance is required in selecting
respiratory protection.
• A self-contained breathing apparatus rated for at least 30 minutes service time is used for entry
into an irrespirable atmosphere. This apparatus shall have a "remaining service life" indicator
or warning for compressed breathing air, (except when used for self-rescue).
• A combination self-contained breathing apparatus and airline respirator shall have either a
manual or automatic valve to switch to the self-contained air supply if the airline supply fails.
• A self-contained breathing apparatus rated for 15 minutes service time shall be used only for
emergency egress and not for rescue work or reentry.
• All employees in an area where the contaminant levels are expected to be higher than the level
designated for an air purifying shall use an airline respirator.
Page 8 of 14
The following outlines the process for respirator selection:
Step Action
1 Determine whether the respiratory hazard is a result of oxygen deficiency or a specific

contaminant.
2 If the hazard is a contaminant, identify the nature of the contaminant and its concentration.
3 Determine the class of respiratory protection required.
If the atmosphere is IDLH, select a positive pressure supplied air respirator. If the atmosphere is
oxygen deficient, select an atmosphere supplying respirator. If the atmosphere contains
adequate oxygen and is not IDLH, air purifying respirators may be selected, provided the
protection factor is sufficient.
4 Select a respirator based on employee acceptance factors, such as comfort, breathing
resistance, respirator weight and interference with vision or work.
The following outlines negative pressure respirator selection for atmospheres with
adequate oxygen and non-IDLH atmospheres:
Respirator Face Piece Quantitative Qualitative Respirator Protection Factors

Type Respirator
Protection Factors
Particulate filter Quarter or half mask 10 As measured on each person, max 100
Particulate filter Full face 100 As measured on each person with a max of 100. Max of
1000 if HEPA filter is used+++
Vapor or gas Quarter or half mask The lesser of 10 or max The lesser of an individual measurement with 100 max or
removing* use limit of cartridge or max use limit of cartridge or canister for vapor or gas**
canister for vapor or gas
Combo Quarter or half mask The lesser of 10 or max The lesser of individual measurement with max 100 or max
particulate filter use limit of cartridge or use limit of cartridge or canister for vapor or gas**
and vapor or canister for vapor or gas
gas removing*
Vapor or gas Full face The lesser of 100 or max The lesser of individual measurement with max 1000 or
removing* use limit of cartridge or max use limit of cartridge or canister for vapor or gas**
canister for vapor or gas
Combo Full face The lesser of 100 or max The lesser of individual measurement with max 100. Max
particulate filter use limit of cartridge or 1000 for HEPA. or max use limit of cartridge or canister for
and vapor or canister for vapor or gas vapor or gas**+++
gas
removing*++
Page 9 of 14
*NOTE: Vapor and gas removing respirators shall NOT be used for contaminants that lack adequate warning properties of
odor, irritation, or taste at concentrations at or above the permissible exposure limits.
** When available, cartridges with built in end of service life indicators shall be used.
++The type and mode of operation with the lowest respirator protection factor establishes the protection factor for the entire
respirator.
+++HEPA filter shall be used for radionuclide contaminants, contaminants with a permissible time weighted concentration
less than 0.05 milligrams per cubic meter or 2 million particles per cubic foot of air.
11. IDLH ATMOSPHERES

Positive pressure supplied air respirators shall be the only respiratory protection utilized in IDLH
atmospheres. The following chart outlines choices based on the protection factor and escape
options.
Respirator Type Face Piece Escape Provision Protection Factor
Air line, continuous Any, if eye irritant, worker my Yes, worker carries a self contained Maximum
flow or pressure wear full face respirator or auxiliary supply of breathable air 10,000 +
demand goggles
Airline, continuous Helmet, hood or suit Yes, worker carries a self contained Maximum 10,000 +
flow auxiliary supply of breathable air
Powered particulate Any respiratory inlet covering Yes, shall be able to breathe through the Max is 100 with filter and 3000 with
filter filter and pump or carried self contained HEPA+++
supplied air
Powered vapor or gas Any respiratory inlet covering Yes, shall be able to breathe through the The lesser of 3000 or max use limit
removing* filter and pump or carried self contained of cartridge or canister**
supplied air
Powered combination Any respiratory inlet covering Yes, shall be able to breathe through the The lesser of 100 with a dust fume or
particulate and vapor filter and pump or carried self contained mist filter;
or gas removing*++ supplied air 3000 with a HEPA filter, or ma use
limit of cartridge or canister for vapor
or gas**+++
Self contained Quarter mask Half mask Full Yes Maximum

breathing apparatus, face piece or mouthpiece with 10,000 +
pressure demand nose clamp
type open circuit or
positive pressure
closed circuit
*NOTE: Vapor and gas removing respirators shall NOT be used for contaminants that lack adequate warning properties of
odor, irritation, or taste at concentrations at or above the permissible exposure limits.
** When available, cartridges with built in end of service life indicators shall be used.
++The type and mode of operation with the lowest respirator protection factor establishes the protection factor for the entire
respirator.
+++HEPA filter shall be used for radionuclide contaminants, contaminants with a permissible time weighted concentration less
than 0.05 milligrams per cubic meter or 2 million particles per cubic foot of air.
Page 10 of 14
• Additional safety precautions while working in IDLH atmospheres include:

atmospheric testing equipment, ventilation equipment, the use of attendant(s) in a
safe area, safety harnesses and lifelines, rescue equipment, communications system
to accommodate the impairment caused by the respirator.
• Oxygen type open circuit self contained breathing apparatus shall not be used in
confined space where there is a possibility of fire or explosion.
12. OXYGEN DEFICIENT ATMOSPHERES
• Only respirators that provide an independent breathable atmosphere shall be used in

oxygen deficient atmospheres. Both positive pressure and negative pressure
supplied air respirators may be selected in oxygen deficient atmospheres.
• Workers shall leave the area immediately when the low pressure alarm on the
supplied air respirator is activated.
• Supplied air cylinders shall be tested in accordance with regulations. Supplied air
shall be of high purity and meet the specification for Type 1 Grade D breathing air as
outlined in ANSI Z86.1 or international equivalent. Locate intake for cascade
supplied air system away from exhaust.
A summary of negative pressure supplied air respirators is outlined below:
Respirator Face Piece Escape Quantitative Qualitative Protection Factor

Type Provision Protection Factor
Air line demand Quarter mask—if eye Worker may carry 10 As measured on each individual, but
irritation is possible, an auxiliary self limited to concentrations below the IDLH
may wear goggles contained supply of values
breathable air
Air line demand Full face piece Worker may carry 100 As measured on each person, but limited
and auxiliary self to concentrations below the IDLH values
contained supply of
breathable air
Hose mask with or Full face piece NA 10 As measured on each person, but limited
without blower to concentrations below the IDLH values
Self contained Quarter mask or half NA 10,with a full face piece or As measured on each person, but limited
breathing mask a mouthpiece/nose clamp, to concentrations below the IDLH values
apparatus demand the protection factor is 100,
open circuit or except when the respirator
negative pressure is used for mine rescue and
closed circuit recovery operation
Page 11 of 14
A summary of positive pressure air supplied respirators is outlined below:
Respirator Face piece Escape Provision Respirator Protection Factor
Air line continuous flow Any—goggles or a full face Worker may carry and Limited to concentrations below the IDLH values.
or pressure demand mask may be worn to auxiliary self contained With escape provision, the max protection factor is
type protect eyes supply of breathable air 10.000 +
Air line continuous flow Helmet, hood or suit Worker may carry and Limited to concentrations below the IDLH values.
auxiliary self contained With escape provision, the max protection factor is
supply of breathable air 10.000 +
13. FIT CHECK AND TEST

Perform respirator fit checks to select a specific type make and model of negative pressure
respirator for use by that individual. Repeat the respirator fit checks before entering a harmful
atmosphere.
• Workers shall not wear any head covering which may interfere with the face to face piece
seal.
• Facial hair is not permitted in the area of the face to face piece seal. Bangs and sideburns
shall not interfere with the seal as well.
• Persons requiring corrective lens may wear spectacles with temple bars that do not interfere
with the face to face piece seal or contact lenses. If necessary, special corrective lenses to
mount inside a full face shield may be necessary.
• Other factors to consider when selecting respirators are missing teeth or dentures, nose that
is inadequately closed by a nose clamp, scars, and hollow temples, protruding cheekbones,
skin creases or other unusual facial configurations.
The following steps outline how to perform a fit check:
Step Action
1 Don the face piece
2 Adjust the headband to the unit is snug with no distortion
3 Have the wearer simulate common work movements
4 Check the face fit—if the wearer is comfortable with the face piece and weight of the device and
the device doesn’t interfere with vision or breathing, proceed to step 5. If not, try other models or
brands.
5 Close the valve or cover the inlet with you hand, inhale gently until the face piece collapses
slightly. Hold breath for a few seconds. If the face piece remains collapsed, it is properly sealed.
6 Block the exhalation valve and breathe into the mask. If pressure can be built up inside the mask
without air leaking out between the mask and the face of the wearer, then there is a proper seal.
Page 12 of 14
Qualitative or quantitative fit tests shall be conducted as needed, at least annually to verify face to
face piece seal.
The following steps outline how to perform a qualitative fit test:
Step Action
1 Prepare the test environment containing a suitable agent, i.e. a tent with banana oil ampoules or
irritant smoke
2 Have the worker don and fit check the respirator then enter the tent
3 Instruct the person to mimic common work movements
4 If the person does not detect the agent, the test was successful
5 Continue with other models brands or types until a successful fit is achieved. Is some rare instances
where a face to face piece seal is unachievable, the individual shall only be assigned a positive
pressure respirator.
1. Quantitative fit testing requires introducing a harmless aerosol while in a test chamber and
measuring the concentration inside the chamber and inside the face piece. This requires
special equipment and should be outsourced if necessary.
2. Respirator fit tests shall be documented and maintained for the duration of employment. The
documentation shall include the date, operator, name of person tested, specific make and
model of the respirator tested; the type of test and the result.
14. TEMPERATURE EXTREMES

• Working in extreme temperatures creates stress and wearing a respirator applies additional
stress. Minimize health effects by selecting a low weight respirator offering low resistance to
breathing. Air line respirators are equipped with a vortex tube to cool the supplied air to the
respirator to prevent heat exhaustion.
• Extreme temperatures are hard on the face piece materials, causing distortion or premature
deterioration.
• Low temperatures may cause face piece fogging. Use lens coating to prevent obscured
vision. Freezing may also cause valves to stick open or closed, interfere with proper seals
and cause leaks due to metal contraction. Nose cups or vortex tubes to warm the air may be
necessary.
• Frequent inspection and maintenance shall be implemented to combat the effects of the
elements. When necessary, special accessories deemed shall be purchased to prolong the
life of the equipment.
Page 13 of 14
15. EMERGENCY USE AND RESCUE RESPIRATORS

• Consider the nature of the operation and the possible emergency situations that warrant
emergency use respirators.
• Consider the number and type of respirators appropriate for the operation.
• Emergency and rescue respirators shall be stored and maintained so that they are readily
accessible and operational when needed.
16. INSPECTION AND RECORDKEEPING

• Perform inspections before and after each use, inspect a respirator and maintenance
regularly to ensure each respirator wearer has a clean respirator in good operating condition.
• Employees shall clean and disinfect respirators prior to placing them in proper storage. Skin
irritations or infections may occur if respirators are not cleaned and disinfected after use.
• Disassemble and wash according to manufacturer’s instructions. Allow the respirator to
effectively dry to inhibit mold growth.
• Single use respirators shall be discarded after use.
• Do not mix parts (brands/ models) of respiratory protection equipment.
• Remove defective respirators from service immediately.
• Use only replacement parts specifically made for the respirator being repaired.
• Respiratory equipment shall be inspected prior to each use by the wearer and monthly by the
supervisor. Record the inspection date and the findings. Test rubber valves for deterioration
during inspections. Check high pressure hoses and regulators and pressure gauges and the
rated pressure and alarms on equipment for functionality.
• Hydrostatically test cylinders every 5 years.
• A centralized station shall be established to maintain respiratory protective equipment.


19. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
For Information:
Page 14 of 14
“Minimum Safety Standard on Safe Control, Storage and Use of Hazardous Materials”
Revision Sheet


2010
SGIAQ
Page 2 of 27
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE....................................................................................................................................................... 4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION ......................................................................................................................... 4
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES ....................................................................................................................... 4
4. DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 4
5. FUNCTIONS INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS ........................................................................................... 5
6. IDENTIFYING HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS AND PRODUCTS ............................................................... 9
7. LABELING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 10
8. TRANSPORTATION ............................................................................................................................... 11
9. FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS ...................................................................................... 12
10. GENERAL STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL CHEMICALS ....................................................... 12
11. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE CHEMICALS...................... 13
12. MAXIMUM CONTAINER SIZES FOR FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS......................... 14
13. STORAGE LIMITS FOR FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS.............................................. 14
14. SAFETY EQUIPMENTS FOR STORAGE OF FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS................................................. 14
15. FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID STORAGE ROOMS:...................................................... 16
16. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR REACTIVE CHEMICALS............................................................... 16
17. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR OXIDIZERS.................................................................................... 17
18. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR TOXIC CHEMICALS...................................................................... 18
19. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR PEROXIDIZABLE CHEMICALS.................................................... 18
20. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR FUEL TANKS ................................................................................ 19
21. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR CHEMICAL TANKS....................................................................... 19
22. INSPECTION AND IMPROVEMENT MONITORING.............................................................................. 20
23. PROTECTING AGAINST HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.......................................................................... 20
24. HEALTH SURVEILLANCE ..................................................................................................................... 21
25. EXPOSURE AND WORKPLACE MONITORING ................................................................................... 21
26. PROVIDING EMPLOYEE TRAINING ..................................................................................................... 22
27. “REACH” COMPLIANCE ....................................................................................................................... 22
28. HELPFUL LINKS: ................................................................................................................................... 23
29. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES............................................................................................................ 24
30. RECORDING RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................................ 24
31. DISTRIBUTION ....................................................................................................................................... 24
32. LIST OF ANNEXES................................................................................................................................. 24
Page 3 of 27
1. SCOPE
Safety besides to play a fundamental role in the HSE IMS offers the common way to pursue the Safety
of the Company Workers as well as Contractors and Local Communities.
The safety requirements discussed in this document are the eni e&p division minimum safety standard
and the policies, methods for identifying and inventorying hazardous materials and emergency response
consideration, and other information included in this document were compiled as general guidelines
from which Company, in conjunction with these minimum standard shall develop their own procedures
on the safe use, control and storage of Hazardous Materials for their own particular operations and
activities.
The purpose of the requirements’ outlined in this document is to ensure that information concerning the
hazardous materials used, handled, stored on Company site is provided to Company Employees and
affected Contract employees .
Any specific requirements not discussed in this document must be addressed with site specific rules
and ensure compliance with the applicable regulations and legal requirements in the host country.
This document provides guidance to the Company to establish and implement their own Hazard
Communication Program.
Note: All measurements, volumes, etc. may have been rounded up or down somewhat.
This document is applied to all site activities with the presence of Hazardous Materials, by Company or
Contractors’ workers in all eni e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies and in DIME and DICS
units.
4. DEFINITIONS
• Company: An organization part of or connected to eni e&p division such as: Geographic Unit,
Affiliate, Subsidiary or Joint Venture under eni e&p division/ Companies have an operational
control
• Flashpoint: The flashpoint of a liquid is the lowest temperature at which the liquid gives off
enough vapor to be ignited (start burning) at the surface of the liquid. Sometimes more than one
flashpoint is reported for a chemical. Since testing methods and purity of the liquid tested may
vary, flashpoints are intended to be used as guides only, not as fine lines between safe and
unsafe
• Corrosive chemicals: Any solid, liquid or gaseous chemical that burn, irritate or destructively
attack organic tissues, most commonly the skin
Page 4 of 27
• Flammable chemicals: Solid, liquid or gaseous chemicals that readily catch fire and burn in
the presence of oxygen
• Combustible chemicals: Solid, liquid or gaseous materials that burn in the presence of oxygen
• Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS): MSDS Contains detailed substance information. Supplied
with all hazardous substances by the supplier or the manufacturer. MSDSs shall also give
information on the physical and chemical nature of the substance and the precautions to be
taken when using it. Refer to minimum safety standard on the safe control , storage and use of
hazardous materials for more details (Ref B1)
• NFPA – approved: Approved by the US National Fire Protection Association
• Oxidizing chemicals: Any solid, liquid or gaseous chemicals that may cause or enhance the
combustion of other materials or readily react to oxidize combustible materials, generally by
yielding oxygen or some other oxidizing gas
• Pyrophoric chemicals: Any liquid or solid chemicals that will ignite spontaneously in air below
130ºF (54.4ºC).
• Reactive chemicals: Any solid, liquid or gaseous chemicals that react violently with water, or
are normally unstable and readily undergo violent changes without detonating, or form
potentially explosive mixtures with water, or generate toxic gases when mixed with water or
corrosive chemicals, or are capable of detonation or an explosive reaction
• Toxic chemicals: Any solid, liquid or gaseous chemicals that can cause damage to living
tissue, impairment of the central nervous system, severe illness or in extreme cases, death
when ingested, inhaled or absorbed by the skin
All the functions mentioned in this document are not referred to specific organizational roles, but
indicate operational involvements in the activity management.
Roles and responsibilities shall be defined by each organization adopting this standard and
customized for each project, in compliance with the Company regulations.
• Company Site Managers are responsible for ensuring that all Company employees and
contractors are aware of and work in accordance with the minimum safety standard outlined in
this document and any other requirements identified by Company as a result of implementation
of this minimum safety standard.
• Each Company Senior Management person should appoint a program administrator to identify
hazardous chemicals and methods of use, handling and storage and, maintain a register, and
implement a Hazard Communication Program to inform workers about the hazards and safety
precautions present in the workplace.
• The administrator should inform and instruct personnel on the hazardous properties of the
chemicals in the workplace, establish safe work procedures, ensure the availability of personal
protective equipment (PPE) to handle the chemicals, review material safety data sheets
(MSDS) of chemicals before they are introduced to the workplace, and schedule annual
refresher training when changes or deficiencies warrant.
• The administrator should also evaluate the program and notify personnel when procedural
changes are made.
• Each Company site/operation shall develop a written plan available to train employees and
contractors about hazardous materials in the workplace. The plan shall include the register,
guideline for labeling and other warnings, maintenance and distribution of MSDS and PPE, as
well as guidelines for non-routine tasks or unlabeled pipelines or containers found in the work
area.
Page 5 of 27
• Drivers transporting hazardous materials shall be licensed to do so by local authorities. They

shall also have MSDS for any hazardous materials on board and meet all local regulatory
requirements. A company vehicle carrying a chemical requiring an MSDS shall have a copy in
the vehicle.
• The degree of site compliance with local workplace hazardous substances regulations shall be
determined.
HSE Department
• Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) Department Representative shall assist and help
Managers, Superintendents and Supervisors in ensuring the correct and an effective application
of this minimum standard and preparing any specific procedures.
• To control how the substance is used; the risk must be assessed from the manner it is to be
used by means of Hazardous Materials Assessment.
Managers and Supervisors
• Manager and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring that all Company personnel, and
Contractor, Subcontractor and Vendors, work in accordance with these minimum safety
standard and any other requirements identified by Company as a result of implementation of
these safety standard.
• Managers and Supervisor shall ensure that copies of the MSDS's are available for employee
review at the operative site(s).
Company Employees, Contract Personnel and Vendors
• Company and contract employees are accountable for following and working in accordance with
company defined procedures and guidelines, hazardous material assessment, including the
requirements outlined in this document.
• The substance user shall not use any substance without an MSDS or a Hazardous Materials
Assessment.
Supplier or Manufacturer
• Company shall ensure that the supplier or manufacturer must supply a Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) for the substance. The MSDS should be dispatched along with the substance
and a copy sent to the Company HSE Department.
Purchasing /Material Department
• It is the responsibility of the purchasing and material department to ensure that a Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS's) are obtained for each hazardous chemical used or handled by
Company personnel and ensure that copies of MSDS's are provided to the HSE Department.
• When a hazardous chemical arrives at the Company site, the person ordering the chemical
shall ensure that the applicable MSDS is provided and available. He or she shall obtain the
MSDS before use of the chemical.
• Where there is a possibility of exposure to process chemicals/products, the Purchassing,

material department must furnish MSDS's on these chemicals, or provide the location and allow
access to them.
• The MSDS shall accompany each hazardous chemical and a copy shall be kept by the
Company HSE Department.
Page 6 of 27
• The MSDS shall also give the physical and chemical nature of the substance and the
precautions to be taken when using it.
• MSDS’s are required for each hazardous chemical used in the Company Sites.
• MSDS's are required for process chemicals and products in operating unit systems of Company
facilities where a potential for exposure of Company and/ or Contract employee exists.
• All hazardous chemicals present at a location that do not fall under the consumer product
exception are to have a MSDS which identifies the chemical product and each hazardous
ingredient.
• Chemical manufacturers and importers shall provide a MSDS when shipping a hazardous
chemical. If a MSDS missing from the location chemical register, the manufacturer shall be
contacted immediately for a copy of the MSDS.
• MSDS shall be kept in a location accessible to all workers. As part of the site orientation, all
personnel shall be informed of the location and availability of the MSDS, the purpose and type
of information to be found and how it is applicable.
• Contractors shall provide a list of all hazardous chemical they bring to the work area, present a
current MSDS for each chemical and demonstrate compliance with company policy and local
regulations with regard to chemical handling practices.
• The Company shall provide the Contractor with a list of all hazardous chemicals in the area the
contractor will be working and ensure a current MSDS is available.
• It is recommended that the MSDS are updated every 03 years when the formulation changes to
ensure the most up to date information is maintained on site and may be updated as required in
the local country.
• MSDS may be in the local spoken language or should be translated to the local spoken
language; in any case all employees and Contract employee must be informed of the hazards.
Company shall ensure any new chemicals shall be assessed by the Company HSE department with
assistance from the Health Department.
Material safety data sheets must contain information under the following headings:
• Name of Substance/Product;
• Substance/Product Composition;
• Hazards Identification;
• Fire fighting Measures;
• Precautions for safe handling, Storage and use including hygiene, repair and maintenance,
spill/leak cleanup;
• Personnel Protection;
• Stability and Reactivity;
• Environmental hazard information ;
• Transport Information;
• Name of Supplier/Manufacturer;
• Information on Ingredients;
• Emergency and first aid procedures;
• Primary routes of entry into the body, such as inhalation, ingestion, absorption;
• Acute and chronic health hazards, including signs and symptoms;
• Medical conditions aggravated by exposure;
• Accidental Release Measures;
• Exposure Controls;
• Physical/Chemical Properties;
• Toxicological Information;
Page 7 of 27
• Disposal Considerations;
The labelling and packaging of hazardous substances will be to International Regulations.
• A master file or Resister of all MSDS's on the Company Sites shall be maintained by common
or trade name, and location of such shall be made known to all employees and allow access to
them .
• MSDS or a computer database containing MSDS shall be readily available to employees,

contractors and third parties (e.g. local community, emergency services) in a format that is
easily understandable.
Page 8 of 27
6. IDENTIFYING HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS AND PRODUCTS
All hazardous materials may create temporary or permanent injury to health through one or more of the
following:
• Inhalation of gas, vapour, mist or dust.

• Absorption, skin contact with vapour, liquid or solids.
• Injection, skin contact with sharp, protruding, chemically-affected parts
• Ingestion (eating and swallowing)
Their effects on workers vary significantly and hazardous materials effects on individual people are difficult
that it is always predicted. However, caused damage does vary according to the exposure duration of
contaminant present and its amount.
Note: If there is no immediate effect, this is not an indication that the substance is
Harmless. If you are not sure, assume the chemical is hazardous and should not be used until you receive
confirmation from the manufacturer or supplier.
Substances classed as hazardous are defined as follows:
• Any substance which is classified as very toxic, toxic, harmful, corrosive or irritant.
• Flammable mixtures or substances.
• Substances with a Threshold Limit Value (TLV) or an Occupational Exposure Standard (OEL).
• Reactive or unstable liquids or substances.
• Dusts of any kind, if substantial concentrations exist in the air.
• Oxidisers.
• Any other substance hazardous to health existing at the worksite.
Main information and actions are:
• Information provided by the chemical manufacturers on the hazard evaluation of their products
will be the source of hazard determination for the chemicals used on the site.
• A complete review of the Chemical Substance Inventory and the related Health Hazard
Assessment of hazardous chemicals and products.
• Just as an internationally recognized reference, according to the U.S. OSHA Hazard

Communication Standard, 1910.1200(d)(5)(ii), any mixture that has not been tested for
carcinogenic properties is considered to be carcinogenic if it contains 0.1% or more of a
carcinogenic substance:
"If a mixture has not been tested as a whole to determine whether the mixture is a health hazard,
the mixture shall be assumed to present the same health hazards as do the components which
comprise one percent (by weight or volume) or greater of the mixture, except that the mixture
shall be assumed to present a carcinogenic hazard if it contains a component in concentrations of
0.1 percent or greater which is considered to be a carcinogen.
• A hazardous chemical is any chemical or mixture that presents a physical hazard or health
hazard. They are established by recognized scientific testing methods performed by the
manufacturer, importer, or other responsible party.
• Physical hazards are caused by chemicals that can explode, burst into flame, react or create
other harmful physical conditions. Health hazards are caused by chemicals that cause harm to
Page 9 of 27
the body. These include toxins, carcinogens, reproductive hazards or any agent that damages the
skin, lungs, blood, nervous system, mucous membrane or eyes.
• Company shall know what chemicals and products are present within their operations and
facilities, including what chemicals Contractors may bring to site for their work.
• All chemicals and products, hazardous and otherwise, shall be inventoried for each work area and
location. A chemical inventory shall be completed and maintained for each chemical/product or
chemical mixture.
• The inventory shall contain the common (brand or trade) name and the chemical name of the
product; the work area that uses the chemical and the amount used in normal operations, and the
quantity and location of the chemical at the location. The purpose of the chemical, verification that
the manufacturer’s label is affixed to the container and the MSDS is on file at the location shall
also be noted on the inventory.
• Information on chemicals present at a location is provided on the MSDS sheets shipped by the
manufacturer. Chemical inventory information can be obtained from purchasing records, shipping
and receiving records or physical audit. Because chemical and products might bypass normal
purchasing channels, a physical audit is necessary for verification.
• After the master inventory list is created, the administrator shall identify all hazardous chemicals/
products by referring to the chemical’s MSDS. Any chemical that is a physical or health hazard is
considered to be hazardous.
• Once the list is completed, it shall be kept up to date. Any new hazardous, materials introduced in
work areas shall be approved by the administrator and added to the list.
• Consumer products are exempt from the inventory, labeling, MSDS and training guidelines if the
products are packaged and labeled in accordance with applicable consumer products regulations,
the product remains in the original consumer packaging and the label is intact, the product is used
in the same frequency and duration and quantity as they would be by a public retail consumer,
and the products are used in a manner consistent with the use intended by the manufacturer.
7. LABELING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

• Manufacturers and distributor’s label tag or mark each container of chemical with the identity of
the hazardous chemical, appropriate hazard warnings, such as fire, reactivity and health
hazards and the name an address of the chemical manufacturer, importer, or other responsible
party to contact for additional information.
• For hazardous waste, labeling, tagging and marking requirements shall also satisfy local
transportation and safety regulations.
• Information on the label shall be in the appropriate local language, legible and conspicuously
displayed. If an incoming container has no label or is incorrectly labeled, the shipment shall be
rejected. Items already on premises without a label shall be brought to the attention of the
Company Management representative for identification and labeling.
• If the worker transfers a small quantity of a chemical or product from its original container into a
portable container for immediate use by the end or a work shift, the labeling requirements are
exempt.
However, labeling the temporary use container according to this minimum standard is a preferable best
practice and should be as follow:
• Secondary container should be labeled, tagged or marked with the identity of the hazardous
chemical and appropriate hazard warnings.
Page 10 of 27
• The identity may be any chemical or common name that is indicated on the MSDS and permits
cross reference.
• Storage tanks for fuel do not require individual labeling. However, the contents shall be
identified by an internationally recognized symbol for the fire hazard, appropriate signs and
other written information as required by local authorities.
• Prior to work on unlabeled pipes, the worker’s supervisor shall be contacted to identify the
chemical in the pipes. The worker shall review the MSDS for the chemical and follow all
precautions determined by the hazard analysis and any required permit to work.
• Warning signs shall be posted and maintained in hazardous chemical storage and work areas.
8. TRANSPORTATION
• Drivers transporting hazardous materials shall be licensed to do so by local authorities. They

shall also have MSDS for any hazardous materials on board and Transportation of all
dangerous goods must be carried out in accordance with all relevant local regulatory
requirements.
• Dangerous goods must not be loaded or unloaded from a vehicle without clearance from the
purchasing /Materials Department. The packaging will be in strict accordance with the
International requirements for packaging and transport of such goods.
The following examples come under this classification:
• Combustible and flammable gases, liquids and solids, compressed gases Corrosive liquids,
Magnetised, radioactive and oxidising materials, Poisonous articles – gases, liquids and solids,
charged lead acid batteries.
Storing Hazardous Chemicals
• Chemicals in inventory shall be stored in off-site warehouses. Limited quantities shall be issued
for normal operations.
• The manufacturer’s instructions for storage conditions should be carefully followed.
• Storage facilities shall be secure and protected from damage. They will be appropriate to the
substance they contain. They shall also be designed for easy access for fire fighting.
• The storage facility should prevent chemical containers from physical damage due to
Temperature extremes, moisture, corrosive mists or vapours and vehicles.
Stored hazardous substances shall be adequately segregated; segregation should be based on the
following elements:
• Quantity of materials stored.

• Physical state of the chemicals (solid, liquid or gas).
• Degree of incompatibility; and
• Known behaviour of the materials.
• All containers should be adequately and clearly labelled to indicate identity, precautionary
requirements and date for expiry, where relevant.
Page 11 of 27
• When disposed of, empty containers should be properly decontaminated. If this is impossible
the container must be appropriately labelled regarding the contents. Equipment sent for
servicing/repair etc which may also be contaminated should follow the same process.
• There should be a programme to assess safer alternatives to current hazardous chemicals /
substances.
9. FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS
• Flammable and combustible liquids are liquids that can burn. They are classified, or grouped as
either flammable or combustible, by their flashpoints. Generally speaking, flammable liquids will
ignite (catch on fire) and burn easily usually at normal working temperatures. Combustible liquids
have the ability to burn at temperatures that are usually above working temperatures.
• There are several specific technical criteria and test methods for identifying flammable and
combustible liquids. Under the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS),
flammable liquids have a flashpoint below 37.8°C (100°F). Combustible liquids have a flashpoint at
or above 37.8°C (100°F) and below 93.3°C (200°F).
• Flammable and combustible liquids are present in almost every workplace. Fuels and many
common products like solvents, thinners, cleaners, adhesives, paints, waxes and polishes may be
flammable or combustible liquids. Everyone who works with these liquids shall be aware of their
hazards and how to work safely with them.
Classification Term Flash Point Temperature (Flammable Liquid)
Flammable liquids shall be known as Class I liquids (Flammable Liquid Class I below 100°F (37.8°C),
Class I liquids are divided into three classes as follows:
1. Flammable Liquid Class I A below 73ºF (22.8ºC) and Boiling Point below 100ºF
(37.8ºC)
2. Flammable Liquid Class I B below 73ºF (22.8ºC) and Boiling Point at or above 100ºF
(37.8ºC)
3. Flammable Liquid Class I C below 100ºF (37.8ºC) and Boiling Point at or above 73ºF
(22.8ºC)
Classification Term Flash Point Temperature (Combustible Liquid)
Combustible liquids shall be divided into two classes as follows:
1. Combustible Liquid Class II below 140ºF (60ºC) or at or above 100ºF (37.8ºC) :

2. Combustible Liquid Class III at or above 140ºF (60ºC)
Class III liquids are subdivided into two subclasses:
3. Combustible Liquid Class III A below 200ºF (93.4ºC) or at or above 140ºF (60ºC)
4. Combustible Liquid Class III B at or above 200°F (93.4ºC)
10. GENERAL STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL CHEMICALS
- Label all chemical containers appropriately. If transferring chemicals out of their original container to
another container or if the original container label is illegible, follow the chemical labelling guidelines
as detailed in the Company Hazard Communication Program, WHMIS, COSHH or equivalent.
- The major concern regarding the use of hazardous chemicals is the potential for uncontrolled
release to the environment through spillage, and subsequent adverse effects on terrestrial, aquatic
and marine habitat and species, soil, groundwater quality and human health and safety.
Page 12 of 27
- The Company site management shall ensure that a site specific chemical Spill Response Program
procedure is established in order to minimize the potential health and safety effects on the user
/handler and the environment impacts.
- Ensure that its employees, and Contract employees, vendors, are knowledgeable of the procedures
contained in the Company Chemical Spill Response Program for emergency preparedness in the
event that any chemical container leaks or there is a chemical spill or release.
- Follow all precautions regarding the storage of incompatible chemicals. Consult the label and
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each chemical to ensure that you are familiar with the
chemical and how it should be handled, stored and disposed. Separate all chemicals into
compatible groups and store alphabetically within stored groups.
Note: See Appendix A and B for two charts concerning incompatibilities and compatibilities of various
chemical groups.
- Provide a definite storage place for each chemical and return the chemical to that same location
after each use.
- Avoid temporary storage of chemicals in the immediate work area, except for those chemicals
intended to be used by the end of the shift.
- Store volatile toxic chemicals and odorous chemicals in a ventilated cabinet approved for chemical
storage. The cabinet's associated electrical components shall be explosion-proof if flammable
materials are being ventilated. Locate the cabinet near exhaust equipment. Store other chemicals
inside a closable cabinet or on a shelf that has a lip to prevent containers from sliding off.
- Respect the storage temperature limitations as noted on the MSDS.
- Store all containers of liquids on compatible trays that are capable of holding the contents of the
container if it leaks, or at least 110% of the total volume stored within the tray. Store liquids on lower
shelves, if possible.
- Seal all chemical containers well to minimize the escape of flammable, corrosive, irritating or toxic
vapors or gases.
- Ventilation is required for chemicals that may release dangerous or damaging quantities of vapors
or gases which may be flammable, corrosive, irritating or toxic. Ventilation should be to a safe
atmosphere away from the immediate work area.
- For every chemical storage area, there shall be evacuation and emergency procedures to be
followed and fire extinguishers available in the case of personal exposure or a leak, spill or fire
within the room.
11. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE

CHEMICALS
- The storage area should be separated and protected so that a fire or spill in the storage area is not
likely to spread beyond the storage area.
- Store all flammable liquids and solids in NFPA-approved storage cabinets. Company HSE
Department will provide assistance to obtain the proper storage equipment if needed.
- Do not store flammable chemicals in any refrigerator unless it has been designed for that purpose.
Ordinary refrigerators contain spark sources that can ignite flammable vapors. If refrigerated
storage is needed inside of a flammable storage room, an explosion-proof refrigerator shall be used.
Use chemical storage refrigerators only for storing chemicals, never food or drink. Label these
refrigerators with the following signage:
NOTE: NO FOOD OR DRINK TO BE STORED IN THIS REFRIGERATOR
Page 13 of 27
12. MAXIMUM CONTAINER SIZES FOR FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS
The following container sizes, in litres, are the maximum allowable unless otherwise specified:
Container Class IA Class IB Class IC Class II Class III
Glass 0.5 1 4 4 4
Metal or 4 20 20 20 20
Approved Plastic
Safety Cans 7.5 20 20 20 20
NOTE: Single glass containers as large as 3.78 litres can be used, if needed, if the required purity would be
adversely affected by storage in a metal or approved plastic container, or if the liquid would cause
excessive corrosion or degradation of a metal or approved plastic container.
13. STORAGE LIMITS FOR FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS
The following limits apply to all Class B Occupancies with sprinkler systems and are the maximum
allowable. Contact the Company HSE Department for clarification if you have questions.
Liquid Class Flash Point Class Flash Point (°C) Amount Allowable (per 9.3
sq. m. area)
Class I Flammable Below 37.8 15.1 liters
(100°F)
Class II Combustible 37.8-59.4 (100- 15.1 liters
139°F)
Class IIIA Combustible 60-93.4 (140- 45.4 liters
200°F)
Class IIIB Combustible Above 93.4 Unlimited
(200°F)
14. SAFETY EQUIPMENTS FOR STORAGE OF FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS
- Safety Cans: Safety cans are containers that have built-in safety features for protecting flammable
liquids from exposure to high temperatures. This heat is transmitted to the contents, which is
transforming from a liquid to a gas and can produce a high vapour pressure. Safety cans are fitted
with a spring-loaded cap that allows these vapors to vent without bursting the can. The other safety
feature of a safety can is the flame arrestor that consists of a cylindrical wire screen. Vapors emitted
from a safety can/ may ignite when exposed to the flames of a fire. Since flames usually flash back
to the source of liquid, the flame arrestor serves as a heat dissipater. The temperature in the space
above the liquids in a safety can is lowered below the ignition temperature and ignition of the
contents is eliminated.
- Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets: Flammable liquid storage cabinets are designed to maintain
the temperature at the top of the cabinet interior below a specified temperature (usually under
165°C) when subjected to a 10-minute fire test. These cabinets usually have a limitation with
respect to the maximum allowable storage volume. It's important to note that not more than 240
liters of Class I and II liquids, nor more than 450 liters of Class III liquids may be stored in a cabinet.
The cabinet should also be conspicuously labelled with notices such as FLAMMABLE – KEEP
IGNITION SOURCES OR FIRE AWAY. All storage cabinets shall have self-closing doors that will close
the latch automatically when released. These doors shall not be blocked open. In all cases flammable
liquid storage cabinets should conform to applicable regulatory specifications.
Page 14 of 27
- Special Refrigerators: Special refrigerators that can safely store flammable liquids have a spark-free
interior such that all wiring and thermostat controls have been removed from the interior.
Page 15 of 27
15. FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID STORAGE ROOMS:
- Large quantities of liquids that need to be stored in specially designed storage rooms include those
with flash point temperatures at or below 93.4° C (200ºF) and include all liquids identified as
flammable liquids, ignitable liquids or combustible liquids in Class II or IIIA.
- An inside storage room that does not exceed 14 sq. m. in floor area is permitted to contain up to
81.5 litres per sq. m. of floor area within the room, if the room is separated from the building by
construction having at least one (1) hour fire resistance, and all openings between the room and the
building are protected by assemblies having a one (1) hour fire-resistance rating. If it is desirable to
increase the allowable storage capacity of such a room, the capacity can be increased up to
approximately 200 litres per sq. m. by providing the room with an automatic fire extinguishing
system.
- An inside storage room needs to be ventilated to prevent possible accumulation of flammable
concentrations of vapors from container leaks and spills. Recommended ventilation is from floor
level with a capacity of 0.3 cu.m. per minute of exhaust for each square meter of floor area in the
room, with a minimum ventilation of 4.25 cu.m. per minute.
- If there is dispensing in the room, there should be provisions for ventilating the dispensing operation
close to the points at which vapors are being emitted.
- If storage room containers of flammable and combustible liquids are larger than 18.9 liters in size, it
is necessary to provide barriers to prevent spills in the room from migrating outside the room. If
these containers hold Class I or Class II liquids, curbs or ramps are needed as barriers.
- Wiring and electrical fixtures located inside storage rooms shall be suitable for the hazards.
Explosion-proof (US National Electric Code Class I, division 2 or equivalent) electrical equipment is
required for prevention of explosions if large quantities of flammable liquids (Class I) are being
stored or dispensed. If only combustible liquids are being stored or dispensed, general use wire is
acceptable.
- If an inside storage room has an exterior wall, there are two additional recommendations: (a)
Exterior walls are required to provide ready accessibility for fire fighting; and (b) if Class IA or Class
IB liquids are dispensed or if Class IA liquids are stored in containers larger than 3.8 liters, the
exterior wall or roof should be designed to provide explosion venting.
- There is no need for explosion venting in a small room used only for storage or in a room used for
dispensing if adequate ventilation is provided.
16. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR REACTIVE CHEMICALS
- Consider the storage requirements of each reactive chemical prior to purchasing.

- Consult the label and MSDS in making decisions about storage of reactive chemicals.
- Use and store only the quantities of material you will need for immediate use.
- Cyanides and sulphides shall be stored in a location separate from acids or protected from contact
with acids.
- All acids shall be stored separately from all alkaline materials (bases).
- Date all highly reactive materials as soon as received and make sure the label states:
DANGER! HIGHLY REACTIVE MATERIAL
- Do not open a container of highly reactive material that is past its expiration date. Call the Company
HSE Department for assistance if needed.
- Consult with the Company HSE Department for disposal of highly reactive material prior to the
expiration date.
Page 16 of 27
- Segregate the following materials

- Oxidizing agents from reducing agents and combustibles
- Powerful reducing agents from readily reducible substrates
- Pyrophoric compounds from flammables
- Perchloric acid from reducing agents and combustibles
- Store reactive liquids in trays constructed of compatible materials which are large enough to contain
the contents of the bottles. Store perchloric acid bottles in glass or ceramic trays.
- Store materials that react vigorously with water away from any possible contact with water. If
chemicals are to be stored that are reactive if exposed to the air or water, they can safely be stored
in areas protected by other fire suppression.
- Temperature control or refrigeration shall be provided, as needed, for chemicals that deteriorate or
react if their temperatures exceed safe limits recommended by the manufacturer or person
synthesizing the chemical.
Store thermally unstable materials in a refrigerator with the following safety features: all spark-producing
controls are on the outside, a magnetic locked door, an alarm to warn when the temperature is too high.
- Assign responsibility for the storage areas utilized for highly reactive materials to one (1) primary
person and a backup person. Review this responsibility at least twice yearly.
17. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR OXIDIZERS
Oxidizing agents such as chlorates, perchlorates, peroxides, nitric acid, nitrates, nitrites and
permanganates represent a significant hazard because of their propensity under certain conditions to
undergo vigorous reactions when they come into contact with easily oxidized material such as metal
powders and organic materials like wood, paper and other combustible material. Mineral acids such
as perchloric acid, sulphuric acid and nitric acid, as well as other oxidizers, should be stored separate
from flammables and combustibles, by separate rooms, cabinets or break resistant containers. If large
bottles shall be stored in proximity of combustible materials, acid resistant trays shall be used to
prevent the oxidation of wood or corrosion of metal shelves.
Class I Oxidizer
Class I oxidizers will cause an increase of the burning rate of combustible material with which it
comes in contact. (Some examples of these include Hydrogen Peroxide (8-28%), Nitric acid (70% or
less) and silver nitrate).
Class II Oxidizer
Class II oxidizers will cause an increase of the burning rate or may cause spontaneous ignition of
combustible material with which it comes in contact. Contact the Company HSE Department if
quantities are stored in excess of 1,000 lbs. (Some examples include Hydrogen Peroxide (28-52%),
sodium peroxide, and calcium hypochlorite (50% or less by weight).
Class III Oxidizers
Class III oxidizers will cause a severe increase in the burning rate of combustible material with which
they come in contact, or will undergo vigorous self-sustained decomposition when catalyzed or
exposed to heat. Regulated quantities shall be stored only on the ground floor of a building with no
basement. Contact the Company HSE Department if quantities are stored in excess of 200 lbs.
(Some examples include Hydrogen Peroxide (52-91%) and ammonium dichromate).
Page 17 of 27
Class IV Oxidizer
Class IV oxidizers can undergo an explosive reaction when catalyzed or exposed to heat, shock, or
friction. Regulated quantities are permitted to be stored only in detached storage. Storage areas for
Class IV oxidizers shall be provided with a means to vent fumes in any type of emergency. Contact
the Company HSE Department for prior approval if the quantities to be stored may be in excess of 10
lbs.
18. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR TOXIC CHEMICALS
- Store chemicals known to be highly toxic, including carcinogens, in ventilated storage in

unbreakable, chemically resistant secondary containers.
- Keep quantities on hand at an absolute minimum.
- Label storage areas with appropriate warning signs, such as:
CAUTION! REPRODUCTIVE TOXIN STORAGE

-Or-
CAUTION! CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT STORAGE
and limit access to these areas.
- Storage areas for pesticides and other toxic chemicals should be secured so that unauthorized
personnel are kept out.
19. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR PEROXIDIZABLE CHEMICALS

- Some chemicals can form significant quantities of unstable peroxides after prolonged exposure to
air and light. Certain peroxides may detonate with extreme violence when they become
concentrated by evaporation or distillation, when combined with other compounds to yield a
detonable mixture or when simply disturbed by unusual heat, shock or friction.
Storage and handling procedures
- Each facility shall develop and maintain an inventory of the peroxidizable materials at the location.
The inventory should be reviewed every three (3) months, at which time samples from List I, three
(3) months or older, List II and List III samples twelve (12) months or older would either be tested for
peroxides or disposed of through the Company HSE Department. Quantities of peroxidizable
compounds should be purchased according to short-term needs to ensure that peroxide build-up,
which may accompany long-term storage, is minimized. Purchase in container sizes corresponding
to use requirements to minimize exposure to air from multiple openings of the container.
- All peroxidizable compounds should be stored away from heat and light. Sunlight is an especially
good promoter of peroxidation. Protection from physical damage and ignition sources during
storage is also essential. Particular care should be given to ensure tight closure on storage
containers. Loose or leaky closures may permit evaporation of storage material, leaving a
hazardous concentration of peroxides in the container.
- Most common container materials, such as steel, stainless steel, copper, nickel, aluminium, baked
phenolic linings and ceramics, are suitable for containers; however, they shall be clean and free of
metal oxides because iron or copper oxides may actually promote peroxide formation.
- The use of oxidation inhibitors is especially important in the safe handling of peroxidizable materials.
Hydroquinone, alkyl phenols, aromatic amines or similar materials are recommended by the
manufacturers as being effective in preventing peroxide formation during storage.
• Compounds that are suspected of having very high peroxide levels because of visual
observation of unusual viscosity or crystal formation or because of age should be considered
extremely dangerous.
• The precautions taken for disposal of these materials should be the same as for any material
that can be detonated by friction or shock.
Page 18 of 27
• It is of the utmost importance that the container not be opened. The act of opening the
container could detonate peroxide crystals under the container cap or other closure.
• Peroxidization in a chemical process may not only be a serious hazard because of the
explosion potential, but may also affect lower yield and produce unwanted impurities.
20. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR FUEL TANKS
- Position tanks or take other steps to minimize potential damage by impact.

- Oil stored within 10 meters of a watercourse, surface or groundwater, and 50 meters from a well or
bore hole shall be bounded (double skinned), have secondary containment with an impervious
barrier to the ground and continuous monitoring.
All tanks and ancillary equipment shall be situated within an oil tight secondary containment system, such
as bund and be of sound construction.
- The secondary containment system shall provide storage of at least 110% of the tanks maximum
capacity.
- All tanks in excess of 2500 litres shall be bounded or be situated with a bund.
- Oil storage installations shall comply with local building codes.
- Fire wall protection shall be required if the installation is within 760mm from a boundary or 1.8 m
from a building
- Plastic tanks shall be fully supported on a concrete base which should extend 300 mm beyond the
tank walls.
21. STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR CHEMICAL TANKS
- Chemical storage tanks shall be designed by a professional engineer to meet local regulatory
requirements as well as best industry practices.
- Chemical storage tanks shall be manufactured according to the latest relevant industry standard
such as API, ASTM, CSI, NFPA etc…
- Chemical storage tanks shall be installed according to sound engineering principles. Proper ground
preparation shall be included in the installation. As-built documents shall be maintained upon
completion of the installation for future reference.
- Chemical storage tanks shall be operated according to industry best practices and in compliance
with local regulatory requirements.
- Chemical storage tanks shall be inspected on a risk based frequency and in accordance with the
timetable and methods outlined in Appendix C.
- Chemical storage tanks shall be maintained in good working order, to avoid harmful consequences
to life and property. Maintenance records will be kept to verify that maintenance is carried out
according to industry best practice as well as for analysis and planning purposes.
- Pipes, fittings and connections, base plates and brackets, control and monitoring systems and tank
venting systems shall be included in the overall operation and maintenance plan for the storage
tank.
- Access to the tank shall be restricted to authorized personnel. Adequate security measures based
on the characteristics and the location of the tank shall be implemented accordingly.
- Insulation shall be removed from the tank where moisture or product collects to prevent damage. If
the vapor barrier is damaged, remove and repair the section.
- Tanks shall be built to relevant industry fire code and labelled as such.
- Tanks shall be installed or remodelled to incorporate adequate Confined Space Entry fall protection,
based on the requirements outlined in the Company Confined Space Minimum Standard.
Page 19 of 27
22. INSPECTION AND IMPROVEMENT MONITORING
The HSE department representative shall ensure that an inspection and monitoring program is
developed as part of the Company Chemical Management procedure, this can be achieved by mean
of comprehensive inspection checklist to be used, ensure the following but not limited to:
• Proper signage in place (no smoking, flammable, toxic ...etc) .

• Adequate fire extinguisher provided at the chemical storage area and in accordance with fire
protection requirement.
• Complete, updates MSDS available and kept on site.
• Incompatible material stored separately.
• All chemical stored in suitable container and protected from sun light.
• All chemical container labelled as to their content as per MSDS.
• Suitable drip trays clean and proper housekeeping around the chemical storage area.
• Hazardous Chemicals and its containers are protected from damages.
• Waste empty drums, containers collected and removed on daily basis.
• Workers handling chemicals are provided with adequate PPE
• HSE training and adequate toolbox talks are provided for concerned workers.
• Supervisors, workers are ware of spill response procedures.
23. PROTECTING AGAINST HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
23.1. Control Measures
• Hazardous substances shall be prioritised, and those with the most potential to cause harm
shall be controlled in an appropriate and systematic manner to ensure employee exposure to
these substances is minimised.
• There shall be written procedures for the use, storage and disposal of identified high priority
hazardous substances. The procedures should be audited every 12 months.
• When possible, less hazardous alternative products shall be substituted for those containing
hazardous substances. Control measures to reduce or restrict exposure shall be developed
and implemented at the work location. Appropriate PPE shall be worn as determined by the
hazard analysis.
• Only those chemicals and products necessary shall be kept in work areas. Material shall be
stored appropriately when not in use. Empty containers, waste products and unusable
hazardous materials shall be disposed of in a timely manner and appropriately.
• Piping systems and chemical storage shall be regularly inspected to verify that they are not
leaking.
• Whenever possible, closed systems shall be used to store and transfer chemicals to eliminate
exposure. Proper ventilation shall be used for all chemical handling, whether a closed system
is utilized or not. Ventilation systems shall be inspected and maintained to ensure proper
working condition.
The control measures from the hazard analysis shall be done in the following order of priority:
• Removal of the substance by altering the process;
• Substituting with a safe or safer substance, or using it in a safer form;
• Totally enclosing the process;
• Using partial enclosure and extraction equipment;
Page 20 of 27
• General ventilation;
• Using safe systems of work and handling procedures;
• If personnel are exposed or injured by hazardous chemicals and require treatment, consult the
MSDS and give the information to medical service providers.
• Using Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
23.2. Personal Protective Equipment
• Company shall consider introducing limitation in the use of PPE (eg respirators, dust masks
and protective clothing) as protection methods.
• Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is to be considered as a last choice and should only
be used in those situations and circumstances where other control methods cannot control
exposure to the hazardous substance.
• Example of includes but not limited to , working in an open area outside in the fresh air so that
harmful gases can be vented rather than working in a confined space where breathing
equipment PPE is needed.
23.3. Emergency Showers
• Emergency water showers shall be provided in all locations were acids or corrosive liquids,
chemicals are used or handled.
• Ensure that the emergency showers are tested on regular and on a determined basis and
before any work involving the handling of acids or corrosive liquids.
• Requirements of Emergency showers in the plant operation shall be defined during the design
of the installation and details provided in the HSE Design philosophy.
24. HEALTH SURVEILLANCE
• Company Health Department may consider health surveillance of employees when required
and where there is potential exposure to substances. The decision to carry out surveillance
shall be taken when preparing the Hazardous Materials Assessment and analysis.
• Health surveillance can include biological monitoring, medical surveillance, enquiries about
symptoms, and examinations by medical personnel.
25. EXPOSURE AND WORKPLACE MONITORING
The assessment as to potential for adverse exposure during routine and non-routine or intermittent
operations or tasks should take into account:
• Inhalation as airborne particulate, gases or vapours;

• Skin contact with hazardous substances; and
• Ingestion of hazardous substances.
If a risk assessment indicates the need, a workplace monitoring programme shall be used to evaluate
potential exposures and to develop controls that will protect the health of all workers (including contractors).
Note: The Company Industrial Hygiene Programme shall comply with requirement outlined in the ENI (e&p)
Standard Doc No. 1.3.1.36 Industrial Hygiene Standard / Section 2.3 -Industrial Health Programme Design).
Page 21 of 27
26. PROVIDING EMPLOYEE TRAINING
• Chemical hazard information and safe handling training shall be provided to personnel who
may be exposed to hazardous chemicals in their duties prior to assignment and when a new
hazard is introduced.
• Additionally ,Company shall ensure ALL employee and Contractor are provided with adequate
information’s on hazardous material and their safety requirements during the first in house
HSE Orientation training .
• Training shall include information on the hazards, labeling, safe use, handling and storage
requirements for the chemical; the methods for detecting the release of hazardous substances,
personal protective measures, the location and use of the chemicals, the appropriate MSDS for
each substance and where to locate it; as well as the details of the local hazardous chemical
handling plan.
• Certain employees shall receive respiratory protection training in association with the
hazardous chemicals encountered in the workplace, based on the hazard assessment for the
task.
• Training records shall be maintained and include the date, instructor, personnel in attendance
and a summary of the information and chemicals covered.
• Personnel assigned a task that they do not normally perform involving hazardous chemicals
will require additional training prior to completing the task.
27. “REACH” COMPLIANCE
REACH is an acronym for Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals. This
European Union regulation managed by the European Chemicals Agency(ECHA) will impact
industries worldwide because it also applies to substances contained in objects (defined as articles)
imported into Europe. Substances of very high concern (i.e. endocrine disruptors or others that cause
very serious and irreversible effects on humans and the environment) will be subject to
authorization—if viable substitutes are available, they must be used.
• Certain substances because of the established unacceptable risk to humans or the environment
(such as the ban on asbestos, or azo-dyes) continue to be restricted under REACH.
• During the phased in implementation, manufacturers and importers of chemical substances are
encouraged to pre-register by December 1 2008, in order to benefit from postponed phase in
deadlines.
The implementation schedule is as follows:
• Pre-registration—June 1 to November 30 2008
• Registration of chemicals greater than 1000t, 100t N:R50-53 (14 chemicals agreed as the
priority chemicals listed as very high concern), and greater than 1t CMR (900 chemicals
classified as carcinogenic, mutagenic and toxic to reproduction)—Deadline November 2010
• Registration of chemicals from 100t-1000t—Deadline June 2013
• Registration of chemicals from 1-10t for substances that are either non phased in, potentially
CMR, persistent bioaccumulative and toxic (PBT) or very persistent and very bioaccumulative
(vPvB)—Deadline June 2018, also phased in chemicals from 10-10t.
Notes:
♦ Phased in chemicals are listed in the European Inventory of Existing Commercial
Chemical Substances (EINECS) or that have not been marketed for the last 15
years.
Page 22 of 27
♦ Non-phased in chemicals are the manufactured after the entry into force of
REACH.
♦ Food and waste are exempt from REACH.
♦ Substances occurring in nature, such as minerals, ores and ore concentrates etc
are not required to be registered as long as they are not chemically modified.
♦ Polymers are exempt, since they are usually not very hazardous, but in certain
circumstances, monomers in polymers must be registered.
• A technical dossier outlining the properties uses and classification of a substance, as well as
guidance on the safe use is required for registration of substances in quantities greater than 1t.
• A chemical safety report (CSR) is required for substances in quantities of 10t or more. The
chemical safety report is used to determine whether substance is PBT or vPvB. The report
utilizes exposure scenarios that describe how the substances are manufactured or used during
their lifecycle (made known to the manufacturer by downsteam users) and risk management
measures to humans and the environment.
• The European Commission supports businesses affected by REACH handing out free of charge
a software application International Uniform Chemical Database (IUCLID) which simplifies
capturing managing and submitting data on chemical properties and effects. http://iuclid.eu/ .
• Companies can submit data together if the agree on the CSR. One lead registrant submits the
info on behalf of the other. Opting out once the study is underway is also possible, it agreement
cannot be reached on the data.
• A system is in place to assist registrants find others to share data to avoid duplicate testing.
The Substance Information Exchange Forum (SEIF) requires registrants of the same phase in
substance to share existing data.
• Downstream users of a substance that has not been pre-registered may ask the Agency to
extend the pre-registration period by six months to give them more time to find a supplier or pre-
register the substance themselves. Downstream users have the right to make their uses known
to their suppliers to be included in the identified exposure scenarios for chemical safety
assessments.
• New tests are only required when it is not possible to provide the information any other
permitted way. The Agency also invites third parties to submit information to avoid the need for
additional testing.
• The European Union is currently developing a separate law to regulate the classification
labeling and packaging of substances and mixtures set out in the United Nations Globally
Harmonized System of the Classification and Labeling of Chemicals (UN GHS)
• The goal of the UN GHS is simple, one chemical same label world wide. Adopting this labeling
system within the company prior to legislative mandate shall be considered a best practice for
hazardous material handling.
28. HELPFUL LINKS:
1. www.eChemPortal.eu a global portal to information on chemical substances
Page 23 of 27
2. http://echa.europa.eu/ European Chemicals Agency—for extensive official

guidance on the new system
3. http://www.synapsistech.com/reach-guide/ How to get your products ready for
REACH: A Guide for Article Manufacturers
4. http://www.ehscentre.org/ REACH Helpdesk and resources centre
5. http://www.hse.gov.uk/ghs/ Information on the UN GHS


31. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
For Information:
32. LIST OF ANNEXES
ANNEX A: CHEMICAL INCOMPATIBILITY CHART
ANNEXB: CHEMICAL COMPATIBILITY CHART RELATED AND COMPATIBLE STORAGE GROUPS
ANNEX C: STORAGE TANK INSPECTION SCHEDULE
Page 24 of 27
ANNEX A
CHEMICAL INCOMPATIBILITY CHART
NUMBER CHEMICAL GROUP DO NOT STORE WITH GROUP NUMBERS
1 Inorganic Acids 2-8, 10, 11, 13, 14, 16-19, 21-23

2 Organic Acids 1, 3, 4, 7, 14, 16-19, 22
3 Caustics 1, 2, 5, 7, 8, 13-18, 20, 22, 23
4 Amines and alkanolamines 1, 2, 5, 7, 8, 13-18, 23
5 Halogenated compounds 1, 3, 4, 11, 14, 17
6 Alcohols, glycols, glycol ethers 1, 7, 14, 16, 20, 23
7 Aldehydes 1-4, 6, 8, 15-17, 19, 20, 23

8 Ketones 1, 3, 4, 7, 19, 20
9 Saturated hydrocarbons 20
10 Aromatic hydrocarbons 1, 20
11 Olefins 1, 5, 20
12 Petroleum oils 20
13 Esters 1, 3, 4, 19, 20
14 Monomers, polymerizable esters 1-6, 15, 16, 19-21,
15 Phenols 3, 4, 7, 14, 16, 19, 20

16 Alkylene oxides 1-4, 6, 7, 14, 15, 17-19, 23
17 Cyanohydrins 1-5, 7, 16, 19, 23
18 Nitriles 1-4, 16, 23
19 Ammonia 1-2, 7, 8, 13-17, 20, 23
20 Halogens 3, 6-15, 19, 21, 22
21 Ethers 1, 14, 20
22 Elemental phosphorus 1-3, 20
23 Acid anhydrides 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 14, 16-19
Page 25 of 27
ANNEX B
CHEMICAL COMPATIBILITY CHART RELATED AND COMPATIBLE STORAGE GROUPS
ORGANIC FAMILY
Acids, anhydrides, peracids
Alcohols, glycols, amines, amides, imines, imides
Hydrocarbons, esters, aldehydes
Ethers, ketones, ketenes, halogenated hydrocarbons, ethylene oxide
Epoxy compounds, isocyanates
Peroxides, hydroperoxides, azides
Sulfides, polysulfides, sulfoxides, nitrites
Phenols, cresols
INORGANIC FAMILY
Metals, hydrides
Halides, sulfates, sulfites, thiosulfates, phosphates, halogens
Amides, nitrates (except ammonium nitrates, azides
Hydroxides, oxides, silicates, carbonates, carbon
Sulfides, selenides, phosphides, carbides, nitrides
Chlorates, perchlorates, perchloric acid, chlorites, hypochlorites, peroxides, hydrogen peroxide
Arsenates, cyanides, cyanates
Borates, chromates, manganates, permanganates
Nitric acid, other inorganic acids
Sulfur, phosphorus, arsenic, phosphorus pentoxide
Page 26 of 27
ANNEX C
STORAGE TANK INSPECTION SCHEDULE
Legend: P=Periodic Inspection (monthly)
E=External Inspection by Certified Inspector (years)
I=Internal Inspection (years)
L=Leak test (years)
Bunded with
Secondary
Size (gallons) Containment or Secondary No Containment
Continuous Containment
Monitoring
1-1100 prefabricated P P P, E&L 10
1101-5000 P P, E&L 10 P, E&L 5, I 10 or P, E 5, L 2

prefabricated
5001-30,000 P, E 20 P, E 10 & I 20 or P, E&L 5, I 10 or
prefabricated P, E 5 & L 10 P, E 5, L1
30,001-50,000 P, E 20 P, E&L 5, I 15 P, E&L 5, I 10
Field Erected P, E 5, I 10 P, E 5, I 10 P, E 5, I 10
Portable containers P P Prohibited in Company operations
Page 27 of 27
“Minimum Safety Standard on Safeguarding from Rotating Equipment”
Revision Sheet


2010
SGIAQ
Page 2 of 9
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE......................................................................................................................... 4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION............................................................................................ 4
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES.......................................................................................... 4
4. DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................. 4
5. GENERAL GUIDELINES............................................................................................. 5
6. BASICS OF MACHINE GUARDING............................................................................ 6
7. HAZARDOUS MECHANICAL MOTIONS.................................................................... 6
8. HAZARDOUS MECHANICAL ACTIONS .................................................................... 7
9. EQUIPMENT SAFEGUARDS ...................................................................................... 7
10. TRAINING.................................................................................................................... 9
11. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ........................................................................... 9
12. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................ 9
13. RECORDING RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................. 9
14. DISTRIBUTION............................................................................................................ 9
Page 3 of 9
1. SCOPE
This document establishes general indication for the achievement and preservation of a High Safety Standard
for all figures directly or indirectly involved in the field operations.
Industrial equipment and machines introduces hazards in to the workplace, which can injure or kill workers if
not properly identified and mitigated.
It is the responsibility of the Company to ensure all rotating equipments to be used in the Company sites are
properly designed and safeguarded, Company shall ensure that all hazards associated to rotating equipment
or machines and with their use are adequately identified and addressed, preventative measures and safe
operating practices are communicated to the workers.
Company shall ensure contractors and subcontractors, vendors are complying with Company Requirements,
ensure all Contractor personnel knows and complies with this minimum safety standard , ensure that the
Contractor has adequate safety procedures in place. It is the responsibility of the employee to use the
equipment correctly and only when trained and authorized.
The Minimum safety requirement outlined in this document are the ENI (e&p) minimum safety standard; any
specific requirements not discussed in this document must be addressed with site specific rules, procedure
and ensure compliance with the applicable regulations, standards and legal requirements in the host country.
This document is applied to all site activities involving rotating equipments, carried out by Company or
Contractors’ workers in all eni e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies and in DIME and DICS units.
4. DEFINITIONS
• Company: an organization part of or connected to Eni e&p division such as: Geographic Unit, Affiliate,
Subsidiary or Joint Venture under Eni e&p division’s operational control (more than 30% share or relevant
business direction.
supports to production or drilling activities.
• Risk: a term which combines the likelihood that a specified undesired event will occur and the severity of
the consequences of the event
Page 4 of 9
• Authorized person: means a person approved or assigned by the management to perform a specific
duty or be at a specific location at the workplace
• Equipment: means any piece of machinery not described as a tool. Equipment includes building
systems equipment, compressors, pumps etc
• Machine tool: means any piece fixed or tabletop machine used to cut, shape or alter materials
• Power tool: means a portable machine tool
5. GENERAL GUIDELINES
• Grinding, cutting and drilling of metal and wood can generate airborne particles. Always wear eye and
face protection when performing these tasks. Respiratory protection may also be required, based on
the nature of the particulate.
• Sturdy closed toe safety shoes protect feet from flying objects and heavy objects that can crush.
Metatarsal guards may be required for pipe handling and similar tasks.
• Hearing protection may be required while operating machinery, if high noise levels are present.
• Do not use personal audio equipment while operating machinery that could obstruct sounds of
persons in distress or equipment abnormalities.
• Use push sticks or other approved methods to keep hands away from moving parts of machinery.
• Turn off the machine and use a brush or dowel to remove chips from the machining area.
• Clean up spills with absorbent materials to prevent slips. Brush area clean; avoid compressed air
because it can pose eye hazards by generating hazardous flying particles.
• Do not leave machines running unattended.
• Gloves protect from various hazards in the workplace, but may pose an additional threat if used near
rotating parts. Remove or bind loose fitting clothing and long hair. Remove watches, and other jewelry
before working with rotating equipment.
• NOTE: Medical alert bracelets should be worn with tight fitting bands that hold the bracelet snugly to
the skin.
• It is recommended that operators only operate machine tools when a second person is within sight or
earshot of the tool user. This is an essential requirement in the case of personnel who get caught in
machinery or suffer traumatic injury. (Note: This does not apply to portable power tools.)
• The second person does not need to know how to operate the equipment, only how to turn off the
equipment and call for emergency assistance.
• Do not operate portable power tools by engaging a trigger lock device. Always manually engage the
ON/OFF switch such that, in an emergency releasing the switch will stop the machine.
• All portable power tools shall have a constant pressure switch (dead man switch) that will shut off the
power when pressure is released.
Page 5 of 9
• Special hand tools for placing and removing material shall be such as to permit easy handling of
material without the operator placing a hand in the danger zone. Such tools shall not be in lieu of
other guarding required, but can only be used to supplement protection provided.
• Employees using hand and power tools that are exposed to the hazards of falling, flying, abrasive,
and splashing objects, or exposed to harmful dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, and gases shall use the
particular personal protective equipment necessary to protect them from the hazard. All personal
protective equipment shall meet the requirements and be maintained in accordance with the
Company requirements or established standards.
• The RPM of a wheel shall always exceed the RPM rating of the grinder on which it is used. RPM
rating shall be marked legibly on grinders.
6. BASICS OF MACHINE GUARDING
• Any machine part, function, or process which may cause injury shall be safeguarded. Where the
operation of a machine or accidental contact with it can injure the operator or others in the
vicinity, the hazard must either be controlled or eliminated.
• The point of operation where the work is performed on the material, such as cutting, shaping, boring
or forming of stock is a potential mechanical hazard and in need of safeguarding.
• The power transmission apparatus, which is the components of the mechanical system that transmit
energy to the part of the machine performing the work, is a potential hazard and requires safeguards.
These components may include flywheels, pulleys, belts, connecting rods, couplings, cams, spindles,
chains, cranks and gears.
• All other moving parts of the machine that move while the machine is working pose potential hazards.
These hazards can include reciprocating, rotating and transverse moving parts, as well as feed
mechanisms and auxiliary parts of the machine.
• Safeguards shall be ordered and installed with the new equipment. If used equipment is purchased,
required safeguards shall be retrofitted prior to placing the equipment in service. Shop made
equipment shall include equivalent safeguards.
7. HAZARDOUS MECHANICAL MOTIONS
• A wide variety of mechanical motions and actions present hazards in the workplace. Recognizing
them is the first step to protecting workers from the dangers they present. These can include the
movement of rotating members, reciprocating arms, moving belts, meshing gears, cutting teeth, and
any parts that impact or shear.
• Rotating motions, even smooth, slow rotating shafts can grip clothing, hair or other loose articles and
cause severe injury. The hazard increases when bolts and projecting keys or set screws are exposed
on rotating parts.
• Nip point hazards are also caused by rotating equipment. Parts that rotate in opposite directions in
close proximity or parallel to each other is common on equipment with intermeshing gears and rolling
mills.
Page 6 of 9
• Tangentially moving parts, such as the point of contact between a power transmission belt and its
pulley, a chain or a sprocket, or a rack and pinion, create nip points.
• Nips points can also occur between rotating and fixed parts which create a shearing, crushing or
abrading action. Examples are spoked hand wheels or flywheels, screw conveyors, or the periphery
of an abrasive wheel and an incorrectly adjusted work rest.
• Reciprocating motions such as parts moving up and down or back and forth have the potential to
strike, catch, pinch, or shear a worker.
• Transverse motions, or movement in a straight continuous line, create hazards because workers may
also be struck, caught, pinched or sheared by the actions of a moving part.
8. HAZARDOUS MECHANICAL ACTIONS
• Cutting action involves rotating, reciprocating or transverse motion. The danger of cutting action
exists at the point of operation where injuries can occur and flying scrap material can strike the eyes
or face. Examples include saws, boring, drilling, turning lathes or milling machines.
• Punching action results when power is applied to a slide (ram) for the purpose of blanking, drawing,
or stamping metal or other materials. The danger of this type of action occurs at the point of operation
where stock is inserted, held and withdrawn by hand.
• Shearing action involves applying power to a blade in order to trim or shear metal or other materials.
The hazard occurs at the point of operation where stock is inserted, held and withdrawn.
• Bending action results when power is applied to manipulate material causing it to change shape.
Examples are power presses and tubing benders. The hazard occurs where the point of operation
where stock is inserted, held and withdrawn.
9. EQUIPMENT SAFEGUARDS
• All major equipment shall be subject to a risk assessment as part of an overall process risk
assessment to ensure that equipment guarding requirements are identified. This assessment shall be
completed prior to installing and putting the equipment into operation. This assessment shall take into
account routine start-up and shut down, as well as unplanned interruption of operation.
• Safeguards shall prevent contact with the hazard, be securely attached to the machine, protect the
machine from falling objects, create no new hazards and ideally would allow for safe lubrication. To
remove a guard from a machine, it has to be authorized by the competent person, under the use of
PTW System.
• In addition to guarding moving parts, equipment design or layout should also address other hazards
such as electrocution, noise, vibration, use of hazardous chemicals, pressure or and ergonomic
hazards.
• Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) shall be used on all cord and plug electric power tools.
• Fuel powered tools shall not be used indoors unless approved by Company HSE Department. Shut
down fuel powered tools and equipment prior to refueling, servicing or maintenance.
Page 7 of 9
• All large machinery/equipment shall be properly anchored and hard wired according to local or
international electrical code. For example, large drill presses shall be anchored to the floor of the
shop, and hard wired to an isolating ON/OFF switch.
• As determined by risk assessment, some equipment may require installation of emergency stop
controls. Careful attention must be paid to the down stream effects of emergency stops to ensure
activation of an emergency stop device does not create a worse hazard in another part of the
process. In this respect the risk assessment may require use of a process Failure Modes Effect
Analysis (FMEA) type assessment.
• Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, chains, or other reciprocating,
rotating or moving parts of equipment shall be guarded if such parts are exposed to contact by
workers or otherwise create a hazard
• Ensure that all machine and tool guards are installed in place, in good working order, properly
adjusted and most importantly, used for their intended purpose. Equipment that is missing designed
guards shall be tagged “OUT OF SERVICE” until such time as the guards are properly replaced.
• When power operated tools are designed to accommodate guards, they shall be equipped with such
guards when in use.
• When equipment cannot be safeguarded,such as a rotating kelly bar on a drilling rig,the following
additional precautions shall be taken to prevent injury :
1. Establish and clearly mark the danger zone around the rotating equipment.
2. Develop, communicate and enforce procedures to ensure workers do not enter the danger zone.
3. Consider sensors to activate alarms or emergency stops when the danger zone is breached by
personnel or equipment.
4. Keep hoses, cables, lanyards and equipment away from rotating equipment .Enforce the
prohibition of items that can be caught in rotating equipment, such as loose clothing, long hair,
jewelry, scarves etc.
• It is required to keep in place all guarding systems provided by the manufacturer of

equipment/machinery to protect workers from inherent hazard associated with the operation of
rotating machinery. Covers for pulleys and v-belts, grinding disc guard etc., are examples of guarding
systems.
• Electrical guarding systems shall be in order and operable. Bonding and earthling are essential to
electrical safety. Electrical equipment is earthed first for protection of personnel and second for the
protection of equipment. Guarding of stationary and mobile equipment shall be within the limits
recommended by the relevant standards and codes. Moreover, earthing shall be checked and
measured frequently and on a routine basis.
Page 8 of 9
10. TRAINING
• The most elaborate safeguarding system cannot offer effective protection unless the worker knows
how to use it and why. Specific and detailed training is therefore a crucial part of any effort to provide
safeguarding against machine related hazards. Only trained personnel should work around/on
rotating equipment.
• Operator training shall include hands on instruction in identification of the hazards of the equipment;
the safeguards, and how they provide protection from the hazards for which they are intended, and
how to properly use the safeguards and the reason for them. Workers shall be also trained on the
procedure to report when there are missing or damaged or inadequate safeguards on the equipment
in their working areas.
• Training shall also include under what circumstances safeguards can be removed, and by whom.
Workers shall be instructed not to operate equipment with damaged missing or inadequate
safeguards.
• Training shall be conducted prior to a work assignment involving use of equipment, when new
safeguards are put into place or when new equipment is introduced to the workplace.
11. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
• Machine tools, machine equipment and power tools shall be routinely inspected to verify that they are
not damaged, that the controls function as designed, and that all guarding and shields are securely
installed and adjustable. Routine service including cleaning, lubrication, preventive maintenance and
adjustments can prevent performance and safety problems.
• Only authorized personnel are permitted to service equipment.
• Service equipment only when all energy sources are secured in accordance with the Lockout Tag out
Program requirements.

of the document.

14. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
For Information:
Page 9 of 9
“Minimum Safety Standard on Excavation in Construction”
Revision Sheet


2010
SGIAQ
Paragraph 13.3 page 20 changed “four soil types” with “ three soil types”
Page 2 of 28
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE.................................................................................................................................................................4
2. FIELD OF APPLICATION ...................................................................................................................................4
3. INTERNAL REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................4
4. DEFINITIONS ......................................................................................................................................................4
5. APPLICABILITY TO ENI E&P ACTIVITIES........................................................................................................5
6. FUNCTIONS INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS .....................................................................................................6
7. GENERAL EXCAVATION REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................................8
8. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................11
9. ACCESS, INGRESS AND EGRESS .................................................................................................................12
10. CROSSINGS......................................................................................................................................................12
11. EXCAVATIONS HAZARDS...............................................................................................................................12
12. PROTECTION SYSTEM....................................................................................................................................18
13. SOIL CLASSIFICATION....................................................................................................................................19
14. UPDATING RESPONSIBILITIES......................................................................................................................20
15. RECORDING RESPONSIBILITIES...................................................................................................................20
16. DISTRIBUTION..................................................................................................................................................20
17. LIST OF ANNEXES ...........................................................................................................................................20
Page 3 of 28
1. SCOPE
This document establishes the requirements and minimum safety standard for excavation works in order to:
• ensure safety of the workers involved in earth excavation and define the relevant safety protection
systems and Safe work practices related to excavation.
• outline the required safety and prevention measures necessary in the performance of an excavation work.
• ensure the safety of the public (where this is appropriate)
Further increases in safety will be achieved by applying a rigorous Risk Assessment process
This document is applied to all excavation activities during on shore construction, carried out by Company
or Contractors’ workers in all eni e&p division subsidiaries and affiliated companies and in DIME and DICS
units.
4. DEFINITIONS
• Company: an organization part of or connected to eni e&p division such as: Geographic Unit, Affiliate,
Subsidiary or Joint Venture under eni e&p division’s operational control (more than 30% share or
relevant business direction.
• Company Site: Refer to any offices, premises, onshore location, offshore platform and any other
offshore supports to production or drilling activities.
• Adjacent Structure Stability: refers to the stability of the foundation of adjacent structures whose
location may create surcharges, changes in soil conditions, or other disruptions that have the potential
to extend into the failure zone of the excavation
• Sides”, “walls”, or “faces: means the vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a result of trenching
or excavation work
• Failure: means the movement or damage of a structural member or connection that makes it unable to
support loads
• Hazardous Atmosphere: means an atmosphere that is explosive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive,
oxidizing, irritating, oxygen deficient, toxic, or otherwise harmful that may cause death, illness, or injury.
• Ingress and Egress: mean "entry" and "exit" respectively, and refer to the safe means for employees
to enter or exit
• Protective System: means a method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material that could
fall or roll from an excavation face into an excavation, or from the collapse of adjacent structures.
Protective systems include support systems, sloping and benching systems, shield systems, and other
systems that provide the necessary protection
• Ramp: means an inclined walking or working surface that is used to gain access to one point from
another. A ramp may be constructed from earth or from structural materials such as steel or wood.
• Shield or Shield System: means a structure used in an excavation to withstand cave-ins and which will
protect employees working within the shield system. Shields can be permanent structures or portable
Page 4 of 28
units moved along as work progresses.

• Shoring or Shoring System means a structure that is built or put in place to support the sides of an
excavation to prevent cave-ins.
• Stable Rock means natural solid mineral material that can be excavated with vertical sides that will
remain intact while exposed.
• Unstable soil means earth material, that because of its nature or the influence of related conditions,
cannot be depended upon to remain in place without extra support, such as would be furnished by a
system of shoring
• Structural Ramp: means a ramp built of steel or wood, usually used for vehicle access. Ramps made
of soil or rocks are not considered structural ramps
• Support System: means a structure such as underpinning, bracing, or shoring, which provides support
to an adjacent structure, underground installation, or the sides of an excavation
• Surcharge: means an excessive vertical load or weight caused by spoil, overburden, vehicles,
equipment, or activities that may affect stability
• Angle of repose: means the greatest angle above the horizontal plane at which material will lie without
sliding
• E&I: mean Electrical and instrumentation
5. APPLICABILITY TO ENI E&P ACTIVITIES
It is known that most of the construction activities are involving earth excavation, for foundations, drains,
sewers, and installation and repair of utilities lines, etc. These can vary greatly in depth and may be only a few
centimetres deep on the one hand or be very deep and very dangerous.
There are many potential hazards associated with working in excavation and trenches, their related accidents
account for large percentage in the construction industry, it is estimated that there are many fatalities every
year in construction industry related to excavation and trenching work.
Probably excavation accidents and fatalities most frequently involve cave-ins of excavations or trenches, a
cave-in occur when walls of an excavation collapse.
But also accidents and fatalities may result from a variety of other accident types to be taken into account in
any excavation and trenching activities including utilities damages, electrocution ,workers falling into
excavations, falling objects , crushing and striking hazards created by mechanized equipment and material ,
vehicular accidents, and hazardous atmosphere, drowning .
All of these Hazards however can be controlled and minimized through adequate planning, training, and with
implementation of adequate protective systems and safe work practices.
In addition to fatalities, injuries and property damages caused due to unsafe excavation and trenching are
costly in terms of direct and indirect cost to the construction contractors and the project owners.
Pre-job survey is required to prevent unnecessary and additional cost due to any changes after the work has
begun.
Excavation and Trenches work is an essential operation of the construction process; they vary considerably;
therefore each present its own set of unique challenges and associated hazards.
This minimum safety standard is applicable to all excavations, and earthwork in eni e&p division Onshore
operation, including existing and new sites (all sites shall be barriered such that public have no access).
Company activities where Earth Excavation could be undertaken can be broken down in four main area of
activity:
Page 5 of 28
1. Exploration (e.g. Excavation work during Seismic activities, Excavation work during construction activity
associated with drilling of exploration wells).
2. Development (e.g. ONSHORE Construction, Excavation work during construction activity associated
with drilling of development wells).
3. Production. (e.g. Excavation work associated with replacement and repair of utility lines or any other
type of excavation in Gas & oil processing plant and facility, revamping, plant expansion etc).
4. Decommissioning (e.g. Earth excavation work associated with decommissioning of plant and facility
etc).
This document is the minimum safety standard; any required specific procedures or guidance should be
elaborated by the eni e&p division companies for their own particular operations and sites, including
elaborating their own written excavation procedure and/or any required specific procedures.
Any specific requirements which are not discussed in this document shall be addressed with site specific
rules and ensure compliance with the applicable regulations and any legal requirements applicable in the
host country.
Note: This Standard does not cover method of excavation for any End User / Contractor planning to
excavate adjacent to or above / below an existing Company Gas or oil transport pipelines.
Company shall review and approve Method statement which outlines method of excavation and the
requirements for any End User / Contractor planning to excavate adjacent to or above / below an existing
Company- Gas or oil transport pipelines service or other utilities line .
The work includes:
• Hand excavation for all any activity within 1m around, above or below a Pipe Line or Cable or other
buried services.
• Hand controlled pneumatic rock breaking using Jack Hammers for all activities between 1m and 3m
distance from the buried services.
• Mechanical trenching including Mechanical Rock Breakers which may be used for a distance
greater than 3m away from the service Gas& Oil pipelines and other buried high voltage electrical
cable or other services.
Roles and responsibilities shall be defined by each organization adopting this standard and customized for
each project, in compliance with the Company regulations
6.1. Company Site Management
• Appointment and approval of a designated competent Person(s) to oversee excavation operation within
the construction site or where excavation work are performed. He will be responsible for implementing,
enforcing, administering, and monitoring all the earth excavation works.
• Ensure adequate resources are provided to facilitate safe execution of excavation and ensure
contractor has adequate resources and suitable equipments to ensure safe execution of the
excavations including site restoration.
Page 6 of 28
• Ensure compliance of contractors and their subcontractors with all safety requirements for excavation
work, and implementation of this Standard and any other site specific safety requirements not
discussed in this document.
6.2. Designated Person
• Ensure all excavation works are only preformed with the approval from all relevant authorities in the
form of a Permit to Work.
• He is responsible for implementing, enforcing, administering, and monitoring all the earth excavation
works.
• Ensure all buried services and E&I cables are identified and prominently marked in area before the
commencement of excavation.
• Ensure proper and effective shoring system or any other required protective system is installed on all
deep excavations.
• Ensure emergency and rescue measures including necessary rescue equipment are in placed when
deep excavation is being performed.
• Methods of evaluating the site and conducting inspections ;
• Evaluation and selection of protection methods and soil classification.
6.3. Contractor & Subcontractor
• The Contractor or Subcontractor shall ensure that no excavation work shall be carried out without the
issue of an excavation Permit and only when strict precautions are observed.
• Ensure adequate resources are provided to facilitate safe execution of excavation, Contractor or
subcontractor shall provide adequate ad competent supervisor to monitor the excavation work, and it’s
the Contractor and/or subcontractor responsibility to ensure adequate coverage in the site is provided in
terms of construction and HSE supervisions.
• Work in an excavation shall, at all times, be under the immediate supervision of a competent person
who is authorized to modify the shoring or sloping in accordance with good construction excavation
standards.
• Ensure operators of plant and equipment are trained, qualified and possessed current valid license to
operate the type and class of plant or equipment utilized in the excavation.
• Provide proper and effective shoring system to excavation and properly designed shoring system to
deep excavation.
• Perform detection for cable and underground services within excavation area prominently marked or
pegged on the surface where buried services are detected.
• Provide and observe all safety and prevention measures indicated in the Permit to Work, the hazards
and risk identified in the Risk assessment and this minimum safety standard to facilitate a safe
excavation operation.
• Ensure all hazards, risks and safety measures are effectively communicated to the workers and
operators involve in excavation work during the safety toolbox talk and Training.
6.4. Plant and Equipment Operator
• Identify location of buried services within the excavation area.
Page 7 of 28
• Ensure a permit to work for excavation has been issued and displayed before commencing the
excavation work.
• Follow all safety and prevention measures in the course of excavation.
• Proceed with care when excavating near buried services or E&I cables.
• Inform supervisor in the event of exposing a buried services, incident or accident and excavation work
shall cease.
7. GENERAL EXCAVATION REQUIREMENTS
7.1. Excavation & Trench

a) Excavation : means any man made cavity or depression in the earth’s surface, including its sides, walls
or faces, formed by earth removal and producing unsupported earth conditions by reasons of the
excavation. If forms or other structures are installed or constructed in an excavation so as to reduce the
dimension measured from the forms or structure to the side of the excavation to 15 feet (4.5 m) or less
(measured at the bottom of the trench), the excavation is considered to be a trench.
b) Trench: when used as a noun means a narrow excavation made below the surface of the ground. In
general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench at the bottom is not greater than
15 feet (4.5 m).
7.2. Excavation Control
In preparation of excavation works a Risk Assessment shall be carried out addressing all the potential
Hazards that may be present. The first step shall be to assess if trenchless technology such as impact
moling or directional drilling can be used to avoid traditional trenching
A method statement shall be written by a competent person and communicated to all persons involved in
the work.
7.2.1. Permit to Work for Excavation
• Before the application of a permit to work for excavation, the Contractor or its Subcontractor will perform a
detection of E&I cables and buried services within the excavation area. Physically marked or pegged on
the ground to indicate the presence of electrical & Instrument cables and buried services detected and
indicate also in the services and utilities drawings of such E&I cable & buried services detected.
• Design a safe and effective shoring system including details of materials to be used.
• A permit should be duly completed and submitted 24 hours (or as defined in the local procedure of the
Company) prior to the actual commencement date to the Competent Person or his designate for
assessment and approval. Above documents (drawings) should be submitted together with the completed
permit to work, in addition to the Excavation clearance certificate (see 10.2.3. Excavation Clearance
Certificate).
• Upon approval and issuance of a permit to work for excavation, Contractor or its Subcontractor will
conduct short briefings to all workers and operators involved in the excavation operation at the work area,
on safety and preventive measures and emergency rescue procedure and equipment available.
• Approved permit will be prominently displayed either on the cabin of excavation plant or machinery or
within close proximity to the excavation area. Permit is valid for a period specified therein and on the area
indicated.
• Distribution of PTW copies should follow Company PTW Minimum Standard[Ref.B3]
• Permit will be considered void and null during and after inclement weather. The Competent Person or his
Page 8 of 28
designate will perform an inspection on the excavation area before a permit is re-validated.
7.2.2. Excavation Safety Checklist
• A Joint Inspection by the Contractor and Subcontractor HSE Representative and Excavation performing
Supervisor (using Excavation Safety Checklist Form ) to determine that no recognizable conditions exist
that would expose employees to injury from possible moving ground before work is permitted in or
adjacent to excavations.
• The excavation safety checklist should be completed and signed by the Contractor & subcontractor HSE
Representative, this checklist in addition to the Excavation clearance certificates and Gas Testing
certificate in case of confined space PTW required shall be considered as supporting document for the
Excavation PTW to be issued for the work.
A sample Inspection Checklist is included in Attachments C- Excavation Inspection Checklist.
7.2.3. Excavation Clearance Certificate
• An Excavation Clearance Certificate defines administrative requirements that shall be followed for
authorization of excavation, trenching, burying, pile driving and any other operations, which could damage
covered or buried pipelines, cables, or utilities. The procedure also ensures that excavations and trenches
are constructed in a safe manner; this certificate ensures appropriate communications take place and
different departments are consulted before the issue of the PTW.
A sample inspection Excavation Clearance Certificate is included in Attachments D -Excavation

Clearance Certificate.
7.3. Design and Planning of Excavation Work
Factors to be taken into consideration in the design & planning of excavation work are:
• nature of the soil ;
• area history (Waste Issues – Hazardous Substances)
• weather & moisture conditions;
• depth/size of excavation;
• method of excavation;
• proximity to other structures, services, sources of vibrations;
• proximity to public
• duration ;
• dewatering systems ;
• disposal of spoil
• ease of loading and unloading goods
• site lighting
• use of Tools and Equipment
• Occupational Health issues like:
Page 9 of 28
o noise
o temperature
o PPE
o vibration
o manual handling
o welfare
• In the process of performing an excavation work, it is often required to assess the ground condition when
determining the type of shoring required as well as the identification of E&I buried services to prevent injury
to person and damage to services.
• The supervisor in charge shall determines whether underground installations, such as sewer, water, fuel,
electric lines, telecommunication lines, or plant service lines, will be encountered. If so, the approximate
locations are marked and employees involved in the work operation are advised of the underground
installations.
• When the excavation work approaches the approximate crossing or parallel location of an underground
installation and danger of accidental contact or disturbance is possible, the exact location will be determined
by appropriate means before proceeding. When it is uncovered, adequate protection will be provided for
the existing installation.
• Trees, boulders, poles, and other surface encumbrances that may create a hazard to employees involved in
excavation work are removed or made safe before excavating begins.
7.4. Inspection and Examination
Where evidence of a situation that could result in a possible cave-in, indications of failure of a protective
system, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions are detected , exposed employees shall be
removed from the hazardous area until the necessary precautions have been taken to ensure employee
safety.
Before approving and issuing of a permit to work for excavation and after the completion of an excavation, the
Competent Person or his designate together with the contractor & Subcontractor will perform an inspection of
the excavation area. The inspection items will include the following:
• location of E&I cables and buried services prominently marked and protected.
• prevention measures such manual digging made to expose and determine exact location and
depth of buried services.
• barrier erection of at least 2 m away from known buried services.
• attendance of a full time supervisor during mechanical excavation.
• cable markers and concrete tiles are re-instated after excavation.
• Inspection will be called before trench is backfilled.
• the respective Contractor, Subcontractor working on the excavation area performs a daily
inspection.
• all excavations shall be reinstated to the original site conditions after the completion of the work.
• upon completion of exploration and similar operations, temporary wells, pits, shafts, etc, shall
be backfilled.
7.5. Condition Change Monitoring
Ground and environmentally conditions shall be continuously monitored for change, the Competent Person
(e.g. Civil Engineer) or his designate will perform the inspection on the excavation area after inclement
Page 10 of 28
weathers and other natural disaster such as earthquake, typhoon or sandstorm for the purpose of re-
validating the permit to work for excavation.
8. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
• All personnel involved in excavation work shall be trained in accordance with the requirements of
this Standard. Training shall be provided before the employee is assigned duties.
• Training of the all personnel involved in the excavation work should be in classroom session with
use of adequate training material.
• Refresher training course will be provided every year or as necessary to maintain knowledge or
skills to safely work within or in the vicinity of excavations.
• Operators of excavation plant and machinery shall receive sufficient training and holds current valid
license of the type and class of assigned.
8.1. Workers Training
All employees involved in excavation works shall be trained on the following requirements:
• Requirements of the Excavations standard
• Permit to Work application, requirement and its limitation.
• Excavation Hazards and Assessment.
• Shoring and Sloping system.
• Removal, Storage and Placement of spoil, materials, tools and equipment.
• Access, Ingress and Egress.
• Barrier and Stop Block.
• Lighting.
• Ventilation and Atmospheric Monitoring.
• Emergency and Rescue.
8.2. Competent Person Training

In addition to worker training, a competent person (s) shall also receive training to include:
• Requirements of the Excavations standard
• Soil Classification
• Methods of evaluating the site and conducting inspections.
• Evaluation and selection of protection methods.
• Ensuring compliance with this Standard.
• Requirements under additional applicable Standard such as Confined Space and working at
height.
Page 11 of 28
9. ACCESS, INGRESS AND EGRESS
When employees are in trenches 4 feet (1.22 m) or more in depth, a safe means of access will be provided
and located so as to require no more than 25 feet (8 meters) of lateral travel.
Where Ladders are used, they should extend 3 feet (1meter) above the excavation.
Workers shall not be in the excavations while plant and machinery are operating.
All movements around the excavation shall be at a distance, and stop blocks shall be provided to prevent
over run and driving in to the excavation.
Employees are not permitted to enter an excavation unless proper egress or access is provided; this will
consist of a stairway, ladder, or ramp securely fastened in place where employees are working. The following
applies:
• Metal ladders.
• Ladder used will be adequately secured.
• Timber ladder will not be used in an excavation pit.
• Steps or stairs cut on excavation slope.
• Steps will be protected from erosion.
• Handrails shall be installed.
• All persons shall be able to get to their workplace and work there safely.
• All access routes shall be in good condition and clearly signposted.
10. CROSSINGS
1. Trenches will be crossed only where safe crossings have been provided.
2. Where walkways or bridges are provided across excavated areas, they shall have standard guardrails,
mid rails and toe boards. (Top rail: 42 inches – 1 m – and mid rails: 21 inches – 0.5 m – ).
Access to, from and over excavation area should be adequately considered and provided for the following types
of vehicles:
• Excavated soil removal vehicle.
• Material transportation vehicle (Mobile Cranes, Lorries and Forklift).
• Emergency vehicle (Fire Engine and Ambulance).
• Normal passenger vehicle.
11. EXCAVATIONS HAZARDS
Neither the shallowness of an excavation or the appearance of the ground should be automatically taken as
indications of safety, despite appearances however, the removal of soil causes pressure relief and introduces
conditions which lead to soil failure.
Careful attention shall be given to activities involving excavation and trenching, all the critical steps in the
Page 12 of 28
activities shall be defined including assessment of associated Hazards; hence adequate control measures
shall be established and implemented as appropriate. This will be achieved through adequate Risk
Assessment [Ref.B1] and hazard identification.
11.1. Cave In Hazards
Probably the most frequent hazard is cave-in, a cave-in occurs when walls of an excavation collapse.
Cave-ins occur suddenly too quickly for a worker to react and they are most likely to occur in unprotected
excavations where:
• The excavation is made in unstable or previously disturbed soil ;
• Excessive vibration of mechanized equipment or vehicle traffic near by the excavations;
• Additional Loads located near the edge of excavations, in general due excavation equipment or
excavated material placed to close to the edge;
• Water accumulation in the excavation or trenches ;
• Changes in weather conditions, ( e.g. unexpected heavy rain , rainwater or hot, dry conditions
increase the chances of soil failure);
11.1.1. Safety Measures
• Employees shall be protected from cave-ins by an adequate protective system except when
excavations are made entirely in stable rock or when the excavations are less than 5 feet (1.5 m) in
depth and examination of the ground by a competent person provides no indication of a potential cave-
in.
• Removal of accumulated water in the excavation after rain, this can be achieved by using dewatering
pumps to pump water out of the excavation before workers enters it, (see relevant Paragraph in water
accumulation Hazards).
• Re–routing vehicle traffic when possible, maintaining only the required heavy construction equipment
near the excavation.
• Keeping the excavated materials at least 2 m from the edge of excavation.
• No load, plant or equipment should be placed or moved near the edge of any excavation where it is
likely to cause the collapse of the side of the excavation.
• Other construction plants including mobile crane should be placed at least 02 meters away from the
edge of an excavation. In addition to the above, steel plate of sufficient thickness should be used to
spread the load of the plant imposed on the shoring.
11.2. Falling Hazards
Excavations and trenches present a potential falling hazard, for that reason adequate fall protection and
prevention measures shall be taken to prevent workers, vehicle, and mobile equipment from falling into
excavation.
• Excavations in which persons are working and into which a person is liable to fall shall be protected from
falling by means of excavation barriers. Even trenches shallower than 2 meters have the potential for
drowning; in addition, protruding rebar could, if fallen on, cause a fatal injury.
Note: It is worth to consider that as a good safety practice, protection barriers shall be erected where workers
(or members of the public) could fall and injure themselves.
Page 13 of 28
• Open manholes and excavations will be clearly marked “Hole Cover Do Not Remove” (In the
appropriate languages), and surrounded by suitable barriers. Such holes will remain covered so far as is
reasonably practicable when immediate access is not required.
• All temporary excavations of this type should be backfilled as soon as possible.
• Signage in the form of safety signs, symbols, lights, barrier tape, caution notices are recommended.
• Banks man will be provided for deep excavation when operators are not able to see the base of
excavation. Banks man plays an essential role when both top and bottom excavation is being carried
out concurrently.
• Warning lights and warning signage will be installed on excavation (regardless of depth of excavation)
wherever located adjacent to public access and vehicular access ways.
• Adequate lighting of the correct voltage will be provided for deep excavation.
11.2.2. Excavation Barriers:
• Effective barricades will be erected and installed by the Contractor & Subcontractor and the excavation
performing supervisor working within the barricaded area.
• Barricades shall not be removed by any person without the permission of the Subcontractor or task
performing supervisor working within the barricaded area and after consultation with the HSE
representative.
• If the excavation is to remain open after dark, warning lights shall be erected around the excavation to
warn others of its presence.
• Barricades will be erected so that accesses ways are not obstructed. However, in the event when this is
not possible, access will be diverted before the erection of barricades.
• Barricades should erected to prevent person from falling into depth such as excavation pit, manhole and
etc , Barricades should be at least 1 meter in height and consist of upper and an intermediate guard rail,
square and level and able to withstand an impacts force of at least 200 pounds (90kg) on the upper
most rails .
• Warning barricades “warning tape” are normally provided around small excavation where less likely for
worker to pass by / fall in), they shall be kept back a minimum of 6 feet (2 meters) from the edge of
excavations.
11.3. Spoil & Material Hazards
To protect workers form this Hazards, the following precautions are required:
• Excavated material shall be controlled from falling back into the excavated area where employees are
working. This is normally achieved by placing the spoil at a distance from the edge of the excavation
consistent with the nature of the material and the type of the operations.
• Provide scaling to remove loose rock or soil or install protective barricades and other equivalent
protection to protect employees against falling rock, soil, or materials.
• Spoils should be immediately transported to the pit, stockpile or dumping ground as required. (disposed
of in an environmentally acceptable manner)
• Materials such as spoils, shoring materials, tools and equipment will be stored at a distance of least 02
meter away from the edge of an excavation.
• Prohibit workers from working on faces of sloped or benched excavations at levels above other workers
unless employees at lower levels are adequately protected from the hazard of falling, rolling, or sliding
material or equipment.
• Prohibit employees under loads that are handled by lifting or excavating equipment. To avoid being
Page 14 of 28
struck by any spillage or falling materials, require employees to stand away from vehicles being loaded
or unloaded.
11.4. Underground Cables & Buried Services Hazards
Buried services, existing or newly installed, are a major concern during excavation work. Potential hazards
include fatalities or serious injuries to employees and property damage (buried services and E&I cables,
unscheduled plant shutdown and delay to work schedule.
Common buried services found in a construction site are:
• Water mains (Fire, Industrial and Common Services).
• Electrical cables (High Voltage and Low Voltage, Permanent and Temporary).
• Drainages and Sewers.
• Water courses
• Fuel pipes (Oil, Gas and Chemical).
• Communication and Optic Fiber cables (Telephone and Instrumentation).
• Before the commencement of the excavation work, an excavation permit to work (PTW) shall be
obtained; the Contractors & Subcontractor will perform a detection of cables and buried services within
the excavation area. Physically marked or pegged on the ground to indicate the presence of electrical
cables & buried services detected. Indicate also in the services and utilities drawings of such E&I cables
& buried services detected.
• No Excavation permit will be issued by the issuing authority without an excavation clearance or
certificate is signed by all the section managers (Instrumentation, Electrical, Mechanical, piping), see
related paragraph <<Excavation Clearance Certificate>>
• Contractors & Subcontractor shall be responsible for detecting, identifying and marking of all E&I cables
and buried services on work area affected by the excavation work. Contractors & Subcontractor will
indicate and submit to COMPANY a copy of the updated utilities and services drawing.
• Before the commencement of excavation work where E&I cables and buried services have been
detected, trial pits will be manually open to determine the exact location of the buried services, the
depth where it is rested, types of protection provided and more importantly, the direction on the where
the buried services lead.
• Manual excavation will be employed until services are exposed and instruction given by Competent
Person before work commences.
• While the excavation is open, underground installations shall be protected, supported or removed as
necessary to safeguard employees .During excavation, buried services will be prominently marked or
peg for easy identification.
• Electronic Scan locators should be used as well.
Note: All underground services shall be regarded as “live
11.5. Confined Space Hazards
Page 15 of 28
• Excavations and trenches should be kept free from asphyxiating, toxic or explosive gases. These may
be natural gases like H2S, methane and sulphur dioxide, atmospheric hazards may be created by an
accumulated gas inside the excavation due to leakage from adjacent pipes or installations.
• Vehicles or excavation equipments and dewatering mumps located too near to the excavation can
accumulate and create a toxic atmosphere by products of such plants includes carbon dioxide and
carbon monoxide which is heavier than air, that is hazardous for the workers inside the excavation pit or
trenches .Leakage of propane and butane from Gas cylinders has a potential danger to the workers
inside the excavation.[Ref.B3]
• Contractor & Subcontractor or performing authority shall ensure full compliance with PTW system
including the use of all the PTW supporting documents (e.g. confined space check-list, excavation
check-list, confined space gas test certificate, excavation clearance certificate) .
• Construction plant and excavation equipment with internal combustion engines should be positioned
away from excavation pit.
• Atmospheric testing shall be conducted in excavations over 4 feet deep (1.22 m) where hazardous
atmospheres could reasonably be expected to exist (e.g. landfill areas, near hazardous substance
storage, gas pipelines).
• Wherever required in excavation and trenches considered as PTW required confined space, and after
the completion of the Gas Test by an authorised person, if it is required and deemed necessary
because of the presence of the most three common atmospheric hazards found in excavation or
trenches, a continuous forced ventilation shall be provided to prevent the build up of toxic gas or prevent
exposure to an atmosphere containing a flammable gas in excess of 10 percent of the lower flammable
limit ( LFL).
• Adequate precautions will be taken to prevent employee exposure to atmospheres containing less than
19.5 percent oxygen or other hazardous atmospheres. These precautions include providing appropriate
respiratory protection or forced ventilation. Where needed, respiratory protection will be used in
accordance with the Minimum Safety Standard on Respiratory Protection[Ref.B4].
• Gas Testing shall be performed by a trained and qualified person (Authorized Gas Tester) using a
properly calibrated direct reading instrument with audible and visual alarms.
• Monitoring should be continuous where controls are used to reduce the level of atmospheric
contaminants to acceptable threshold limit and when condition changes can occur.
• Monitors will be maintained and calibrated in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
• The frequency of the gas test is furthermore determined in the confined space PTW and the result of the
gas test shall be recorded in the gas test certificate associated with the confined space permit. This is a
requirement under eni e&p - Confined space Entry
11.5.2. Emergency Rescue and Equipment
• Workers working in excavation pit shall be briefed on the potential hazards involved, escape routes and
the emergency and rescue procedures will the need arises.
• Adequate first aid and effective rescue equipment will be provided in close proximity to an excavation.
• Emergency rescue equipment, such as breathing apparatus, a safety harness and life line, or a basket
stretcher, shall be readily available where hazardous atmospheric conditions exist or may reasonably be
expected to develop during work in an excavation, this equipment shall be attended when in use.
• Further increases in safety will be achieved by various means such as expanded outreach and training.
Page 16 of 28
• First aid Equipment
11.6. Water Accumulation Hazards
• Employees should not work in excavations that contain or are accumulating water unless precautions
have been taken to protect employees from hazards posed by water accumulation.
• The precautions taken could include, for example, special support or shield systems to protect from
cave-ins, water removal to control the level of accumulating water, or use of safety harnesses and
lifelines.
• If water is controlled or prevented from accumulating by the use of water removal equipment, the water
removal equipment and operation shall be monitored by a person trained in the use of the equipment,
particular safety precaution shall be ensured during water removal equipment refuelling.
• If excavation work interrupts the natural drainage of surface water (such as streams), diversion ditches,
dikes, or other suitable means will be used to prevent surface water from entering the excavation.
• Excavations subject to runoff from heavy rains shall be re-inspected by the competent person to
determine if additional precautions should be taken.
11.7. Mechanized and Mobile Equipment Hazards
• Construction activities are performed in ever changing environment and conditions, this requires a regular
movement of workers and construction mobile equipments (loader, backhoe and dump truck .etc), any
use of mechanized equipment in construction creates significant crushing and striking hazards, especially
in excavation work.
• There are potentials hazards created by mobile equipments manoeuvring and reversing in construction
site, in particular in congested areas where hazards are significant and if not mitigated could lead to
fatalities or serious injuries or property damage.
• Accidents involving mobile equipment are frequent in construction sites and occur when safety rules are
not followed; this is why careful attention should be given to hazards created by this type of mechanized
and mobile equipments.
• Workers are not allowed inside an excavation while the excavator is in motion and working.
• A trained watch man wearing reflecting vest shall be provided to assist the operator when operating close
proximity to trees and other solid object such as pre-cast element, equipments or any installation. Also
shall warn any unnecessary personnel within the excavated area or equipment operation radius.
• Workers shall not be positioned with the swing radius of the mechanized and mobile equipments; in any
case safety instruction shall be given to all the workers working near operating excavating equipment to
work in a safe position such that they are not in danger of falling into or contacting the machine's moving
parts.
• Mechanized and mobile equipment operators shall be trained and hold the required operating licence.
• Trained banks man wearing reflecting vest shall be provided when mechanized and mobile equipments
are manoeuvring or reversing in congested areas.
• All mechanized and heavy mobile equipments shall be fitted with a back up alarm.
• All mechanized and heavy mobile equipments shall be in good working conditions and fulfil the
Page 17 of 28
requirements of the host country regulations.

• All mechanized and heavy mobile equipments shall be inspected by a qualified person on regular basis
and record shall be kept.
• Loaders and backhoe, bobcat are primarily earth moving equipments; they should not be used for lifting
purpose.
11.8. Vehicular Traffic Hazards
• Employees exposed to vehicular traffic shall be provided with, and will wear warning vests or other
suitable garments marked with or made of reflectorized or high-visibility material. Warning vests worn by
flagmen shall be red or orange and be of reflectorized material if worn during night work.
• Stop blocks – can be used to prevent vehicles over running the excavation edge. These shall be
positioned at a sufficient distance from the edge to avoid the danger of it breaking away under the weight
of the vehicles.
• Special safety provisions consisting of additional bracing or other effective means are taken at
excavations adjacent to streets, railroads, or other sources of external vibrations or superimposed loads.
• Similar provisions are taken in areas that have been previously filled.
11.9. Adjacent Structures Hazards
• Support systems (such as shoring, bracing, or underpinning) will be used to assure the stability of
structures and the protection of employees where excavation operations could affect the stability of
adjoining buildings, walls, or other structures.
• No excavation work will take place below the level of the base of an adjacent foundation, retaining wall, or
other structure until it has been determined by a qualified Competent Person that such excavation should
not create a hazard to workers, or until adequate safety measures have been taken for the protection of
workers.
• Undermined sidewalks and/or pavements will be supported to safely carry all anticipated loads.
• If the stability of adjoining buildings or walls is endangered by excavations, either shoring, bracing,
underpinning, or some other method affording equivalent protection for workers will be provided as
necessary to ensure their safety. All such systems are inspected daily or more often, as conditions
warrant.
12. PROTECTION SYSTEM

• Any work relating to excavation shall be covered in the construction phase plan and the appropriate
processes put in place.
• Protective systems are methods of protecting workers from cave –ins of material than can fall or roll into
an excavation, also protect from the collapse of adjacent structures.
• Employees who enter excavations 5 feet (1.5 m) or more in depth will be protected by a system of
shoring, sloping of the ground, benching, or other alternate means when examination by a qualified
person indicates that hazardous ground movement may be expected.
• Shoring, sloping and benching are all acceptable protective systems, it is up to the planners of the
construction project and the competent person on site to determine which systems are most appropriate.
• When determining the protection system for an excavation, following factors will be considered:
o type of excavation (Mechanical or Manual);
o ground condition (Soft, Hard, Clay, Rock etc.);
Page 18 of 28
o ground water condition.
For all other excavations or trenches, a survey of soil prior to excavation by trained and competent person will
indicate and provide enough information for suitable method of excavation and support to be used.
12.1. Shoring System
Shoring systems are structures of timber, mechanical, or hydraulic systems that support the sides of an
excavation and which are designed to avoid cave –in.
• Shoring for excavation with depth of more than 6 feet (2 meters) should be undertaken by a
qualified and trained engineer.
• Material used for shoring will be of good construction, adequate strength, free from defects.
• Timber used will be of adequate width and thickness.
• No part of the shoring of any excavation will be removed until effective means have been taken to
avoid hazards to employees from moving ground.
• Shoring installation and removal shall be performed by trained and qualified workers.
12.2. Slope and Benching System
• Slope and benching are another protective systems required to protect workers from cave in
hazards , sloping in a method of excavating in which the walls of an excavation are laid back to an “
angle of repose ” suitable to the type of soil .
• Walls or banks of an excavation will be cut to a reasonable slope to prevent the collapsed of its wall
or bank. The type and condition of the ground within the excavation area will be considered.
13. SOIL CLASSIFICATION
For all the excavations or trenches, a survey of soil prior to excavation by a competent person will usually
provide sufficient information for suitable method of excavation and protective systems to be determined,
and these are matters that a competent person should decide.
Soil Rock is the most stable, and type C soil is the least stable., soils are categorized not only by how
cohesive they are, but also by conditions in which they are found, stable soil is practicably unachievable in
the excavation of a trench, drilling and blasting is normally used in rock excavation, this excavation method,
fractures the rocks and render it less stable.
13.1. Type A Soil
Type A sol can be clay, silty clay, or sandy clay, generally speaking a soil cannot be considered type A if it
fissured or under any other effect such as:
• Vibration from heavy traffic, pile driving, having been previously disturbed or excavated.
• Where it is part of layered system, where less stable soil is near bottom of the excavation, with more
stable soil on the top.
• Where it is subject to other factors which would make it unstable –such as the presence of ground water
or melting condition
Note: It is worthy to note that that construction at the site creates sufficient vibration to prevent any soil from
being type A. If vibration can be felt while standing near an excavation, the competent person should
Page 19 of 28
consider downgrading Type A soil to Type B or C.
13.2. Type B Soil
Type B soil include both cohesive and non cohesive soil , they include silts , sandy loams , medium clay ,
and unstable rock , soils that might be classified as A but have fissures or are subject to vibration , may be
also classified as “B” soil .
13.3. Type C Soil
Type C soil is the most unstable and therefore the most dangerous of the three soil types, they are easily
recognized by the continual sloughing of the sides of the walls of excavation. If soil is submerged, or water
is seeping from the sides of an excavation, it’s very probably "C" soil. Soil may be classified as Type C if an
excavation is dug in "layered" soils, where different soil types lay on top of each other.
When an unstable soil type is underneath a stable soil type in an excavation, the "weakest link" will soon
give way. Once soil has been excavated, it will never be returned to the composition as it was naturally
formed; previously disturbed soil is commonly found above existing utilities, such as water, sewer, electrical
and gas lines. This makes work around these utilities more dangerous due to the unstable nature of the soil.
Note: If you are uncertain of the soil type, ALWAYS assume Type C soil!


The functions involved in the process described herein arrange for the preservation of the documentation for the
purposes of the traceability of its individual steps.
16. DISTRIBUTION
For Application:
For Information:
17. LIST OF ANNEXES
1. Annex A-Example of Slope Configurations.
2. Annex B- Excavation Check-list.
3. Annex C- Excavation Clearance Certificate .
4. Annex D- Sample Excavation PTW Format.
5. Annex E- Sample Gas Test Certificate.
Page 20 of 28
ANNEX A
Excavation in Construction Example of Slope Configurations
All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio.

Excavations made in Type A soil
All simple slope excavations 20 feet (6 m) or

less in depth will have a maximum allowable
slope of 3/4:1.
All benched excavations 20 feet (6 m) or

less in depth will have a maximum allowable
slope of 3/4 to 1 and maximum bench
dimensions as indicated.
All excavations 8 feet (2.4 m) or less in

depth which have unsupported vertically
sided lower portions will have a maximum
vertical side of 3 1/2 feet (1 m).
All excavations more than 8 feet (2.4 m) but

not more than 12 feet (3.6 m) in depth with
unsupported vertically sided lower portions
will have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1
and a maximum vertical side of 3 1/2 feet (1
m).
All excavations 20 feet (6 m) or less in depth

which have vertically sided lower portions
that are supported or shielded will have a
maximum allowable slope of 3/4:1. The
support or shield system must extend at
least 18 inches (0.45 m) above the top of
the vertical side.
Page 21 of 28
ANNEX B
Excavation in Construction
EXCAVATION SAFETY CHECKLIST
CONTRACTOR & SUBCONTRACTOR:
TASK SUPERVISOR :
WEATHER CONDITION :
DEPTH / WIDTH / LENGTH:
SOIL TYPE :
TYPE OF PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS :
DESCRIPTION Check
Yes No N/A
EXCAVATION
Excavations and Protective Systems inspected by Competent Person daily, before start of work.
Competent Person has authority to remove workers from excavation immediately if dangerous
situation occurs.
Permit to Work issued and permit requirements implemented &followed
Safety toolbox talk conducted before the commencement of the job .
Employees protected from loose rock or soil.
Additional PPE (as required) in beyond site PPE worn by all employees.
Spoils, materials, and equipment are located a minimum of 2 m from edge of excavation.
Protection Barriers provided at all remote excavations, wells, pits, shafts, etc.
Walkways and crossing bridge over excavations 2 m or more in depth equipped with guardrails.
Warning vests or other highly visible vest provided and worn by all employees exposed to
vehicular traffic.
Workers prohibited from working or walking under suspended loads.
Workers prohibited from working on faces of sloped or benched excavations above other
employees.
Adequate Warning system established and used when mobile equipment is operating near edge
of excavation.
UTILITIES
Excavation clearance certificate signed by all Mechanical, Electrical, Piping, Instrument

Department.
Precise location of utilities marked and Identified when near excavation.
Page 22 of 28
Underground installations protected, supported, or removed when excavation is open.
WET CONDITION
Safety Measures taken to protect employees from water accumulation.
Water removal equipment monitored by Competent Person.
Surface water controlled or diverted.
Examination and inspection made after each rainstorm or heavy rain .
HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERE
If classed as Confined space! PTW required &and issued
Atmosphere tested when there is a possibility of oxygen deficiency or build-up of hazardous

gases.
Oxygen content is between 19.5% and 22.5%.
Adequate Ventilation provided to prevent flammable gas build-up to 20% of lower explosive limit of
the gas.
Testing conducted to ensure that atmosphere remains safe.
Emergency rescue Equipment readily available where a hazardous atmosphere will or does exist.
Workers have adequate training in the use of Personal Protective and Emergency rescue
Equipment.
Full body safety harness and life line individually attended when workers enter deep confined
excavation.
EMERGENCY ARRANGEMENTS
DESIGN AND PLAN OF EXCAVATION WORK
MEETING OF ALL TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
VEHICLE MANAGEMENT ARRANGEMENTS
NAME OF INSPECTOR
JOB POSITION
INSPECTION DATE
SIGNATURE
HSE REPRESENTATIVE
Any Observation :
Page 23 of 28
ANNEX C
Excavation in Construction
SAMPLE EXCAVATION CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE (ECC)
ECC NO.___________ Supplementary to Excavation Permit No.:____________
1. Excavation PTW Required from: ………………….. To: ………………………

(7)days only
2. Precise Location:
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
3. Description of the
Activity:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
4. a. Excavation Depth: ……………. …Mts. b. Length: ………………. Mts. c. Width:…………………… Mts.
5. Method of Excavation: Manual / Mechanical
6. Equipments to be used:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
7. a. Performing Authority Name: …………………………………………… Company: ………………………………………..
b. Performing Authority Signature: ……………………………………… Date:

…………………………………………………
Note: The Issuing Authorities from EPC Contractors are responsible to give the clearance for the Excavation activity to be
performed by the Sub-Contractor.
8. Mechanical / Piping Department:

Comments:………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
Name of the Mechanical /Piping Manager: …………………………………………………………………………………………
Signature of the Mechanical /Piping Manager: ………………………………………Date:……………………………………….
9. Electrical Department:
Comments:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
Name of the Electrical Manager: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
Signature of the Electrical Manager. ………………………………………………….Date:……………………………………………..
10. Instrumentation Department:

Comments: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
Name of the Instrumentation Manager:…………………………………………………………………………………………………
Signature of the Instrumentation Manager.:……………………………………………..Date:……………………………………….
11. Civil Department:

Comments: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
Name of the Civil Manager / : ………………………………………………………………………………………………….
Signature of the Civil Manager. : ……………………………………………………. Date:……………………………..
12. Excavation PTW can be issued: YES / NO 13. Excavation PTW No. :
SIGNATURE: ____________________
DATE: __________________________
Page 24 of 28
ANNEX D
EXCAVATION PERMIT
Page 25 of 28
Page 26 of 28
ANNEX E
SAMPLE GAS TEST CERTIFICATE
Page 27 of 28
Page 28 of 28

Appendix 9 - Eni Safety Standard

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Appendix 9 - Eni Safety Standard

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

eni spa Letter SEQ/e&p 55/RG of 01/12/2010

exploration & production division Doc. N° 1.3.3.21

Rev Date Pages Revision Description

00 August 2010 25 First Issue

01 December 25 HSE-IMS Management Representative

5. FUNCTION INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS

• Ensure contractors confined space programs, procedures are in accordance with

• Appointment and approval of a designated Person(s) to issue authorization for confined

• Be competent and have a working knowledge of their own job.

• All safety measures are strictly followed.

• The individual is also responsible for wearing the proper PPE.

5.3. Issuing Authority

• All steps in the work activities have been identified.

• All hazards have been identified and evaluated.

• Copies of all issued permits are displayed

• The work site is examined when work is suspended or completed

• He shall be familiar with the required PPE and their use.

5.4. Performing Authority

• Issuing Authority is always informed when work is suspended or completed.

o When the works is suspended or completed the permit must be formally

5.5. Confined Space Attendant

The Confined Space Attendant shall:

• be aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized entrants.

• communicate with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor entrant status and to

5.6. Gas Tester

5.6.1. Gas Testing

Gas Tester shall

• be competent and formally authorized by the Company

6. HAZARDS AND PROPERTIES OF A CONFINED SPACE

• Toxicity, Flammability, Asphyxiation , or

6.1. Confined Space Hazard Assessment and Control Program guidelines

1. Guidance on how to identify confined spaces.

2. Identifying means to prevent entry to confined spaces

5. A suitable plan to eliminate or control all hazards identified.

9. Program review whenever there is a change in circumstances or at least annually, to identify

10. Isolation plan

11. Cleaning Plan

6.2. Hazard Identification and Assessment

The Hazard Identification and Assessment should identify:

Some conditions may be hazardous; they include:

6.3. Hazards Related to Confined Space

Location Condition Symptoms Sources

Flammable or explosive range

7. CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PRECAUTIONS

7.1. PTW Process

7.2. Mandatory Information on the "Entry Permit" Form

7.3. Pre-entry Briefings and Checks

7.4. Isolation of Confined Spaces

7.5. Cleaning of Confined Spaces

7.6. Ventilation of Confined Space

The ventilation of confined spaces may be achieved by:

7.7. Use of Ventilation Equipment

1. Ventilation shall preferably be accomplished using a positive method of mechanical

7.8. Ventilation Air Source

7.9. Atmospheric Testing within confined space

• Oxygen deficiency or enrichment.

7.10. Gas Testing Requirements

• Method of and sequence of entry.

• Ventilation equipment shall be shut off before the tests commence.

7.11. Testing Within a Confined Space

7.12. Testing Procedure

Calibration of a sampling device shall be conducted as often as recommended by the

Compare sampling results to the acceptable entry conditions:

Date: ___ / _ / ___